About this Document
This document provides supporting information for the commands used to monitor, test, and maintain hardware components of an Avaya Server or Gateway system. The commands help the user to access Avaya systems’ extensive background testing and technician-demanded tests, which allow various problems to be addressed before they severely disrupt call processing.

Document set
Although this maintenance book is published separately, it is part of a set:
l

Audience
This document is for use by field technicians, remote service personnel, and user-assigned maintenance personnel, as a command reference to help diagnose and repair Avaya Servers and Media Gateways. This document may also be used as a training aid for teaching technicians how to maintain the system. This document assumes that the technician has a working knowledge of telecommunications fundamentals and PBX maintenance practices. This document also assumes that the system was initially installed and tested properly and brought into service with every fault cleared. Adjuncts and other devices external to the switch are covered by their own service documentation. Note: This document is designed to be read online and in paper format. Because of the large volume of information, cross-references have been added to make it easier to locate information when using the manual online.

Bold for menu selections, tabs, buttons, and field names Right arrow > to separate a sequence of menu selections

l

Keys

Special font for keyboard keys and SAT screen clickable buttons

Other conventions used in this book:
l

Physical dimensions are in English units [Foot Pound Second (FPS)], followed by metric units [Centimeter Gram Second (CGS)] in parentheses. Wire-gauge measurements are in AWG, followed by the diameter in millimeters in parentheses.

l

Circuit-pack codes (such as TN790B or TN2182B) are shown with the minimum acceptable alphabetic suffix (like the “B” in the code TN2182B). Generally, an alphabetic suffix higher than that shown is also acceptable. However, not every vintage of either the minimum suffix or a higher suffix code is necessarily acceptable. The Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager (555-245-207), contains current information on circuit pack codes and functionality.

Safety labels and security alert labels
Observe all caution, warning, and danger statements to help prevent loss of service, equipment damage, personal injury, and security problems. This book uses the following safety labels and security alert labels:

! CAUTION:
CAUTION:

A caution statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to software, loss of data, or an interruption in service.

!
WARNING:

WARNING: A warning statement calls attention to a situation that can result in harm to hardware or equipment.

Downloading this book from the Web
You can download the latest version of this book from the Avaya Web site. Avaya makes every effort to ensure that the information in this book is complete and accurate. contact your local Avaya authorized dealer for additional help. information can change after we publish this book.com. Access the Avaya web site at http://support. The system displays the Find Documentation and Downloads by Product Name page. You must have access to the Internet. Select from the numerically and alphabetically sorted documents on the page. and a copy of Acrobat Reader must be installed on your personal computer. 2. call the Avaya National Customer Care Support Line at 1-800-242-2121 Toll fraud. Click on the FIND DOCUMENTATION and DOWNLOADS by PRODUCT NAME link. 3. However.Technical assistance
Technical assistance
Avaya provides the following resources for technical assistance.
Within the US
For help with:
l
Feature administration and system applications. Therefore. the Avaya Web site might also contain new product information and updates to the information in this book. To download the latest version of this book: 1. You can also download these updates from the Avaya Web site.
Communication Manager Release 5. call the Avaya Technical Consulting Support at 1-800-225-7585 Maintenance and repair. call Avaya Toll Fraud Intervention at 1-800-643-2353
l
l
International
For all international resources.0 Issue 4 January 2008
19
.avaya.

release.0 Issue 4 January 2008
21
. and reset commands. Some commands apply to certain servers and not others.Chapter 1: Maintenance SAT Commands
This chapter contains descriptions of existing and modified SAT commands on Avaya Servers and Gateways. see Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509). and error codes for busyout. This information is divided into sections:
l l l l l l l l l l
New SAT Commands on page 22 Modified SAT Commands on page 22 Replaced and removed commands on page 23 SAT Command-Line Syntax on page 25 Common Input Parameters on page 25 Common Command Output Screens on page 28 Error Messages on page 32 Busyout and Release Commands on page 33 Common Error Codes for maintenance commands on page 34 Alarm and Error Categories on page 36
Many commands can be run from the Communication Manager web interface. For more information on using the web interface. and it may produce different results depending on the configuration of the system. Introductory sections explain the command entries.
Communication Manager Release 5. A SAT command may apply to a number of servers and media gateways. common command results.

and to list the system’s:
l
Manually delete license files from the operating system
number of registered IP endpoints number of registered IP endpoints with TCP signaling sockets established number of sockets used number of sockets on the system 2 of 2
l
l l
24 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. a lead off of the IPSI supports the power supply and fan. See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509) Replaced with Notes
isdn-testcall
isdnpri-testcall
list configuration license list measurements security -violations detail monitor security-violations login remove license reset login-session status clan-usage
serialnumber
Security Violations Detail Report Login Violations Status Report removed login-ID status socket-usage on page 509 Use status socket-usage to show a snapshot of the individual socket usage for each C-LAN or Processor Ethernet. Displays the progress of an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call on the specified trunk. Media Gateways and Servers
. there is no maintenance board. Instead.Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 6: Previously removed and replaced SAT commands 2 of 2 Previous command display login list logins emergency transfer removed In port networks with IPSI circuit packs.

In the List of SAT Commands on page 36. cabinet number 03 can be entered as 3. Otherwise. For example. and sometimes qualifiers that modify the execution of the command. Characters shown in italic bold type are variables.SAT Command-Line Syntax
SAT Command-Line Syntax
Each command consists of an action word. The command syntax is presented in this section as follows: Action test bold Object station bold Required and Optional Qualifiers extension [short | long] bold italic if a variable.
Common Input Parameters
Characters shown in this section in bold type are entered literally on the command line. A partially spelled word is recognized when enough letters are entered to distinguish it from other valid entries.0 Issue 4 January 2008
25
. bold if entered literally [bracketed] if optional ( | ) separates exclusive or choice qualifiers
Command words can be abbreviated. Press the HELP key to show every available command. an object upon which the action is performed. For a description of other typography used in commands. Drop leading zeroes from numerical entries. One type of common input parameter is for specifying a hardware location. see Table 1: Explanation of typefaces on page 15. the syntax of the command appears under the heading at the beginning of each command description. For example: test alarms step long clear can be entered as t al st l c. the screen displays a selection of command words that match the abbreviation. or every valid qualifier for the command. Table 7: Hardware Location Parameters on page 26 explains the variations of specifying hardware location in a
Communication Manager Release 5.

and link numbers.or 2-digits) Media gateway number Media module number In a slot or port location field (such as 1V4 or 233V132). For example:
l l l
display cabinet requires a location entry of UU (display cabinet 12) display media-gateway requires a gateway number in the form GGG test port requires a location entry of UUCSSpp or GGGVMpp test port 5c0906 tests cabinet 5. indicates a gateway media module or port on a media module Some MOs. extension. Table 7: Hardware Location Parameters
Parameter Meaning
UUCSSpp GGGVMpp Uc UU C SS GGG M V PN pp or ppp
The full address of a port: Universal cabinet. slot. or 3-digits)
The length of the hardware location differs for the various types of commands. port 6 test port 5V906 tests media gateway 5. Media Gateways and Servers
. The valid range of each variable differs depending on the type of configuration of the system. port circuit Cabinet number and carrier for the server Cabinet number (1-2 digits) Letter designation of a carrier Circuit pack’s slot in a carrier (1. Port circuit on a circuit pack or media module (1-. media module 9. 2-. port circuit Media gateway. media module. such as TDM-BUS. carrier C.Maintenance SAT Commands
command. TDM bus A in port network 5 is PN 05A.
26 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. and PN precedes the number. port 6
The list and display commands are useful in relating hardware locations to information such as PN number. For example. slot 9. are addressed by PN number. carrier.

to 3-digit member number of an individual trunk The extension number assigned to the port or other maintenance object. Use list and display to see extension numbers. Next available number The number of times a test sequence is to be repeated.to 3-digit trunk-group number Group number followed by a slash and a 1. long is destructive to call service. Table 8: Common Command Parameters 1 of 2
Parameter Meaning
PN# schedule
1. Use remove command-queue job# to cancel a queued command. list and test commands. The test sequence that is run varies for each maintenance object.
group# group#/ member# extension
next repeat# short long
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
For some maintenance objects. Use list cabinet to find which port networks are in each cabinet. 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. The usual selection screen for error and alarm reports is suppressed so that it does not interfere with the command’s execution when it is issued from the queue. The number of digits in an extension is determined by the system dial plan. Schedule used with display alarms or display errors generates a full report. when executed. and other components. 1. Schedule is available for display. Use schedule to specify a start time for the command.Common Input Parameters
See Table 8: Common Command Parameters on page 27 for other common input parameters. sends the output to the system printer. Use with test commands.or 2-digit port network number. Type of test sequence run for this maintenance object. Use list command-queue to see what commands are currently queued. The command is placed in the queue and. Use with test commands.0 Issue 4 January 2008
27
. This requires that the system printer is administered on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen.
The short sequence is always non-destructive and is the default. maintenance objects.

or until any test in the sequence fails. A report or log output screen listing one or more lines of results with error codes that indicate the reason for a FAIL or ABORT. See Common Error Codes for maintenance commands on page 34. Media Gateways and Servers
. If firmware counters are cleared while an actual problem exists. long clear clears every error counter. or a message giving a reason for a failure or abort. customer service may degrade due to calls being routed over faulty components. See Common Input Parameters on page 25. the sequence is run once. If no such alarms are active. An input screen for entering additional information required to complete the command.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
If every tests passes. Short clear clears only alarms pertinent to the tests in the short sequence. These commands and screens are described in this section. 2 of 2
Common Command Output Screens
Common output can be any of the following information:
l
A message or other indication that the command successfully completed. Long clear clears every alarm against the maintenance object if no errors are encountered. clear repeats the test sequence until any active alarms against the maintenance object are cleared by the passing of tests.
l
l
28 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. See Common Command Output Screens on page 28.Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 8: Common Command Parameters 2 of 2
Parameter Meaning
clear
Used with test commands.

Maintenance Name Alt. Name Test No. is designated as 01B (the component in carrier B of cabinet 1)
l
In critical-reliability systems. such as an IPSI. Other commands such as clear firmware-counters and reset also report a test number.0 Issue 4 January 2008
29
. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190) for specific MO information.Common Command Output Screens
Example Common Output Screen
command TEST RESULTS Port 02A Maintenance Name TONE-BD Alt. See Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. Alternate Name = nnnnn (extension) Trunk MO. For example:
l
a port circuit requires a full-length address such as 11C1502 (circuit number 2 on the circuit pack in cabinet 11.
Field Descriptions for Common Output Fields
Table 9: Field Descriptions for common output fields 1 of 2 Port Port location identifier. Alternate Name = nn/n (trunk-group#/member #) Personal CO line MO. carrier C. 1 of 2
Test No. The port length differs for the various types of commands. For example: Station MO. port network connectivity is duplicated as two independent sets of PNC components: A-PNC and B-PNC. Name The name of the MO as it appears in the alarm and error logs.
Communication Manager Release 5. Result 53 ABORT Error Code 2100
Each line on an error report represents one test result. Descriptions of each test and related error codes appear under each MO. See Table 7: Hardware Location Parameters on page 26 for a description of the field. slot 15) a control carrier component. The alternate name depends upon the type of the object. Alternate Name = P/23 (P/ personal CO line group #) The number of the test run on the MO as part of a test command.

NOT ASSIGNED: The location specified does not have a circuit pack administered to it.Announcement . and reset commands. For busyout. ABORT: The command was prevented from completing. release. consult the tables of test error codes under the relevant MO in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. See Table 10: Common Error Codes for busyout. FAIL: A serious error was detected by the test. no errors were detected by the test. and reset commands on page 34. EPN-DOWN: The EPN holding the MO is inaccessible. and reset commands on page 34. release. depending on the system configuration. NO BOARD: The system does not detect a circuit pack in the location specified on the command line. See Table 10: Common Error Codes for busyout.Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 9: Field Descriptions for common output fields 2 of 2 Result One of the following results:
l
PASS: The command successfully completed. For a test command.Speech Synthesis Each of these circuit packs has restrictions on how many can be in the system or a port network. Media Gateways and Servers
. For test commands and other commands that return a test result.Maintenance/Test . test. test. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190).Tone Detector .Call Classifier . 2 of 2
30 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Remove the extra circuit pack(s). CONFLICT: Another user was testing this maintenance object. see Common Error Codes for maintenance commands on page 34. EXTRA BOARD: This can appear for these circuit packs: . release. The expansion archangel (EA) link may be down.
l
l
l
l l
l l
l
Error Code
Indicates the reason for a FAIL or ABORT result. DISABLED: The MO or test was disabled by the disable command.

busyout . This restriction applies to such action commands as: . Up to 10 administration commands can run concurrently.test When an action command is acting on a circuit pack.Contention Between Simultaneous Commands
Contention Between Simultaneous Commands
The following limits apply to maintenance and administration activities:
l l l l
Up to 15 users can be logged the system at the same time.release .status .display .monitor
l
l
l
Communication Manager Release 5.clear . When required resources are already in use.0 Issue 4 January 2008
31
. Up to 5 maintenance commands can run concurrently. Most commands require the use of shared system resources in order to run.set . that circuit pack and every maintenance object located on it are unavailable for other commands. Only one such command can run at one time.remove . Display-only commands such as the following generally do not conflict with any other commands: .change .get . you can use only one command at a time on a maintenance object or other system entity.recycle . In general. the command aborts.

The login id of the conflicting user and the conflicting command is shown. is successfully canceled with cancel hardware-group from another terminal. The PN in which the specified board resides is not available. try again later Board not inserted Command resources busy.
The command cannot be executed. The command is in conflict with another currently executing command. Restart the command. Error message explanations Error message All maintenance resources busy. Press CANCEL to clear. Follow normal escalation procedures. The format for the board location is incorrect. test hardware-group.Maintenance SAT Commands
Error Messages
Examples of error messages and their meanings are listed in the table below. An update of the standby server is in progress. running in the foreground.
32 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. There is a resource problem. and then resubmit Error encountered. perhaps because of corrupt software. can’t complete request Hardware-group command aborted with cancel command entered from another terminal ’login id’:’command’ has a command conflict Port/Board invalid PN is not available save translations has a command conflict Meaning Every available maintenance resource is currently in use. The specified board is not inserted in the system.

See Field Descriptions for Common Output Fields on page 29 for field descriptions. so that INADS can determine the state of the object.0 Issue 4 January 2008
33
. To prevent busyouts of particular buses.
l
l
l
List every busied-out MO by entering error type 18 in the Error Type field on the Hardware Errors Report screen (see display errors on page 239). In the busyout state:
l l
The object is removed from active service and is not available for use by call processing. A warning alarm with error type 18 is logged against each busied out object. Services dependent on the busied out component are dropped. Demand maintenance tests can be run on the object. providing the object is not otherwise incapacitated. carrier c. If the component supports a link.Busyout and Release Commands
Busyout and Release Commands
The busyout command places the object of the command in a maintenance busy state. technicians should move dedicated tone time slots to another bus (the other half of the duplicated bus). slot 3 with five administered ports).
busyout board 01C03 Command Results Port 01C03 01C0301 01C0302 01C0303 01C0304 01C0305 Maintenance Name ANL-BD ANL-16-L ANL-16-L ANL-16-L ANL-16-L ANL-16-L Alt. The matching release command returns the maintenance object to service.
Example busyout output screen
The following screen shows a typical result for busyout board 1c03 (analog line circuit pack in cabinet 1. but some tests require that the object be released to complete. the link is dropped. Name Result PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS Error Code
5409 5416 5421 5422 5411
Command successfully completed
Communication Manager Release 5. No scheduled or periodic background tests are run on the object while it is busied out.

Use busyout board to place every object on the circuit pack in the out-of-service state. then try the reset again. A reset of this circuit pack requires that every maintenance object on it be in the out-of-service state.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following screen shows a typical result for most maintenance objects for busyout link 1. Retry the command at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times.
busyout link 1 COMMAND RESULTS Port 01A0617 Maintenance Name ETH-PT Alt. Internal system error. test. release. A DS1 interface circuit pack could not be reset because it is currently supplying the on-line synchronization reference. Table 10: Common Error Codes for busyout. Attempt was made to busyout an object that was already busied out. and try the reset again. and reset commands. Try the command again at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times. release. Attempt was made to release an object that was not first busied out. Media Gateways and Servers
. and reset commands on page 34 lists common error codes associated with abort and fail results for busyout. release. test. 1 of 2
1010 1011 1015
ABORT ABORT ABORT
34 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Use set sync to designate a new DS1 interface circuit pack as the on-line reference. Name Result PASS Error Code
Command successfully completed
Common Error Codes for maintenance commands
Table 10: Common Error Codes for busyout. and reset commands 1 of 2
Error Code Command Result Description/Recommendation
ABORT 0 1005 ABORT ABORT
System resources are unavailable to run command. many maintenance objects have other unique error codes. In addition to these. test.

Call Classifier. For both results. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). replace the circuit pack. See the applicable maintenance object (from the Maintenance Name field) in Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. the circuit pack is now running and should be tested. the circuit pack was not successfully restarted after being halted. Resolve as many alarms as possible on the station and trunk MOs. Use set tdm PC to switch the control channel and system tones to the other TDM bus. Maintenance is currently active on the maximum number of maintenance objects that the system can support. and reset commands 2 of 2
Error Code Command Result Description/Recommendation
1026
ABORT
The specified TDM bus cannot be busied out because the control channel or system tones are being carried on it.Common Error Codes for maintenance commands
Table 10: Common Error Codes for busyout. Try the command again at 1-minute intervals up to 5 times. The requested action successfully completed. 2 of 2
1426 2012 2500 2100 62524 62525 62526
ABORT ABORT ABORT ABORT
NO BOARD EXTRA BD
1 2
FAIL FAIL
FAIL
PASS
Communication Manager Release 5. This result can appear for: Maintenance/Test. System resources to run this command were unavailable. If the command was a reset.0 Issue 4 January 2008
35
. the circuit pack was not successfully halted. release. Internal system error. A common cause is that the system contains a large number of administered stations or trunks with installed circuit packs that are not physically connected. Tone Detector. Announcement circuit packs. Remove any extra circuit packs. or busyout these MOs to prevent maintenance activity on them. depending on system configuration. test. For reset commands. Then try the command again. The user must use the MG’s CLI to clear the mode. The circuit pack is not physically installed. For reset commands. Speech Synthesis circuit packs Each of these circuit packs has restrictions on how many can be installed in the system or in a port network. The port cannot be released because the MG has the Emergency Transfer Mode set.

The following is an example of the results of list aar route-chosen. Other fields on the input screen help to further customize the alarm and error report.
List of SAT Commands aar route-chosen
list aar route-chosen
list aar route-chosen x [partition n] [schedule] Screen name: AAR ROUTE CHOSEN REPORT Use list aar route-chosen to see the parameters used by AAR to route a call to a specific number (x). The HELP key displays a list of categories.
list aar route-chosen 5551234 AAR ROUTE CHOSEN REPORT Location: Dialed String 5 all Total Min Max 7 7 Route Pattern 2 Partitioned Group Number: Call Type hnpa Node Number 1
Location all
36 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. See also the AAR Routing Table for more information about the routing of the call.Maintenance SAT Commands
Alarm and Error Categories
Use display alarms on page 49 and display errors on page 239 to generate reports for certain groups of maintenance objects. Use the Category field of the input screen to restrict the report to maintenance objects in a specific category. Media Gateways and Servers
.

Node number as matched on the AAR Digit Analysis Table. See change aar analysis in the Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509) screen reference for full explanation of this field. Defaults to all.List of SAT Commands
list aar route-chosen screen field descriptions
list aar route-chosen field descriptions Field Location Partitioned Group Number Dialed String Total Min Max Route Pattern Call Type Description Defaults to all. The matched entry in the AAR Digit Analysis Table. Route pattern used to route the call.0 Issue 4 January 2008
37
. Partitioned Group Number as entered on the command line or default 1. The call type as matched on the AAR Digit Analysis Table. Minimum and maximum length of the string matched in the AAR Digit Analysis Table.
Node Number Location
access-endpoint
See: busyout access-endpoint on page 37 release access-endpoint on page 38 status access-endpoint on page 38 test access-endpoint on page 40
busyout access-endpoint
busyout access-endpoint extension
Communication Manager Release 5.

use status access-endpoint to see the operational state of a non-signaling port on a DS1 interface or on an analog tie trunk circuit pack. Periodic and scheduled tests subsequently resume on the released ports.
For more information. see Common Input Parameters on page 25. For more information see Busyout and Release Commands on page 33.
release access-endpoint
release access-endpoint extension Use release access-endpoint to remove all ports associated with the specified access endpoint from a maintenance busy state. Maintenance completes background initialization testing on the released ports. busyout access-endpoint is destructive. Common Command Output Screens on page 28. the port field shows the port address of the released access endpoint.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Feature Interaction
busyout accessendpoint
extension
Extension of endpoint to busyout.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use busyout access-endpoint to busyout a specified access endpoint. Example: busyout access-endpoint 2501
An active call on the endpoint is dropped.
status access-endpoint
status access-endpoint extension Use status access-endpoint to see the status of an access endpoint and to locate facilities with which access endpoints communicate. Media Gateways and Servers
. For example. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33.
init inads craft nms
none
For the output of release access-endpoint 22502.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
release access-endpoint
extension
number of the access endpoint.
38 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

in-service/idle.List of SAT Commands
The following display shows a typical result for status access-endpoint 2300. voice-grade-data. The operational status of the access-endpoint channel: in-service/active. width is the number of DS0s that make up the access endpoint.
status access-endpoint 2300 ACCESS ENDPOINT STATUS Extension: Port: Communication Type: Width: Service State: 2300 02B0905 wideband 6 inservice/active
Connected Ports:01B1907 01B1908 01B1909 01B1910 01B1911 01B1912
status access-endpoint field descriptions
status access-endpoint Field Extension Port Communicati on Type Width Service State Connected Ports Description The extension number of the access endpoint. disconnected. voice-band-data. voice-band-data. 64k-data. The type of communication supported by the channel: 56k-data. For wideband access endpoint.0 Issue 4 January 2008
39
. The physical location (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) of the port for the access endpoint. voice-grade-data. wideband For 56k-data. the location is for the starting port. out-of-service. The location of any facility/endpoint to which this access-endpoint is connected. 64k-data.
Communication Manager Release 5. For wideband. width is 1. maintenance-busy.

These links provide connectivity to ASAI adjuncts.Maintenance SAT Commands
ip-services). The name of the AE Services Server on the AE Services Administration page of the IP Services form (change ip-services) The status of the TCP/IP Tunnel Connection and CTI link. See status link on page 358 for more details on links.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
status aesvcs cti-link
init inads craft cust
The following example shows a typical output for status aesvcs cti-link. Media Gateways and Servers
. Use release cti-link. which are connected to an Ethernet LAN. the link has been busied out with busyout cti-link. down/established 1 of 2
AE Services Server Service State
44 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.
status aesvcs cti-link AE SERVICES CTI LINK STATUS CTI Link 1 2 3 Version Mnt AE Services Busy Server no no no server1 server2 server1 Service State down established down Msgs Sent 0 0 0 Msgs Rcvd 0 0 0
4 3 4
status aesvcs cti-link field descriptions
status aesvcs cti-link field descriptions 1 of 2 Field CTI Link Version Mnt Busy Description The CTI link number 1-16 Negotiated ASAI protocol version y/n If y.

0 Issue 4 January 2008
45
. 2 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
status aesvcs cti-link field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Msgs Sent Msgs Rcvd Description Number of ASAI messages sent during a specified 30-minute window collection period. Number of ASAI messages received during a specified 30-minute window collection period.

as set on the Enabled field on the IP SERVICES form (change ip-services). Shows the number of active AESVCS Server connections over this interface The current state of this interface. Media Gateways and Servers
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
status aesvcs interface
init inads craft cust
The following example shows a typical output for status aesvcs interface.the Enabled field is n on the IP Services form (change ip-services) for this interface.
status aesvcs interface AE SERVICES INTERFACE STATUS Local Node procr Enabled? yes Number of Connections 1 Status listening
status aesvcs interface field descriptions
status aesvcs interface field descriptions Field Local Node Enabled Number of Connections Status Description The name of the AESVCS interface as administered on the IP SERVICES form (change ip-services) Shows if the interface is enabled.this interface is not functioning and cannot accept incoming communications.the interface is up and running and AESVCS Servers can connect over it. Listening .
46 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Intfce-down .Maintenance SAT Commands
status aesvcs interface
status aesvcs interface Use status aesvcs interface to see the status of the interfaces over which Avaya Communication Manager is listening for AESVCES Server connections. Disabled .

Minor alarm — A problem that could disable a local area of the system and so noticeably degrade the system.
l
Warning alarm — A problem that is important enough to log. Select different options on this screen for the type of report you want to see and press ENTER. if any. This causes a call to be placed to INADS. or may be external to the system but not severe enough to cause a noticeable degradation of service. ALARM TYPES Active? y_ Resolved? n_ Major? y_ Minor? y_ Warning? y_ REPORT PERIOD Interval: m_ From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__ EQUIPMENT TYPE ( Choose only one. Major alarm — A problem that widely degrades the system and seriously impairs service.
display alarms ALARM REPORTS The following options control which alarms will be displayed. The subsystem monitors the system hardware and logs problems as errors or alarms. The type of alarm indicates the impact of the problem. The system stamps resolved alarms with the date and time the problem was corrected.
l
l
A resolved alarm is a problem that has been corrected. The system handles any errors associated with the alarms as “resolved.Maintenance SAT Commands
The system creates the reports from the logs of the maintenance subsystem.”
Input for display alarms
Enter display alarms to display the Alarm Reports options screen. Media Gateways and Servers
. and the alarmed component of the system is functioning correctly again. of the following ) Media Gateway: ___ Cabinet: __ Port Network: __ Board Number: _______ Port: ________ Category: ________ Extension: _____ Trunk ( group/member ): ___/___ Page 1 of 1
50 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

any alarm that is active after the From date is used. minor. You can choose a combination of:
l l l
active or inactive alarms major. or all.List of SAT Commands
display alarms field descriptions
display alarms input screen field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Alarm Types Description Enter y or n in the alarm type fields to specify the type of alarm to display on the report. last day. last hour. dd is the day. or warning alarms resolved or unresolved alarms
Interval
Enter m. h. hh is the hour and mm is the minute. If this field is not defined. d. w or a to display alarm records for the last month. where mm is the month. To: Display alarm record to the time specified by mm/dd/hh/mm. dd is the day.
l
From: Display alarm records from the time specified by mm/dd/hh:mm. If no To date is entered. last week.0 Issue 4 January 2008
51
. the report includes every alarm active since a month prior to the current time. 1 of 2
l
Communication Manager Release 5. where mm is the month. hh is the hour and mm is the minute.

Alternate Name = P/xx (P/personal CO line group #) MAJOR. MINOR. Name
Alarm Type Service State
RDY = ready for service OUT = out of service IN = in service [Blank] = No associated service state 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. This is the same identifier that is used by the alarm log. The alternate name depends upon the type of the object. l For port network-related objects. where UU is the port network number and B is the bus (A or B).0 Issue 4 January 2008
53
. but was on an off-board element connected to the circuit pack. y indicates that the fault was on the associated circuit pack n indicates that he fault is not connected to the circuit pack. This is an indicator of the seriousness of the alarm. For example: l Station MO. the location appears as PN UUB. the location appears as cabinet-carrier-[slot]-[circuit].List of SAT Commands
display alarms ALARM REPORT field descriptions
display alarms report field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Port Description The location of the alarmed object. Service state of the station and trunk ports:
l l l l
Maintenance Name On Brd
Alt. l For installed circuit packs. the location appears as x a-pnc where “x” is the fiber link number and “a” is the PNC side (A or B). l For fiber link-related objects. or WARNING. Alternate Name = nnnnn (extension) l Trunk MO. Alternate Name = nn/n (trunk-group#/member #) l Personal CO line MO. The name of the MO as it appears in the alarm and error logs.

Media Gateways and Servers
. depending on the acknowledgment status of the alarm.Maintenance SAT Commands
display alarms report field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Ack Description Headings 1 and 2 identify the first and second OSS telephone numbers. for the alarms that the switch has attempted to send to OSSN2.
test alarms
test alarms [auto-page] [failures] [step] [short | long] [repeat # | clear]
54 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. If second-as-backup is entered in the Alarm Origination to OSS Numbers field. Day. the Ack field appears blank regardless of the true acknowledge state for the alarm. then the Ack field is blank regardless of the true acknowledged state of the alarm. the column under the 2 heading will be blank for the alarms that the switch has not attempted to send to the second OSS telephone number. 2 of 2
Feature interactions for display alarms
If the alarm origination is disabled by change system-parameters maintenance. then resolved and cleared [Blank] = no attempt was made to report the alarm If the user disables the alarm origination with change system-parameters maintenance. hour. and minute of alarm. the column will be y. the column will be consistent with the column under the 1 heading. 0 for active alarms. n. After the call to the first OSS telephone number is successful. For the alarms that the switch has attempted to send to the second OSS telephone number.
Date Alarmed Date Resolved
Day. and minute of resolution. respectively. The entries in the column below ACK indicate the acknowledged alarm state:
l l l l
y = alarm has been acknowledged n = alarm has not been acknowledged c (cleared) = alarm was first acknowledged. hour. or c.

Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
test alarms
auto-page failures step short long repeat # clear
See test alarms command parameters on page 55. test alarms command parameters 1 of 2 Parameter auto-page Description Continue testing and displaying test results by providing a new screen every time the SAT screen is filled with test results. and PN-down failures appear. aborts.0 Issue 4 January 2008
55
. when the SAT screen is filled with test results testing stops until the user enters the “PAGE” key to continue or the “CANCEL” key to halt the testing. Several alarms may be logged against a single maintenance object.List of SAT Commands
Use test alarms to test the hardware associated with selected alarms. 1 of 2
failures
Communication Manager Release 5. each alarm representing a different problem. Once the screen is filled out. Even if there are multiple entries in the alarm log for a single object. Show failures on the SAT screen. Hardware failures. All passes will not be displayed on the output screen. Examples: test alarms test alarms step failures test alarms long clear auto-page test alarms long failures
inads init nms system technician
short repeat 1
Use test alarms to automatically test all of the hardware that is associated with the active alarms in the alarm log. The results appear in standard test output and status information appears on the message line as the command progresses. Test alarms provides a query screen to help the user narrow the selection of alarmed objects. test alarms tests each physical object once. If the auto-page option is not specified. press ENTER to test the hardware associated with the selected alarm log entries. The screen does not scroll to accommodate new results. conflicts.

Repeat the test sequence until the alarm is cleared. the test is aborted. long clear forces a clear of all alarms if no errors are encountered during testing short clear clears alarms pertinent to tests in the short sequence
!
WARNING:
WARNING: Executing a clear with short option. testing of the current alarm stops. and the next alarm or previous alarm appears. may not clear all alarms even if all tests pass. WARNING: Since the “clear long” options clear all counters if tests pass.Maintenance SAT Commands
test alarms command parameters 2 of 2 Parameter step Description Step to the next or previous alarm without testing the current alarm. 2 of 2
!
WARNING:
56 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. If the NEXT ALARM or PREV ALARM is pressed during a test. even during test results. Number of times to repeat the test. Alarm information appears with a prompt for a keypress. then the last alarm appears. If the last alarm is currently displayed. and NEXT ALARM is requested. This may involve both destructive and nondestructive tests. and the PREV ALARM is pressed. If the first alarms appears. the first alarm appears. short long repeat # clear Execute a series of nondestructive diagnostic tests. Execute a more comprehensive and longer version of the diagnostic tests.
Press NEXT ALARM (function key) or PREV ALARM (function key) at any time during the command. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment. Enter:
l l l l
CANCEL to abort the command ENTER to test the currently displayed alarm NEXT ALARM (function key) to move to the next alarm PREV ALARM (function key) to move to the previous alarm without testing the currently displayed alarm. between 1 and 100. or until a single test in the sequence fails. it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even when a problem exists.

ALARM TYPES Major? y_ REPORT PERIOD Interval: m_
Minor? y_
Warning? y_
From: __/__/__:__
To: __/__/__:__
EQUIPMENT TYPE ( Choose only one. Specifies error records starting from the time specified by mm/dd/hh/mm (month/day/hour/minute). of the following ) Media Gateway: ___ Cabinet: __ Port Network: __ Board Number: ____ Port: ______ Category: ________ Extension: _____ Trunk ( group/member ): __/__
test alarms field descriptions. test alarms field descriptions. if any. you are presented with an options form for alarm selection. specified by y or n in the alarm type fields. 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. If no From date is entered. errors from the earliest record in the log are displayed.0 Issue 4 January 2008
57
.List of SAT Commands
test alarms options form
After entering test alarms. Test alarms for records for the last hour (h).
test alarms repeat 1 HARDWARE TEST ALARM QUERY The following options control which alarms will be tested. Hardware Test Alarm Query
The following fields appear on the test alarms screen. last day (d). Hardware Test Alarm Query 1 of 2 Field ALARM TYPES REPORT PERIOD From Description The type of alarm or combination of alarms to be tested. last week (w) or all (a).

11c04). The HELP key displays a list of categories. Category: Enter a category to restrict the report to maintenance objects in a specific category. Port Network. errors for the entire system are displayed. 78 or 78/1). or a trunk-group and member number separated by a slash (for example. the system will default to 1. If no entry is made.
l l l l
Media Gateway: Enter the media gateway number. 2 of 2
l
l
l l
58 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Board Number: Enter the cabinet-carrier-slot address of the circuit pack (for example. If no To date is entered. Cabinet: Enter the cabinet number. every error up to the current date appears. Extension: Enter the extension number of a port. Enter the port network number. enter the location of a type of equipment in one of the following fields. If the cabinet number is omitted. If the cabinet number is omitted.Maintenance SAT Commands
test alarms field descriptions. Media Gateways and Servers
. Port: Enter the cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit address of the port (for example. Hardware Test Alarm Query 2 of 2 Field To Equipment Type Description Specifies every error record up to the time specified by mm/dd/hh/mm. it defaults to 1. Trunk (group/member): Enter a trunk-group number. To limit the report to a specific group of components. 11c0408).

with normal output. appear on a test-by-test basis with one line of data displayed for each test result.
test alarms ALARM ENTRY Alarm Svc Type State WARNING TEST RESULTS Alt. The responses display on a test-by-test basis with one line of data for each test result. The name of the MO as it appears in the alarm and error logs. or an off board element connected to the circuit pack.
test alarms field descriptions. Extension numbers or trunk-group numbers. With the failures option. Name Test No. 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. only the tests that failed appear. This is the same identifier as used by the alarm log.0 Issue 4 January 2008
59
. ALARM ENTRY
test alarms field descriptions. Whether the fault detected is on the associated circuit pack. ALARM ENTRY 1 of 2 Field Port Maintenance Name On Board Alt Name Description The location of the alarmed object (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit).List of SAT Commands
The following example shows the results output from test alarms (query form left empty by pressing ENTER). Result 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD Page 1
Port
Maintenance On Alt Name Brd? Name UDS1-BD n
Ack? 1 2
Date Alarmed
Alarm Count
01C03
03/06/16:48 1/4
Port 01C03 01C03 01C03 01C03 01C03 01C03 01C03 01C03 01C03
Maintenance Name UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD
Error Code
test alarms output
The responses.

slot 7. or warning. 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 Date Alarmed Page Alarm Count 1
01C03
03/06/16:48 1/4
Port 01C03 01C03 01C03 01C03 01C03 01C03 01C03
Maintenance Name UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD UDS1-BD
Alt. This is the current service state of the station and trunk ports shown. etc.
test alarms Port Maintenance On Alt Name Brd? Name UDS1-BD n ALARM ENTRY Alarm Svc Ack? Type State 1 2 WARNING TEST RESULTS Name Test No. Test alarms was entered and the query screen was left empty by just pressing ENTER. OUT (out of service). contention. Media Gateways and Servers
. This is an indicator to the seriousness of the alarm raised. assume that only one alarm was in the alarm log and it is on the board in cabinet 1.
Result BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD BOARD
Error Code
NO NO NO NO NO NO NO
60 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.Maintenance SAT Commands
test alarms field descriptions. ALARM ENTRY 2 of 2 Field Alarm Type Service State Description Major. or IN (in service). For the following output example. carrier c.) an error message appears in the TEST RESULTS data. RDY (ready for service). 2 of 2 When errors are encountered preparing a particular object to be tested (not inserted. minor.

test analog-testcall.0 Issue 4 January 2008
61
.List of SAT Commands
analog-testcall
test analog-testcall
test analog-testcall trunk-group# / member# | port location | board location full | supervision | no-selftest | no-return-loss | no-st-or-rl] [repeat#] [schedule] Use test analog-testcall to use the Automatic Transmission Measurement System (ATMS) to originate test calls over analog trunks. Detail and summary reports of these measurements are generated with list testcalls. The test analog-testcall test aborts when attempting a test call on these trunk groups:
l l l l
ISDN-PRI SIP DID Any incoming trunk group (transmission tests can only be run on outgoing trunks)
ATMS.
Communication Manager Release 5. and the measurement reports are described in Automatic Transmission Measurement System (ATMS) in Automatic Transmission Measurement System in Maintenance Procedures for Avaya Communication Manager. You can specify testing of an entire trunk group or an individual trunk using either group/ member addresses or port and circuit pack location.
announcement-board
See: disable announcement-board on page 61 enable announcement-board on page 62 announcement on page 62.
disable announcement-board
disable announcement-board X See enable announcement-board on page 62. ATMS collects performance measurements on the test call and compares them to administered thresholds. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300432) (formerly 03-300192). The type of test call. the number of the testing line on the far-end switch and various other parameters must be administered on the Trunk Group screen before the command can execute.

This information can help in trouble diagnosis and in locating facilities to which the attendant console is connected.List of SAT Commands
list ars route-chosen screen field descriptions
list ars route-chosen field descriptions Field Location Partitioned Group Number Dialed String Total Min Max Route Pattern Call Type Description Location from the command line or default 1.
Communication Manager Release 5. Route Pattern used to route the call. Phones dialing from this location use the entries on this form. Communication Manager tries the entries in location all. See change ars analysis in the Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509) screen reference for full explanation of this field. Partitioned Group Number as entered on the command line or 1.
Node Number Location
attendant
status attendant
status attendant console# Use status attendant to see the operational state of the specified attendant console. If there are no matching entries in the phone’s location. The call type as matched on the ARS Digit Analysis Table. Node number as matched on the ARS Digit Analysis Table.0 Issue 4 January 2008
69
. The matched entry in the ARS Digit Analysis Table Minimum and maximum length of the string matched in the ARS Digit Analysis Table.

out of service. Media Gateways and Servers
. or disconnected Idle or active y/n Is maintenance testing the object Port locations to which the attendant is communicating (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit).Maintenance SAT Commands
The following example shows the output from status attendant.
atm board
S8700 series
status atm board
status atm board location Use status atm board to see when the circuit pack was last inserted or when a link went down or came back up.
status attendant 1 ATTENDANT STATUS Console Number: 1 Port: 01C1106 Connected Ports: Service State: in-service/night service Download Status: no
status attendant field descriptions
status attendant Field Console Number Port Service State Usage State Maintenance Busy State Connected Ports Description Number assigned to the attendant Port location of the attendant (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) In-service/idle. in-service/active.
70 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

0 Issue 4 January 2008
77
.List of SAT Commands
list audio-group
list audio-group { [1-Max] ( number n | (to-number n) | count n)} [schedule] Use list audio-group to list all audio groups and see how many members (audio sources) are in each group.
list audio-group AUDIO GROUPS Group 1 12 23 Name Relaxation Music Forgive the wait Best deals for today Number or Sources 2 20 30 Page 1
At End of Member List
list audio-group field descriptions
list audio-group field descriptions Field Group Name Number of Sources Description Number of the Audio Group Name of the Audio Group Number of members (audio group sources) in the audio group
Communication Manager Release 5.
The following is an example of list audio-group. see Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509). For more information on the Audio Groups screen.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
list audio-group
1-Max number n to-number n count n schedule
audio group number to list range of audio group numbers to list number of audio groups to see on the page See Common Input Parameters on page 25.

Clear audits clears old data to display data collected since the last clear audits when status audits is run. and status information about each audit that detected a problem or aborted during the interval. and report inconsistencies. Data Relation Audits are useful during development and testing phases of projects to uncover software errors.List of SAT Commands
audits
See: clear audits on page 79 status audits on page 79
clear audits
Use clear audits to clear cumulative and/or peak hour’s data collected for each data relation audit. After clear audits executes successfully.
status audits
Use status audits to see the results of Data Relation Audits that are built into the switch. Data Relation Audits check for inconsistencies between selected data items in the switch. Status audits displays the date and time that the requested interval begins.
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Feature Interaction
clear audits
cumulative peak-hour
Clears data collected about the peak hour since the last reboot or clear audits cumulative Clears peak hour data Examples: clear audits cumulative clear audits peak-hour
init inads
See Feature interactions for clear audits
Feature interactions for clear audits
Status audits displays data cleared by clear audits.0 Issue 4 January 2008
79
. In the field they help the switch to recover from data corruption before service is interrupted. The status information contains:
l
The name of the audit
Communication Manager Release 5. display audits cumulative and/or display audits peak-hour display information collected since the last clear audits. the number of times that the full sequence of audits executes (audit cycles). See status bri-port on page 102. The start date displays on the status audits screen reflecting the time that clear audits executed.

errors discovered from a demand tests are not logged in the error logs. In general. cold 1 restarts. Note: Single process restarts. and to avoid confusion. but reflects the system at the time of the request.
init inads
see Feature interactions for status audits on page 83
80 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. errors that are discovered from a demand test that executes an audit are not displayed. Media Gateways and Servers
.
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Feature Interaction
status audits
peak-hour cumulative
data collected since the last reboot or since the last execution of clear audits cumulative. audit names and numbers (names) included in Table 11: Time-available Maintenance Audits on page 83. or processor interchanges do not clear this data. For example.
Note:
Audits can execute directly using test MO.Maintenance SAT Commands
l l l l l
The number of times that an audit ran and corrected an error The number of times that an audit ran and detected an irreparable error The number of times that an audit ran and aborted The date and time that the audit first detected a problem (only for cumulative) The time of the most recent error detected by the audit (only for cumulative)
Audit data information cumulates from the last reboot or the last clear audits cumulative command. warm starts. The screen does not automatically update. and for peak hours since the last reboot or the last clear audits peak-hour or clear audits cumulative. test MO l 8192 p 512 t 0 executes the Station Connections Audits. Data for the peak hour since the last reboot or since the last execution of the clear audits cumulative or clear audits peak-hour. To be consistent with other error logging. When the “test MO” command executes an audit. report results display on the screen. cold 2 restarts.

A few audits do not run in the normal audit sequence. Individual audit values can be larger than the values described below (if the switch is partially through another audit cycle). cumulative = date and time of the last reboot or of clear audits cumulative peak-hour = date and time of the beginning of the peak hour since the last reboot or of clear audits cumulative or of clear audits peak-hour Number of audit cycles completed in the specified interval (0 – 999999). in the specified interval. Number of times that the audit ran. could not fix data or audit aborted problems since the last clear audits cumulative command. Instead. Media Gateways and Servers
. the switch restarts the sequence. (0–65534) Asterisks are used form numbers that exceed 65534. and found an problem that could not be fixed. Example: 03/27/14:31 for 2:31 pm. could not fix data or audit aborted problems since the last “clear audits cumulative” command. Audit Cycles numbers do not apply to these audits that execute as part of scheduled maintenance. Date and time that the audit first detected fixed data. Number of times that the audit ran.
# of Audit Cycles Completed
Audit Name # Cycles Fixed Data # Cycles Could Not Fix Data # Cycles Audit Aborted First Error
Most Recent Error
82 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Date and time that the audit last detected fixed data. The audited switch data is inconsistent when this happens. Appears with status audits cumulative. After all audits execute. in the specified interval. and found a fixable problem. March 27th. (0–65534) Asterisks are for numbers that exceed 65534. Number of times that the audit ran. and aborted due to an internal error. Asterisks indicate numbers that exceed 999999. in the specified interval.Maintenance SAT Commands
status audits field descriptions
status audits field descriptions Field Start Date Description Date and time that interval begins. March 27th. Appears with status audits cumulative. they execute as part of scheduled maintenance and are marked with “(SCH)” following the audit name. Example: 03/27/14:31 for 2:31 pm. The switch executes audits in a set order. Audit’s name that detected an error or aborted. (0–65534) Asterisks are used for numbers that exceed 65534.

monitor bcms
monitor bcms split split# | system split# | skill skill# | vdn vdn# Use monitor bcms to see a summary of Basic Call Management System (BCMS) conditions for agents and splits. The on-line status report is automatically updated every 30 seconds or on demand by pressing UPDATE. Press CANCEL and terminate the login to cancel monitor bcms.

Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008

89

Maintenance SAT Commands

Action/ Object

Qualifier

Qualifier Description

monitor bcms

split split# system system# skill skill# vdn

status of 1 split and the number of the split (ACD hunt group number). status of the split queue and cumulative split information for every split measured by BCMS, and the numbers of the split (ACD hunt group numbers) separated by spaces and/or split number ranges separated by a hyphen (-). status of 1 particular skill group and the number of the group. vector directory number Examples: monitor bcms system mon bcms spl 1

monitor bcms system field descriptions
monitor bcms system field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Date SPLIT CALLS WAIT Description The current date and time. Updated every 30 seconds or when UPDATE is pressed. The name of the split being reported. If no name is administered, the split extension appears as “EXTxxxxx”. Splits appear in split number order. The number of calls currently waiting in this split’s queue. Direct Agent Calls are preceded by an asterisk. This field is real-time status data. 1 of 2

monitor bcms system field descriptions 2 of 2 Field OLDEST CALL AVG SPEED ANS Description The amount of time that the oldest call has waited in queue. Real-time status data. The average time required for an answer in this split during the current period, including time in queue and time ringing at the agent’s voice terminal. Intraflow calls (those that overflow from one ACD split to another split) will not have queue time from previous splits included in the average. The calculation is Total Answer Time/Total Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Calls. This is measurement data and includes only completed calls. The number of agents in this split currently available to receive an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) call from this split. Real-time status data. The number of calls abandoned during the current period. This is measurement data. The average time abandoned calls waited in queue before abandoning during the current period. The calculation is Total Abandon Time/Total Calls Abandoned. This is measurement data and includes only completed calls. The number of Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls handled by this split during the current period. This includes calls that intraflow into the split. This is measurement data. The average talk time for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls handled by this split during the current period. This does not include ring time at the agents’ voice terminal. The calculation is Total ACD Talk Time/Number of ACD Calls. This is measurement data and includes only completed calls. The average After Call Work (ACW) time for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls handled by this split during the current period. ACD calls with no ACW time are included in the average. Time spent on direct incoming or outgoing calls while in ACW are not included in the average. The calculation is (Total ACW Time - Total ACW Incoming Time - Total ACW Outgoing Time)/Total ACD Calls. This is measurement data and includes only completed calls. Percent in Service Level for a particular skill. It is the percentage of calls that were offered to the skill that were answered within the administered Service Level time according to the service agreement (for example, 80% of the calls within 20 seconds. If all calls were answered in that time, the value for the IN SERV LEVL would be 100%). The administered service level is defined on the hunt group form. 2 of 2

monitor bcms split field descriptions
monitor bcms split field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Split Split Name Date Calls Waiting Oldest Call Staffed Avail Description The number of the split requested. This is translation data. The name of the split requested. If no name exists, “EXT xxxxx” appears. The current date and time, updated every 30 seconds or when the UPDATE key is pressed. The number of calls currently waiting in this split’s queue. Direct Agent Calls are preceded by an asterisk. This is real-time status data. The time in minutes:seconds that the current oldest call has waited in this split’s queue. This is real-time status data. The number of agents currently logged into this split. This is real-time status data. The number of agents currently available to receive an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) call in this split. Agents are in the Auto-in or Manual-in work modes and are not currently on a call. If the agent is on another split’s call or in After Call Work (ACW) for another split, this agent is not considered available and will not be recorded here. This is real-time status data. The number of agents in this split currently on an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) call for this split. This includes ACD calls handled by this split that arrive as coverage from another split. This also includes outbound calls (Outgoing Call Manager) distributed through the ACD. If an agent puts an ACD call on hold, but does not enter another state (for example, the agent does not enter the AVAIL state), the agent is still seen as in the ACD state. This is real-time status data. 1 of 2

monitor bcms split field descriptions 2 of 2 Field ACW AUX Description The number of agents in this split currently in After Call Work (ACW) split. This is real-time status data. The number of agents in this split currently in AUX work for this split. If an agent is on another split’s call or in After Call Work (ACW) for another split, this agent is not considered in AUX work and is not recorded here. This is real-time status data. The number of agents in this split currently on non-ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) calls, incoming or outgoing directly to/from their extensions. If the agents are also in After Call Work (ACW) or AUX they are recorded as Extn rather than ACW or AUX. This is real-time status data. The number of agents in this split on another split’s call or in After Call Work (ACW) for another split. Used if agents belong to multiple splits. This is real-time status data. The name of the agent associated with the extension. If no name exists this field is blank. The agent’s extension. This field is translation data. The current state of the agent for this split. Possible states are Avail, ACD, ACW, AUX, Extn In, Extn Out, OtherSplit, and Unstaff. This is real-time status data. The clock time at which the agent entered the current state. This is real-time status data. The number of Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) calls (inbound and outbound), that the agent has completed for this split during the current period (half hour or hour). If the maximum number of 255 calls exceeded, 255 appears. This is measurement data. The number of non-ACD incoming calls that the agent has received and completed during the current period, maximum 255. This is measurement data. The number of outgoing non-ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) calls that the agent has completed during the current period, maximum 255. This is measurement data. 2 of 2

monitor bcms vdn field descriptions
monitor bcms vdn field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Date VDN NAME CALLS WAIT Description The current date and time (updated every 30 seconds or when Update is pressed). The name of the VDN being reported. If the VDN does not have a name administered, this field displays EXT ## where ## is the VDN extension. The number of calls that encountered this VDN and have not been answered, abandoned, outflowed, or forced busy/disc. Includes calls in queues, in vector processing, and ringing at an agent telephone. The time the oldest call currently waiting has waited in the VDN. Timing starts when the call enters the VDN. The number of completed ACD calls answered in a BCMS-measured split. The split may have been reached via the queue-to-main, check backup, route-to, messaging split, or adjunct routing commands. Includes Direct Agent calls (EAS only). The average speed of answer for ACD and connect calls (see CONN CALLS below) that have completed for this VDN during the current period. This includes the time in vector processing, in a split queue, and time ringing. The calculation is:

OLDEST CALL ACD CALLS

AVG SPEED ANS

Total Answer Time -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total ACD Calls + Total CONNect CALLS
Answer time for a call is recorded when the call ends. For example, if a call originates in interval x, is answered in interval y, and ends in interval z, the associated answer and talk times are recorded in interval z. 1 of 2

monitor bcms vdn field descriptions 2 of 2 Field ABAND CALLS Description The number of calls to this VDN that have abandoned before being answered during the current period. This includes VDN calls that were routed to an attendant, telephone, or announcement, and abandoned before being answered. The average time abandoned calls waited before abandoning during the current period. The calculation is:

AVG ABAND TIME

Total Abandon Time ----------------------------------------------------------Total Calls Abandoned
AVG TALK/ HOLD The average talk time for ACD calls completed by this VDN during the current period. This does not include ring time, but it does include any time the caller spent on Hold. The calculation is:

Total Talk Time ---------------------------------------ACD Calls
CONN CALLS FLOW OUT CALLS BUSY/DISC The number of completed calls that were routed to a telephone, attendant, announcement, messaging split, or call pickup and were answered there. The number of calls that were routed to another VDN or to a trunk, including successful look-ahead attempts. The number of calls that were forced busy or forced disconnect during the current interval. This value includes: Calls that encountered a busy or disconnect vector step Calls disconnected by a stop vector step Calls forwarded to a split with a full queue Calls forwarded to a split with no available agents and no queue This value does not include abandoned calls. The percent of calls offered that completed and were answered within the acceptable service level defined on the VDN screen. The calculation is:

% IN SERV LEVL

accepted * 100 --------------------------------------calls offered
calls offered is defined as: acdcalls + flowout calls + abandoned + connect + busy/disc accepted is the number of ACD and CONNect calls that were answered within the administered service level. This field is blank if no calls were recorded for this time interval. This field is also blank if no Acceptable Service Level has been administered on the VDN screen. 2 of 2

For release board 1c07, the port field shows the port address of the released maintenance object. For more information, see Common Command Output Screens on page 28 and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33.

Note that reset board can be service disrupting and may cause extraneous alarms. Effects of a reset vary depending upon the type of object being reset and upon whether the component is duplicated. See the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager, Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190) on the relevant maintenance object for details.

Use reset board on a specified port circuit pack or media module to perform a software reset of every administered port on the circuit pack. Every port must be busied out before the port board is reset. In critical-reliability systems (duplicated PNC), reset of an Expansion Interface, Switch Node Interface, Switch Node Clock, or DS1 Converter circuit pack on the active PNC is not permitted. Busyout the standby components before entering the reset. For more information, see Common Input Parameters on page 25 and Common Command Output Screens on page 28.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default

reset board

location repeat#

Reset every administered port on the circuit pack.

1 1

test board
test board location [short | long] [repeat repeat# | clear] [schedule] Use test board to perform a set of hardware diagnostic tests on a specified circuit pack. The system first validates that the board exists at the specified location. Then, based on the logical type of board (for example, Analog, Digital, Hybrid), a series of tests performs diagnostics on the board and then returns results of the tests along with any possible error codes. Some of the tests can be disabled by administration.

Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008

97

Maintenance SAT Commands

Destructive long tests on a Switch Node Interface (SNI) board are not allowed unless the board has been busied out.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default

get boot-image field descriptions
get boot-image field descriptions Field Board Type FW Vintage HW Signature Suffix Date Timestamp CRC Checksum Active Image Description For VAL, this field is TN2501. The firmware vintage number The hardware signature number The circuit pack suffix code letter The date the firmware file was created or transferred to the circuit pack The time that the firmware file was created or transferred to the circuit pack Cyclic Redundancy Check (data integrity algorithm) y indicates the active firmware image file. n indicates the inactive firmware image file. To change the active image file, use set boot-image on page 100. y indicates that this image becomes active after a system reset. n indicates that this image becomes inactive after a system reset.

Reboot Image

Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008

99

Maintenance SAT Commands

set boot-image
set boot-image [board location] image 1 | 2 Use set boot-image to direct the system to use 1 of 2 possible firmware image files on the TN2501AP circuit pack. Note: After you enter set boot-image, reseat the circuit pack to activate the firmware image.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login

Note:

set boot-image

board location 1 2

The physical location of the circuit pack use the Image 1 firmware file use the Image 1 firmware file

The following is an example of the change bp screen:
change bp BUSINESS PARTNER ACCESS

Enable Use of dadmin login: y Enable Use of craft2 login: y

PIN is set PIN is unset

change bp field descriptions
change bp field descriptions Field Enable Use of dadmin login: y/n Description This field is set to yes by default after a new installation. If this field is set to yes, then profile 2 may be used by a login spelled as dadmin if it is enabled in the license and subject to other existing constraints. If the field is set to no, then profile 2 is disabled. This field cannot grant access for dadmin if it is disabled in the license, but can inhibit access if dadmin is enabled in the license. This display-only field indicates whether a PIN has been established for the login (set) or not (unset). If the PIN is unset, then the next SAT access to that login will require the PIN to be established. This field works the same as the field for the dadmin login, except that it applies to the second craft login if/when it is enabled by dadmin.

PIN is set/unset

Enable Use of craft2 login: y/n

Note that the ""enable" fields are NOT the same as, for example, "enable craft2 joe", which is accessible to the business partner login dadmin. This form is accessible only to INIT and applies another level of lockout for these logins.

Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008

101

Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). Media Gateways and Servers
. There is also information about the point-to-point signaling links carried over the port. see BRI-PORT (ISDN-BRI Port) in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. For more information.Maintenance SAT Commands
display bp
The display bp command displays the same form as the change bp command. The following is an example of display bp. maintenance state and layer 1 state of an ISDN-BRI port.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
status bri-port
location
location of the BRI port
102 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. This command can only be issued by the INIT login ID.
bri-port
status bri-port
status bri-port location Use status bri-port to see the service state. except that all of the fields are display-only and cannot be changed.
display bp BUSINESS PARTNER ACCESS
Enable Use of dadmin login: y Enable Use of craft2 login: y
PIN is set PIN is unset
See change bp field descriptions on page 101 for a description of the fields.

0 Issue 4 January 2008
103
. but the BRI endpoints are not responding. The Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) is a layer 2 addressing parameter used by the switch to exchange information with BRI endpoints over the point-to-point signaling link.
status bri-port 1c1701 STATUS BRI-PORT Port: Service State: Maintenance Busy?: Layer 1 State: TEI Value Link1 Link2 Link3 64 01C1701 in-service no activated Endpt Extension 1010 Endpt SPID 1010 Service SPID? Page 1 of 1
Layer2 State 13-established
status bri-port field descriptions
See Table 13: Interpreting BRI-Port Status Reports on page 105 for information on interpreting results.List of SAT Commands
The following screen shows an example of status bri-port. The TEI is a number from 1 to 127. The operational state of the physical connection (Layer 1) of the ISDN link carried over the port: activated = Layer 1 frames are being passed between the port and BRI endpoints. 1 of 2
TEI Value
Communication Manager Release 5. deactivated = The layer 1 interface device on the BRI has been turned off due to the port being out of service. the layer 1 interface device is turned on and layer 1 frames are being sent from the port. status bri-port field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Port Service State Maintenance Busy Layer 1 State Description The location of the ISDN-BRI port. Whether the ISDN-BRI port is “in-service” or “out-of-service. pend-activation = The port is in service.” Whether maintenance testing is currently being performed on the port.

Maintenance SAT Commands
status bri-port field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Layer2 State Description The operational state of the point-to-point signaling link (Layer 2): assigned = The link is currently in the AWAIT_EST (Await Establish) state at layer 2. If the BRI endpoint supports TEI allocation procedures. Media Gateways and Servers
. This is the normal state for a link in a multipoint wiring configuration. This field is blank if the link is not in the established or L3-established state. The extension of the voice/data endpoint associated with the link. Otherwise this field is blank. hyperactive = Traffic on this link has exceeded the threshold and the link has been suspended. If the link is associated with the Service SPID this field displays yes and the Endpoint Extension field is blank. The voice extension of the endpoint associated with the link is also displayed. the voice extension of the endpoint associated with the link is also displayed. L3-established = The link is in the MF_EST_NORM state at layer 2 and SPID initialization procedures have been successfully completed. The SPID (Service Profile Identifier) administered for the voice/data endpoint. The switch has successfully started the link and is now capable of exchanging layer 3 frames with the endpoint. This field is blank if the link is not in the established or L3-established state. established = The link is in the MF_EST_NORM (Multi-Frame Established Normal) state at layer 2. 2 of 2
Endpt Extension Endpt SPID
Service SPID
104 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. If the endpoint does not support SPID initialization procedures. those procedures have been successfully executed and a TEI has been assigned to the endpoint by the switch. This is the normal state for a link in a point-to-point wiring configuration. Service SPID is a feature used by service technicians to check building wiring between the switch and the BRI endpoint.

Table 13: Interpreting BRI-Port Status Reports 1 of 6
Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value
BRI. Check the endpoint and wiring by following the SPID Facility test’s procedure described in BRI-SET. Repeat status bri-port to determine that the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is either L3-Established (for ASAI adjuncts and BRI endpoints supporting MIM initialization) or Established (for fixed TEI BRI endpoints and automatic TEI BRI endpoints not supporting MIM initialization).) 1 of 6
Communication Manager Release 5. Find the combination of the output field values in your report and follow the recommendations for the type of endpoint connected to the port. follow normal escalation procedures. (A MIM or management information message is a level-3 message that conveys management and maintenance information between a communications system and a BRI terminal. If it is not. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190).0 Issue 4 January 2008
105
. ASAI
0-126
Assigned
blank
blank
This is a transitory state for BRI endpoints and ASAI adjuncts. 2.List of SAT Commands
Interpreting Results of status bri-port
Table 13: Interpreting BRI-Port Status Reports on page 105 helps interpret the results of status bri-port. Various Adjuncts on page 598 in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. The switch is attempting to establish the link. 1.

1. Check the adjunct by following the recommended repair procedures of the manufacturer.
BRI. Repeat status bri-port and determine whether the L2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established.
BRI
0-126
Established
ext#
blank
This is the normal state for non-MIM initializing. and automatic TEI BRI endpoints. This is a transitory state for automatic TEI BRI endpoints that support MIM initialization. 2 of 6
106 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. If it is not. Media Gateways and Servers
. follow normal escalation procedures. Repeat status bri-port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. 2. 2. fixed. If it is not. Repeat status bri-port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. Verify that SPID administration on the switch and the endpoint are consistent. Try replacing the endpoint.Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 13: Interpreting BRI-Port Status Reports 2 of 6
Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value
ASAI
0-63
Established
blank
blank
This is a transitory state for ASAI adjuncts. ASAI
64-126
Established
blank
blank
BRI
64-126
L3-Established
ext#
blank
This is the normal state for automatic TEI BRI endpoints that support MIM initialization. 1. follow normal escalation procedures. ASAI signaling is connected at Layer 2 but the Layer 3 Restart procedure has not been completed between switch and adjunct.

and the link is not currently associated with a BRI endpoint. Change the SPID value in the BRI endpoint to match the SPID administered to the BRI endpoint on the port. Repeat status bri-port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established.0 Issue 4 January 2008
107
. An invalid SPID is assigned to link. A demand SPID Facility test is in progress on the port. 1.List of SAT Commands
Table 13: Interpreting BRI-Port Status Reports 3 of 6
Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value
BRI. See SPID Facility test’s procedures described in BRI-SET. ASAI
64-126
L3-Established
blank
yes
A demand SPID Facility test is in progress on the port. See SPID Facility test’s procedures described in BRI-SET. follow normal escalation procedures. If it is not. and the link is associated with an endpoint on the port. Various Adjuncts on page 598 in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). Various Adjuncts on page 598 in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. 3 of 6
BRI
64-126
L3-Established
ext#
yes
BRI
0-126
L3-Established
blank
blank
Communication Manager Release 5.

1. If it is not. 4 of 6
108 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. follow normal escalation procedures. Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 13: Interpreting BRI-Port Status Reports 4 of 6
Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value
BRI
0-126
L3-Assigned
ext#
blank
This is a transitory state for BRI endpoints that support MIM initialization. go to Step 3. continue with Step 2. Wait 5 seconds and repeat the command. Try replacing the endpoint. 2. 3. If the state has not changed. Make sure SPID administration on the switch and endpoint are consistent. Repeat status bri-port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. Repeat status bri-port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. If it is not.

Repeat status bri-port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. Make sure SPID administration on the switch and endpoints are consistent. Repeat status bri-port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. follow normal escalation procedures. If the state has not changed continue with Step 2. 1.List of SAT Commands
Table 13: Interpreting BRI-Port Status Reports 5 of 6
Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value
BRI
0-126
L3-Assigned
ext#
yes
This is a transitory state for BRI endpoints that support MIM initialization when a SPID Facility test has been used to initialize the station. 3. 5 of 6
Communication Manager Release 5. If it is not. If it is not. go to Step 3. Wait 5 seconds and repeat the command. Try replacing the endpoint. 2.0 Issue 4 January 2008
109
.

Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 13: Interpreting BRI-Port Status Reports 6 of 6
Error Type Aux Data Associated Test Alarm Level On/Off Board Test to Clear Value
ASAI BRI
0-126
Hyperactive
ignore
ignore
Link has sent too many messages per unit time. Repeat status bri-port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. the system attempts to put the link into service. After 60 seconds. the switch has sent a Heartbeat message to the adjunct and is waiting for a response. follow normal escalation procedures. This is the normal state for ASAI adjunct. Signaling has been suspended. Media Gateways and Servers
. Try replacing the endpoint. After receiving a Restart Acknowledgment message.
ASAI
0-126
L3-Restarting
ext#
The switch has sent a Restart message to the adjunct but has not yet received a Restart Acknowledgment message from the adjunct. go to Step 2. If a link remains in this state while there is no activity at the BRI endpoint. If it is not. Make sure SPID administration on the switch and endpoints are consistent. 2. 6 of 6
ASAI
0-126
L3-Restarted
ext#
ASAI
0-126
L3-Established
ext#
110 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Repeat status bri-port to determine whether the Layer 2 state of the signaling link is L3-Established. take the following steps: 1. If it is not.

port. The type of the indicated carrier: processor. The Port Network number or Switch Node number (1 or 2) of the indicated carrier. Each Port Network and Switch Node located in the cabinet is identified by its PN number or its SN number and PNC designation (A or B). 1 of 3
PN/SN
118 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. One of the following types: MCC (multicarrier cabinet) SCC (single-carrier cabinet) S75XE (System 75 XE [pre-R1V4] single-carrier cabinet) blank (undetermined cabinet type). Media Gateways and Servers
. expansion-control. switch-node.Maintenance SAT Commands
status cabinet field descriptions
status cabinet field descriptions 1 of 3 Field Carrier Location PN/SN Number Carrier Type Cabinet Type Description The cabinet number and carrier letter of each carrier in the cabinet. dup-sw-node or not-used.

The current setting of the emergency transfer switch: on Emergency transfer has been manually activated. this indicates that the Switch Node carrier is currently active (whether or not PNC is duplicated).The cabinet is controlling emergency transfer and is not activated. blank — In the standby column. and the EAL is unavailable. down — EAL and INL are both unavailable. down — There are no switch node interface circuit packs inserted on the Switch Node. For SNs connectivity status indicates circuit pack insertion on the Switch Node as follows: up — At least one switch node interface circuit pack in the Switch Node is inserted. far-end —The INL is available. Possible values are: up — EAL and INL are both available. auto. The control is up. aa — Points to a problem with the archangel. Emergency Transfer Select Switch The location of the circuit pack containing the emergency transfer select switch (PN maintenance). this indicates that the Switch Node carrier is currently the standby in a critical-reliability system. near-end — The EAL is available. off Emergency transfer is being manually prevented.0 Issue 4 January 2008
119
. unavail The current setting of the emergency transfer switch is not available. 2 of 3
Communication Manager Release 5. but the archangel is not functioning and is not available. blank — In the active column.List of SAT Commands
status cabinet field descriptions 2 of 3 Field Connectivity Status Description For PNs connectivity status refers to the availability of the EAL (Expansion Archangel Link) and INL (Indirect Neighbor Link) to the carrier for both active and standby PNCs (if duplicated). In the standby column. and the INL is unavailable. auto+ The cabinet is controlling emergency transfer and is activated. PN/SN Each Port Network and Switch Node located in the cabinet is identified by its PN number or its SN number and PNC designation (A or B). this means PNC is not duplicated.

If there are no matching entries in the phone’s location. If there are matching entries in the phone’s location.0 Issue 4 January 2008
121
. Communication Manager tries the entries in location all.List of SAT Commands
list calltype route-chosen screen field descriptions
list calltype route-chosen field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Location Description Location from the command line. 1 of 2
length Min Max Selected Location
After Delete and Insert
Communication Manager Release 5. The digit string as it appears after call type digit manipulation for that pattern. numeric = the entry in the Calltype Digit Analysis Table that was selected for the dialed string Blank = no matching entries for this dialed string in the Calltype Digit Analysis Table numeric = the entry in the Calltype Digit Analysis Table that was selected for the dialed string Blank = no matching entries for this dialed string in the Calltype Digit Analysis Table Phones dialing from this location use the entries on this form. If there are no matching entries in the entered location. those get used. Partitioned Group Number Match Partitioned Group Number as entered on the command line. Communication Manager tries the entries in location all. those entries get used. up to 4 manipulations. Default is 1. If there are matching entries in the entered location. Allows you to see what would happen if the telephone number you enter into your administration terminal were dialed from a phone’s call log in this location.

Use status media-processor board on page 411 to check the busy-out status of a media processor. dialplan analysis tables and the uniform-dialplan tables) for more information about the routing of the call. Once all of the media processor’s resources are in a busy-out state. the associated board can be removed from the system without disrupting active calls. issued for a media processor already in the pending busyout or busyout service state. so that the facilities will eventually become idle and allow board replacement to occur. Media Gateways and Servers
. Results stop at the first successful match and valid route. results in ABORT with an error code for any media processor resource that is already busied. 2 of 2
Result
campon-busyout
campon-busyout
campon-busyout [ trunk | processor ] <trunk group/member | location > Use campon-busyout to busy-out system resources that need maintenance or repair. and to remove idle VoIP resources from the system’s pool of available VoIP resources.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
campon-busyout trunk campon-busyout media-processor
trunk-group/member location
location of the resource
A redundant campon-busyout. the modifications to the dialed string appear. Use this information to view the call type’s specific routing analysis form (AAR Routing Table.Maintenance SAT Commands
list calltype route-chosen field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Type Description ext aar ars udp The call type used by the call type algorithm to test the modified string. Use campon-busy-out media-processor to select the media processor to be busied out while the media processor is still in service. ARS Routing Table. Call types correspond to the equivalent entries on the Calltype Digit Analysis Table (display calltype analysis). Results of the analysis on the dialed string. If there was a successful match and completion of the call.
122 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Campon-busyout allows present activity to continue and prevents future activity.

Common Command Output Screens on page 28.0 Issue 4 January 2008
123
. Capacities are defined in the license files and displayed on the System-Parameters Customer-Options screen. Most of the maximum capacities depend on your contract with Avaya. and to see a snapshot status of system resources. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33.List of SAT Commands
Use release board to abort campon-busyout:
l l
Busied resources are returned to service. Note: The capacities in this example may not coincide with your system.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
display capacity
schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25.
Note:
Communication Manager Release 5. Resources marked for busyout. The information is p resented to help explain the command and the field values. The command result is ABORT with an error code that signifies the release of a media processor that was in the pending busy service state.
init inads dadmin craft cust rcust
The screen below shows the output for page 1 of display capacity. see Common Input Parameters on page 25. For more information. are cleared. not to provide capacity information.
capacity
display capacity
display capacity [schedule] Use display capacity to see how your system is administered.
Busyout board and busyout port override any pending busyout states created with campon-busyout for media processors. The command result is PASS. Use display capacity to see the maximum capacities of system resources allowed by the system and the current level of usage. pending busyout.

ABBREVIATED DIALING (AD)..AAR/ARS AAR/ARS Patterns: Inserted Digit Strings: ABBREVIATED DIALING (AD) AD Entries Per System: AD Personal Lists Per System: ADJUNCT SWITCH APPLICATION INTERFACE (ASAI) Active Controlling Associations: Notification Requests: Simultaneous Active Adjunct Controlled Calls: 17 6 623 2994 640 3000
10 1
99990 4999
100000 5000
0 0 0
6000 10000 3000
6000 10000 3000
display capacity field descriptions.. Number of 12-digit strings inserted and available for AAR/ARS preferences.
AAR/ARS AAR/ARS Patterns Inserted Digit Strings The number of route patterns... Can also be unknown if no flash card is present or translations made on old load.
ABBREVIATED DIALING (AD) AD Entries Per System The number of abbreviated dialing entries for both group and personal lists.... See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509). This is important because platforms are not always compatible. Standard or Extra Large = translations are saved on CM 4. See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509). Anything other than Standard or Extra Large = translations were saved on a pre-CM4.. ADJUNCT SWITCH APPLICATION INTERFACE (ASAI) page 1 1 of 2 Field Current System Memory Configuration Description The platform on which the translations were saved. AAR/ARS..0 system. 1 of 2
124 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.0 or later... Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
display capacity SYSTEM CAPACITY Current System Memory Configuration: G3xV11
Page 1 of x
System Used Available Limit . page 1
display capacity field descriptions.

and code calling IDs. page 4
Table 16: display capacity field descriptions. data endpoints. common shared extensions. See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509). and TEGs. Anything that is not a station. VDNs. The number of port networks connected to the TDM bus and packet bus of a processor port network. common shared extensions. See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509). This includes.0 Issue 4 January 2008
129
. but is not limited to. or station user. page 4 DATA PARAMETERS Administered Connections Alphanumeric Dialing Entries DIAL PLAN Extensions Miscellaneous Extensions This includes stations. access endpoints. DIAL PLAN. The number of visual indicators of the busy/idle status of any particular trunk group. DATA PARAMETERS. data module. VDNs. trunk.
UDP Extension Records Digital Data Endpoints Expansion Port Networks Facility Busy Indicators
Communication Manager Release 5. The number of connections between two access or data endpoints. hunt groups. code calling IDs. or attendant. announcements. TEGs. hunt group member. The number of 4-digit or 5-digit extension numbers that allow a user to call from one PBX to another using that number. LDNs. The number of digital serial communication devices that permit the asynchronous transfer of data. hunt groups. announcements. This also includes the number of analog adjuncts. administered TSCs. See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509). PCOL groups.List of SAT Commands
display capacity field descriptions.

The number of logical agent-skill pairs that are administered. The number of hunt group queue positions being used. page 5
Table 17: display capacity field descriptions. SPLITS.Queue Time) The number of intercom groups set up within your organization. The number of modem pool groups. attendants use the last two queue status buttons: q-calls (Queue Calls) q-time (Queue Time) atd-qcalls (ATD . HUNT GROUPS. OR SKILLS page 5 HUNT GROUPS. if an agent is logged into 4 skills (and there are no other agents). The system pool of queue slots is dynamically assigned as needed. The number of agent/group pairs. The number of Advocate agents that are currently logged in. The number of agent pairs being measured by CMS.
Logged-In Advocate Agents Logged-In IP Softphone Agents Group Members Per System CMS Measured ACD Members Dynamic Queue Slots Per System Queue/Call Status Buttons
Intercom Groups Per System Modem Pool Groups Per System Personal CO Line (PCOL) Trunk Groups
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
display capacity field descriptions. The number of PCOL trunk groups. then the Logged-In ACD Agents field is 1 and the Group Members Per System field is 4. OR SKILLS Groups/Splits/Skills Administered Logical Agents Administered Logical Agent-Skill Pairs Logged-In ACD Agents The number of ACD hunt groups.0 Issue 4 January 2008
131
. There are four types of queue status buttons. SPLITS. The number of IP Softphone agents that are currently logged in. All calls can be queued. See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509).Queue Calls) atd-qtime (ATD . See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509). For example. A real-time field displaying the number of agents actually logged in. The number of logical agents administered. The number of hunt group queue status buttons administered on stations. Applicable to systems with Expert Agent Selection.

Station Records Stations (includes BRI stations) Station Records Used by TTI (Not Shared)
Station Records Used by TTI (Shared)
Stations With Port Stations Without Port Other Stations TTI Ports Auto Moves Stations ISDN-BRI Endpoint and Trunk Ports
Communication Manager Release 5. page 8 VOICE TERMINALS Station Button Memory (units) Team Button / Monitored stations The percentage of memory being consumed by every administered button. agent login ID. VOICE TERMINALS. functional between one Communication Manager server and the Tenovis 155 hardware platform.List of SAT Commands
display capacity field descriptions. The ports provide dial-tone to the unadministered physical station attached to the physical port location. and music on hold. The number of stations available to move using ACTR. page 8
Table 20: display capacity field descriptions. and analog announcements. The number of voice terminals. Team buttons are used to monitor members of a team of stations. such as AWOH. The number of ports assigned by TTI features.0 Issue 4 January 2008
135
. MASI. The ports provide dial-tone to the unadministered physical station attached to the physical port location. The number of resources being used by regular stations. The number of team button assignments. The number of connected voice terminals (stations with specific administered ports). The number of ports used as conversion resources. announcements. TTI ports that are administered by the system when TTI is activated on the Feature-Related System-Parameters screen (change system-parameters features). The ports are administered by the system when is TTI activated on the Feature-Related System-Parameters screen (change system-parameters features). The number of voice terminals not having an administered port. Ports that are shared with AWOH stations. The number of ISDN-BRI ports.

display capacity SYSTEM CAPACITY CURRENT SYSTEM INFORMATION Software Load: R015x.0 or later.00. if load translations were upgraded from one prior to G3V4 load 71 or early G3V5 loads. The platform on which the translations were saved.List of SAT Commands
Following is the page 12 output for display capacity.0 Memory Configuration: Extra Large Offer Category: A LAST TRANSLATION LOADED INFORMATION: Software Load: Memory Configuration: Offer Category: Platform: R015x. unknown/no trans displays. Can also be unknown if no flash card is present or translations made on old load. The offer category that was set when the last save translation was done before upgrade or reboot.
LAST TRANSLATION LOADED INFORMATION Software Load The software load translations saved before upgrade or reboot. page 12
Table 24: display capacity field descriptions.824.
Memory Configuration
Offer Category
Communication Manager Release 5. Can also be unknown/no trans if no flash card is present. page 12 CURRENT SYSTEM INFORMATION Software Load Memory Configuration Offer Category The current software load on which the system is running. This is important because platforms are not always compatible.00. Standard or Extra Large = translations are saved on CM 4. The system platform.0 system. CURRENT SYSTEM INFORMATION.0 Extra Large A 6 Page 12 of 12
display capacity field descriptions. Also.824.0. LAST TRANSLATION LOADED INFORMATION. The system’s offer category. Can also be unknown if no flash card is present or translations made on old load.0. Anything other than Standard or Extra Large = translations were saved on a pre-CM4.0 Issue 4 January 2008
139
.

Maintenance SAT Commands
carrier
recycle carrier
recycle carrier UUC [override] Use recycle carrier to momentarily shut down and restore power to a specified S8700 series G650 or G650 carrier. in a carrier with two power supplies. The power supplies monitor the voltage on the backplane. Switch Node Carrier PN Control Carrier Any carrier holding an active Tone-Clock or an active EI circuit pack Note: Recycle carrier might take 90 seconds to complete. use recycle carrier to restart the power on that carrier.
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
recycle carrier
cabinet carrier slot override
cabinet location carrier (or G650 within a G650 stack) slot location (0 or 15 in a G650) Required when the controlling TN2312BP circuit pack is present in the same carrier as the specified power supply
init super-user inads craft dadmin switch circuit pack maintenance permissions
Use recycle carrier to:
l
Reset all the boards in the carrier in an attempt to clear a problem when a board stops responding to control channel messages Verify that each power supply. and force the power supply in the other slot to be the only power supply on the backplane. can supply the full power load for the carrier Note: Use recycle carrier to check the voltages from redundant power supplies Specify the slot number. Do not use the LED activity on the front of the power supply as an indicator of the command status. not the voltage from the power supplies.
l
Note:
The following carriers cannot be recycled:
l l l
Note:
140 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. When a power unit is replaced in a carrier.

When you execute recycle carrier for a carrier that contains the controlling TN2312BP. Use test board to confirm that the power supply in slot 15 has ringing capability.
cdr-link
See: busyout cdr-link on page 142 release cdr-link on page 142] status cdr-link on page 143 test cdr-link on page 144
Communication Manager Release 5. For more information. Follow instructions on the TN566/TN2169 faceplate (these also appear under ADXDP-PT in Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager.0 Issue 4 January 2008
141
. recycle carrier drops all calls within the port network in the following situations:
l l
Do not specify a slot number Specify slot number 0 for a carrier with a single power supply
When you specify a slot.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Never recycle power to a carrier containing DEFINITY AUDIX TN566/TN2169 circuit packs without first shutting down the AUDIX system. Doing so can damage AUDIX software. When you do not specify a slot. every port and adjunct supported by
circuit packs on that carrier undergoes a service outage. it provides power to the carrier while the other power supply is shut down. Use recycle carrier Uuc override to power recycle a control carrier. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190)). only the power supply in that slot is shut down. all operating power supplies in the carrier are momentarily shut down and restored. If there is another power supply.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Recycle carrier drops all calls within a carrier when:
l l
Do not specify a slot number Specify slot 0 for a carrier with a single power supply
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Use recycle carrier override to power recycle a control carrier.List of SAT Commands
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
S8700 series When a port carrier is recycled. see Common Input Parameters on page 25 and Common Command Output Screens on page 28.

They are composed of:
l l
A manager that initiates and maintains the link A controller/protocol that services the link
For information on what a CDR link is and does.Maintenance SAT Commands
busyout cdr-link
busyout cdr-link [primary | secondary] Use busyout cdr-link to put the call detail recording link in a maintenance busy state. Examples: busyout cdr-link busy cdr secondary
init inads craft
none
The Maintenance Name field for release cdr-link primary shows PRI-CDR for primary cdr-link.
release cdr-link
Use release cdr-link to remove maintenance objects associated with specified call detail recording (cdr) links from a maintenance busy state. Common Command Output Screens on page 28.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
release cdr-link
primary secondary
Specify which CDR output device to busyout. see Common Input Parameters on page 25. When busied out. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. see the description of status cdr-link on page 143. See status link on page 358 for more details on links.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
busyout cdr-link
primary secondary
Specify which CDR output device to busyout. the link is dropped and must be re-established later when returned to service. Media Gateways and Servers
. These links provide asynchronous data connections from switches to peripherals. See status link on page 358 for more details on links.
142 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Examples: busyout cdr-link busy cdr secondary
init inads craft
primary
For more information. or SEC-CDR for secondary cdr-link.

The number of times the switch has tried to set up the link.0 Issue 4 January 2008
143
. The link is used by the server to send call detail records to the output device. The following is an example of the output for status cdr-link
status cdr-link CDR LINK STATUS Primary Links state: up Number of retries: Date & Time: Forward Seq. The last time the CDR link went up or down. The CDR link is established by socket connection between Communication Manager and a CDR output device such as a CDR adjunct.List of SAT Commands
status cdr-link
status cdr-link Use status cdr-link to see the status of the call detail recording (CDR) links. See PRI-CDR (Call Detail Recording Link) in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. 1 of 2
Number of Retries Date & Time
Communication Manager Release 5. the report includes the number of times the switch has tried to re-establish the link. No: CDR Buffer & Full: Reason Code: Secondary endpoint not administered
status cdr-link field descriptions
status cdr-link field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Link State Description The operational status of the link: up The link is established and is capable of supporting the application. a primary and a secondary. No: Backward Seq. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). This is the normal operational state. See status link on page 358 for more details on links. down The link is physically down. endpoint not administered An output device has not been assigned on the CDR system parameters screen. A system may have up to two CDR links. If a link is down.

Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
status cdr-link field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Forward Seq. Then individual diagnostic tests run on the link and return results of the test along with any possible error codes. Values appear when CDR is administered. Test cdr-link first validates that the Call Detail Recording (CDR) link has been administered and exists in the switch. No Description A counter which increments with every Session Protocol Data Unit (SPDU) sent from the switch to the CDR adjunct. When the switch produces a CDR record that cannot be immediately transmitted to the CDR adjunct. see status cdr-link on page 143. This percentage indicates how full the CDR buffer is at any point in time. and the IP link that interconnects them are all working properly. that record is placed in the CDR buffer. No
CDR Buffer % Full
Reason Code
test cdr-link
test cdr-link primary | secondary [short | long] [repeat# | clear] [schedule] Use test cdr-link to validate that a call detail recording link has been administered and established. For more information on the CDR link. Why the CDR link (primary or secondary) last changed from up to down or vice versa. If the switch. this number should be zero or very close. Both the primary and secondary CDR outputs have independent Forward Sequence numbers. A counter that indicates the number of the next Session Protocol Data Unit (SPDU) that is expected from the CDR adjunct. Both the primary and the secondary CDR outputs have independent Backward Sequence numbers. the CDR adjunct. CDR connection is closed CDR Output mode is blank Data write failure EIA port Bit rate changes LSP is inactive Maintenance Busy Path is destroyed by COM Primary extension is changed Queue for primary CDR is full Secondary extension is changed 2 of 2
Backward Seq.
144 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

and switch node carriers. Note: A 655A power supply is self-administering.
Note:
Note:
The TN code for the TN2312 IPSI and TN2182 tone generator circuit packs are not allowed to be entered on this form. On an S8700 IP-PNC. remove a 655A power supply from translations add a missing 655A power supply to translations Note: When you add a DS1-C circuit pack to a G650 media gateway. The TN code will be displayed but cannot be changed. Media Gateways and Servers
. Do not use change circuit-packs to add power supply translations.Maintenance SAT Commands
circuit packs
See: change circuit-packs on page 146 display circuit-packs on page 150
change circuit-packs
change circuit-packs UU Use change circuit-packs to administratively add. Also use change circuit-packs to:
l l l
configure the system when the circuit packs have not yet been physically inserted. expansion control.
Action/Object
Qualifier
Qualifier Description
Login
Default
change circuit-packs
UU
The number of the cabinet containing the circuit packs to be modified. the number applies to port slots 1-10. set IP Control on the IP Server Interface screen for the media gateway to n. change or remove circuit packs that are to be inserted into port.
init inads craft cust nms
1
146 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

Media Gateways and Servers
. The name of the circuit pack. The letter suffix of the circuit pack. The function of the carrier: port G650-(port) when Cabinet Layout type is G650-rack-mount-stack processor switch-node dup-switch-node not-used cmc-port The carrier slot numbers Populates 655A in slots 00 and 15 if a power supply is plugged in when Cabinet Layout type is G650-rack-mount-stack The TN or UN part number of the circuit pack. This field aids in entering the circuit pack codes. if applicable.Maintenance SAT Commands
change circuit-packs field descriptions
change circuit-packs field descriptions Field Cabinet Cabinet Layout Carrier Carrier Type Description The administered number of the cabinet Type of cabinet CG650-rack-mount-stack when Cabinet Layout is G650-rack-mount-stack Each page of this screen reports the information for 1 carrier. This field indicates the letter designation of the carrier displayed on the current page.
150 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. This field is not populated automatically. The output shows what boards are in which slots in each cabinet and carrier.
Slot
Code Sfx Name
display circuit-packs
display circuit-packs <cabinet> Use display circuit-packs to list circuit packs on a specific cabinet. This number identifies the circuit pack type to system software.

List of SAT Commands
clan-all
status clan-all
status clan-all Use status clan-port to determine if a C-LAN board:
l l l
is in-service can be used by IMS (Integrated Management System) as a source board is healthy for firmware-download (no alarms on the board or ports)
The following example shows the output for Page 1 from status clan-all
status clan-all field descriptions
status clan-all field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Name Slot Description Slot where the C-LAN circuit pack is located 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008
151
.

for lack of buffer space) since the last reset. but which were discarded (e.g. The number of octets received since the last reset.0 Issue 4 January 2008
153
. including bad checksums. including those received in error. time-to-live exceeded. errors discovered in processing their IP options. The number of input datagrams discarded since the last reset due to errors in their IP headers. but which were discarded (e.. The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission since the last reset. The number of IP datagrams discarded since the last reset because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination.g. The number of octets transmitted since the last reset. The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received since the last reset. for lack of buffer space) since the last reset.List of SAT Commands
status clan-ip field descriptions
status clan-ip field descriptions Field Name Reset Time Incoming Received: Octets Incoming Received: Datagrams Incoming Received: Discards Description Time the last reset occurred. This total does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.. etc. The number of ICMP Redirect messages received since the last reset. version number mismatch. since the last reset.
Incoming Received: Hdr Errors
Outgoing Transmitted: Octets Outgoing Transmitted: Datagrams Outgoing Transmitted: Discards
Outgoing Transmitted: No Routes
Datagrams w/o Routes: ICMP Dest Unreachables Datagrams w/o Routes: ICMP Redirects
Communication Manager Release 5. other format errors. The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination. The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. This total includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down. The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing.

Distributed Communication System fp-mwi . this channel passes message waiting light information for subscribers on the messaging system. mis . The application gateway is used for conversion between ISDN and TCP/IP.Voice Messaging dcs .Supports a TCP connected AUDIX connected to an ISDN DCS network. The terminating location (far end) of this channel must be an Avaya Communication Manager system compatible with ISDN Feature Plus proprietary protocol. msaclk. Valid entries are a number between 1-(maximum number of processor channels).25-connected AUDIX connected to an ISDN DCS network. An error message appears if an “msa” value is entered: msaamwl. msallwc.Management Information System. msamcs. or blank.QSIG Message Waiting Indication. Other forms must be properly administered as well. gtwy-tcp .Supports an X. from a messaging adjunct on a main switch for a phone on a satellite switch. blank
l
l
l
l
l
All “msa” entries refer to an obsolete product. Valid entries are
l l l
audix .Maintenance SAT Commands
change communication-interface processor-channels field descriptions
change communication-interface processor-channels field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Enable Appl Description y/n The processor channel is enabled/disabled. 1 of 2
160 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. Voice Messaging. otherwise known as CMS (Communication Management System) qsig-mwi . msahlwc. This channel passes message waiting light information for subscribers on the messaging system. gateway . Identifies the switch application type/adjunct connection used on this channel over a dedicated network. Used with a QSIG-based interface to a messaging system. Gtwy To Identifies which processor channel the given processor channel is serving as a gateway to.ISDN Feature Plus Message Waiting Indication.

The value 5001 is recommended for CMS and 5003 is recommended for DCS. Valid entries are 0.List of SAT Commands
change communication-interface processor-channels field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Mode Description Identifies whether the IP session is passive (client) or active (server). Destination switch ID identified on the dial plan of the destination switch. s (server). far-end IP address. For ppp connections. match the Destination Node Name on the ppp Data Module screen. but they must be consistent between endpoints. The number 0 means any port can be used. Valid entries are c (client). Identifies the port number of the destination. Enter an adjunct name. Links are numbered 1 through 254 or p for processor. to use the same number for the Local and Remote Session numbers for two or more connections. the Local Session number on this switch must equal the Remote Session number on the remote switch and vice versa. or leave blank for services local to this switch. It is allowed. Identifies the physical link carrying this processor (virtual) channel. 5000-64500. switch name. For each connection.0 Issue 4 January 2008
161
. interface channel numbers are in the range 5000-64500. For TCP/IP. This field must be blank if the interface link is processor. and sometimes convenient. 2 of 2
Interface Link Interface Chan Destination Node
Destination Port Session Local Session Remote Mach ID
display communication-interface processor-channels
display communication-interface processor-channels [ schedule ] Use display communication-interface processor-channels to list the TCP/IP listen port to carry each processor (virtual) channel (on an Ethernet link). Identifies the switch or adjunct at the far end of this link. This field cannot be blank if the type of interface link is ethernet or ppp.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
display communication-interface processor-channels
init inads craft
Communication Manager Release 5. node ID. The Local and Remote Session numbers can be any value between 1 and 256 (si model) or 384 (r model). or blank.

A conferee not being seen by other users due to interworking problems.
l l l l l
162 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
status conference
all conference-ID endpoint all endpoint-id schedule
display all stored conference data display data on specified conference (current or last completed)
inads init system technician
all
See Common Input Parameters on page 25. Use status conference to solve the following multimedia problems:
l l
A user unable to join or remain joined to a conference. Media Gateways and Servers
. A user not receiving full service. A user not able to participate in the Multipoint Communications Service conference. A continuous conference not switching endpoints in or out of quadrants. A conference having poor video quality due to it being downgraded because of the automatic algorithms . such as being an audio-only endpoint (no video). An audio add-on user unable to join or remain joined to a conference.Maintenance SAT Commands
conference
status conference
status conference [all | conference-ID] [schedule] status conference [all | conference-ID] [endpoint all | endpoint-id] Use status conference to help identify problems with a multimedia conference.audio AUTO mode and the Px64 video picture specifications. and to help solve more complex problems. Examples: status conference status conference 2 status conference endpoint
The first screen appears when status conference is entered and at least 1 valid conference is found.

The number of channels (transfer rate) required for each Px64 endpoint . page 1 1 of 9 Field status conference name conference mode password password scope cascade mode audio mode class data mode MLP rate no of channels Chair conf bandwidth Rate adaptation Description The current status of the conference .G.Maintenance SAT Commands
status conference field descriptions. complete Always set as MMCH DYNAMIC Always set as voice-activated Not Applicable Not Applicable Conference cascade mode .711-A. Media Gateways and Servers
. any-mlp. Identifies the current chair token holder. Does this conference support Rate Adaptation? . in-use.blank The current operating audio mode . G.none.722 The type of conference . G. This field is always blank.active. ww-pcs MLP Data Rate for this conference .728. G.711-mu.2.blank. The current operating channel conference bandwidth. page 1
Table 25: status conference field descriptions.n/ y. This can be different from the administered bandwidth because of Rate Adaptation. 1 of 9
164 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.dedicated Data mode capability for this conference .

For quad-screen conferences. For H. For presentation mode quad-screen conference. the format is QCIF/CIF to reflect the input of QCIF from every participant and output of CIF to every participant.261. QFPS indicates the rate that an endpoint is capable of generating/receiving frames.‘. the video format of the conference. H.CTX.CTS. 10. and SG4. the format is always symmetric and displays as CIF and QCIF. the input from the presenter is always CIF. QCIF/CIF.CTX+.5. Note that the QFPS cannot be greater than the CIF frame rate announced by the presenter. In quad-screen mode. QCIF. 7. Note that QCIF calculation takes into account the highest common CIF frame rate declared by every conference participant. 15. CIF. For quad-screen presentation conferences.CTX+. These display as H. 7.261 single screen continuous presence capable conferences. QFPS reflects the highest common QCIF frame rate of every endpoint and the rate of the video mixer board. the input and output formats may be symmetric QCIF/CIF (displayed as CIF) or asymmetric QCIF/CIF. page 1 2 of 9 Field Format (in/ out) Description
l
For single-screen conference. the format is also QCIF/CIF to reflect the input/output of every participant except the presenter. H. H. Note that there is no indication of the maximum transmit frame rate nor the current frame rate that the MCU can detect. 2 of 9
QFPS
Communication Manager Release 5. QFPS field is blank for proprietary modes. For presentation mode H.0 Issue 4 January 2008
165
. QFPS reflects the highest common QCIF frame rate of every participant and the rate of the video mixer board. The same is true for the non-presentation. The frame rate changes as a function of the amount of motion in the input image. SG4.
l
l
l
l
l
FPS
The CIF frame rate (frames per second) — ‘-‘. 30. the input and output formats are always symmetric and the mode is the same for input and output. continuous presence conference in single-screen. 30. which may be lower than the rest of the participants. depending on if the format is administered as upgradeable.5. The ACIF frame rate (frames per second) — ‘. FPS indicates the rate that an endpoint is capable of receiving frames.261 mode non-continuous presence conferences. For conferences other than H. since QCIF rate cannot be greater than that of the highest common CIF rate. 10. 15.List of SAT Commands
Table 25: status conference field descriptions. For quad-screen VAS conferences.

Media Gateways and Servers
. blank. UCC Controller (UCC). Endpoint extension chosen at administration. see the T120 field. This indicates that the endpoint has declared every required capability (channel/video/audio/data) but is not fully connected to all conference media at this time. Audio Add-on (AUD). The endpoint does not have one of the required capabilities (Vid. Meet-Me Number administered for the Meet-Me Extension. For MLP capabilities. out is for dial-out. or is not a valid video source. Cascade Link (CAS). however the endpoint has changed the conference audio or video capability or has changed the rate of the conference because of rate adaptation. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode fields to identify which capability was reduced. BONDing calls use up to 12 channels to form a single multimedia pipe. BONDing Call (BOND). c. This endpoint may be in the process of connecting.Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 25: status conference field descriptions. f The endpoint is in use but is not connected to all media. page 1 3 of 9 Field lo/hi interworking Type Description Conference supports Low Speed/High Speed Interworking. has failed to connect. f. in is for dial-in.
l
Ext Meet-me number Dial Type In Use
y The endpoint is in use and is fully connected on all media in an active conference. The type of conferee. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode fields to identify the problem. e. Is the endpoint currently participating in the conference or in process of connecting to the conference? . either Audio/Video (P64). Indicates whether dial-in or dial-out is used to join the endpoint to the conference . blank until the first call is made from/to the endpoint 3 of 9
l
l
l
l
l
166 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode field to identify the missing capability. BONDing Cascade Link (BCAS). or Dedicated Access (DA).in. e The endpoint is in use but the endpoint had capability problems. c The endpoint is in use and is fully connected. MLP) to be a full participant. Always n. n. This field is blank. This field is blank.y. n The endpoint was connected in a conference but has/was disconnected or attempted to connect to a conference but was unsuccessful. Bhl. out.

e. If the administered audio mode is auto and the administered bandwidth is 112 kbps (56 k/channel) or 128 kbps (64 k/channel).728 to G. but every channel has not yet joined the conference. blank
l l
y The endpoint has the required number of channels. e A PCM-only endpoint that did not have the capability of supporting the administered audio mode of G. Audio add-on endpoint always have the Aud field set to y once the endpoint has joined the conference. Such endpoints operate with PCM audio and interwork with the current operating audio mode.y. due to either a network or endpoint problem. page 1 4 of 9 Field Chl Description Data on the quantify and quality of channels (transfer rate)? .711. the system starts out with the highest common bandwidth of 7 kHz. 278/G. or G.y. blank until the first call is made from/to the endpoint 4 of 9
l
l
Aud
Does it have the required audio capability? . y The endpoint has the required audio capability. n. n The endpoint has declared the correct number of channels. c. When the administered bandwidth is greater than 128 kbps.711 endpoint that did not have the capability of supporting the administered audio mode of 7 kHz.728. e.728 (such as a data conference). e The endpoint has not declared support for the correct number of channels and cannot participate fully in the conference. c This endpoint is PCM only and it changed the video quality of the conference by changing the operating audio from G.0 Issue 4 January 2008
167
.List of SAT Commands
Table 25: status conference field descriptions. blank
l
l
l
l
Communication Manager Release 5. blank Audio add-on endpoints always set to blank. the system starts out with the highest common audio of G.

e The endpoint has not declared any video capability in its cap-set. blank
l
y The endpoint has the required video capability and should be receiving video if the Chl. blank This endpoint has never joined the conference. e This endpoint did not declare this capability.120 stack terminator). The conference retains the still frame graphics capability when a non-compliant endpoint joins the conference. page 1 5 of 9 Field Vid Description Does it have the required video capability and is receiving video? . e. and Dat fields are y. c It downgraded the conference’s video quality . and therefore. This field value is always blank. Does it have the Still Frame Graphics capability? .either from CIF to ACIF or by decreasing the frame rate. the conference frame rate is initially set to the highest frame rate that can then be reduced by any endpoint. and the state of the data connection in the T. c.y.y. Aud.120 stack. The conference video mode is set by default to CIF and if a QCIF-only endpoint joins the conference. Media Gateways and Servers
. n. e. the endpoint MLP data capability. not receiving video. 5 of 9
l
168 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. possibly due to an audio or data problem. then the entire conference is made to operate in QCIF.
l
l l
l
Mlp
The state of the Control Link to the ESM (T. Also.” they are not “upgraded” until every endpoint disconnects from the conference. or the endpoint has never joined the conference. blank
l l
Gx
y This endpoint has this capability. blank Audio add-on endpoints always blank.Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 25: status conference field descriptions. indicating that the Data Mode for the conference is none. n Audio only. then if the video parameters for a conference have been “downgraded. If the conference video mode is not administered with upgrade capability. with the video clarity downgraded. the data does not apply.

l
l
l
l
l
Bond Mode
BONDing Mode . 6 . This endpoint may have the audio and may be receiving video.A 64-kbps (low-speed) endpoint has joined a high-speed (128-kbps or above) conference.A 64-kbps conference was triggered to rate adapt to 56 kbps by some other endpoint. but (because rate adaptation to 56 kbps was triggered by another endpoint) this endpoint has successfully rate-adapted to 56 kbps.5. This endpoint is connected with audio-only capability.The administered bandwidth of a conference is 64 kbps and this endpoint has joined the conference at 56 kbps. c . blank .Rate adaptation was never triggered by any endpoints.blank. Every other value applies only to rate adaptation. then it joined the conference at the administered bandwidth.A 56-kbps (low-speed) endpoint has joined a high-speed (128-kbps or above) conference. This field is blank for calls that are not related to bonding.List of SAT Commands
Table 25: status conference field descriptions. e. but is not a valid video source. n . but is neither a valid video source nor destination. if an endpoint is in use and connected. The first 56-kbps endpoint that joins a 64-kbps rate-adaptable conference triggers rate adaptation (see Join Time below). This endpoint is connected with audio-only capability. page 1 6 of 9 Field Rate Adpt Description Rate adaptation/interworking indicator . blank. c. This endpoint joined the conference at the bandwidth of 64 kbps. y. but encountered problems in rate adapting down to 56 kbps.
l
5 . n.This endpoint has joined a conference at the administered rate of 64 kbps.0 Issue 4 January 2008
169
. 6 of 9
Communication Manager Release 5. Values of 5 and 6 apply only to low-speed/high-speed Interworking. 6. y . but is neither a valid video source nor destination. So.

b For full-screen conference it indicates that at the time the command was invoked. *a indicates that the endpoint is fixed in a quadrant but is not currently connected (Fill image displays).
l
t . m . or presentation mode.At the time the command was invoked. S.Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 25: status conference field descriptions. 7 of 9
l
l
l
l
Vs
l
l
l
l
170 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. UCC roll call feature can only be performed in full-screen mode. For quad-screen VAS conference it is prefixed with an asterisk (*) and indicates that this endpoint’s video is part of the mixed image because of VAS. blank . new endpoints joining the conference are automatically muted. M.t. The conference was in chair mode and the broadcaster was designated by the chair. this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites. In this situation the MCU does not display a mute indication. Media Gateways and Servers
. M displays when both the endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent have muted the endpoint audio. m. Chair features can only be performed in full-screen mode. a This value applies only to quad-screen conferences. but not send any indication to the MCU. voice energy (talking) was detected from the endpoint. c At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites. the endpoint’s audio was muted because of solo-audio state set by UCC/CRCS Agent. the endpoint’s audio was muted via UDD/CRCS Agent interface. B At the time the command was invoked the endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites because of the UCC roll call feature. page 1 7 of 9 Field Ts Description Indication of the talking state of the endpoint .At the time the command was invoked. b (without an asterisk) identifies the presenter as the broadcaster.At the time the command was invoked voice energy (talking) was not being detected from the endpoint. S . *a indicates that an endpoint is part of the current mixed image and is fixed in one of the quadrants via administration. blank. This conference was in VAS.At the time the command was invoked. broadcast. It is possible that an endpoint may mute. For quad-screen presentation conferences.At the time the command was invoked. While in solo-audio state. M . the endpoint indicated to the MCU that it was muted.

i - At the time the command was invoked the endpoint was not a valid video source. For continuous presence conference, if this endpoint is fixed in a particular quadrant, an asterisk (#) is affixed before i. r - For full-screen conferences, at the time the command was invoked the endpoint’s video was the return video to the broadcaster. For continuous presence conference in presentation mode, *r represents a VAS quadrant that is part of the mixed image. R - At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint’s video was the return video to the broadcaster because of the UCC browse feature. UCC Browse feature can only be performed in full-screen mode. s - At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was suppressed at the request of the endpoint. For continuous presence conference with fixed quadrant participants, if this endpoint is fixed in a particular quadrant a # is affixed before s. S - At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was suppressed via UCC/CRCS Agent interface. For continuous presence conference with fixed quadrant participants, if this endpoint is fixed in a particular quadrant, # is affixed before S. S appears when the endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent have suppressed the endpoint video. u - For full-screen conferences, at the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites. The conference was in VAS mode and the broadcaster was designated by the UCC/CRSCS Agent interface. For quad-screen conferences, it indicates that UCC/CRCS Agent designated this endpoint as fixed in a quadrant. An asterisk (*) is affixed before u if the endpoint is currently part of the quad image, and # is affixed if the endpoint is not currently joined. 8 of 9

U Applies only to quad-screen conference and indicates that UCC/ CRCS Agent designated a quadrant as VAS. An asterisk (*) is affixed before U to indicate that this endpoint is part of the current quad image. v At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites. The conference was in VAS mode but the endpoint has asked to be a broadcaster via “See-Me” request and was granted a MCV (Multipoint Command Visualize) token. The See-Me feature is only performed in full-screen mode. blank At the time of the request the endpoint’s video was not broadcast, return, video, or part of the mixed-image, but it is a valid video source. 9 of 9

status conference field descriptions, page 2
Table 26: status conference field descriptions, page 2 1 of 4 Field Sum Grp Description The VD audio Level 1 (L1) and Level 2 (L2) summer group parts for each assigned group (1–4). Summer parts are assigned only for conferences with over 6 participants. When a conference operates at an audio mode of 7 kHz (administered audio mode is 7 kHz, or auto with the bandwidth greater than 128 kbps), the system allocates “primary” and “secondary” L1 and L2 summer parts. These primary and secondary parts are allocated as adjacent port slots on the same board. Status conference only displays the primary summer ports. The secondary summer ports are always one slot higher than the displayed primary summer port. Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel joined the conference. Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel disconnected. If the first channel has a drop time, then it means that the endpoint is idle. If there is a drop time without a join time, it means that the call disconnected without being joined to the conference. The reason for the channel’s disconnect:
l

Join Time Drop Time

Drop Reason

2-pri This drop reason occurs when an administration error causes a mismatch in primary-secondary designation for a cascade link. This mismatch shows that both MCUs are administered as primaries (see “Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary compatibility). 2-sec This drop reason occurs when an administration error causes a mismatch in primary-secondary designation for a cascade link. This mismatch shows that both MCUs are administered as secondaries (see “Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary compatibility). Agent The reservation agent has caused the call to disconnect (for example, the agent has changed a connected dial-out destination number). Bandwidth mismatch between a call and the conference it attempted to join. For example, a 56-kbps call attempted to join a 64-kbps conference that does not allow rate adaptation. BondHshake BONDing handshake drop reason can be caused due to the following reasons: information channel parameter not supported or invalid, parameter negotiation terminated out of sequence, timer expired because of the secondary channels did not establish, or BONDing framing was not detected for one of the other channels. 1 of 4

Busy This dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects that the conferee’s terminal equipment is busy. This drop reason is detected by an ISDN cause value (for example h0). See “Dial-out” for a description of CPTR usage. Chair disconnected the endpoint, using either Chair Command Disconnect (CCD) or Chair Command Kill (CCK) signals. Conf End The conference was ended due to reaching stop time for a reserved conference or due to an active conference being converted to file. Endpoint Clearing received from DS1 - the disconnect came from the endpoint. The endpoint notified the MCU that it intended to disconnect. Far-end Clearing received from DS1 - the disconnect came from either the network or the endpoint. Handshake Either framing was never found (the endpoint could not complete initialization - problems finding Frame Alignment Signal (FAS), Multi Frame Alignment (MFA) and getting a corrected coded cap-set) or framing was lost for some time (over 40 seconds) and the endpoint was disconnected. IDtimeout The MCU has not received response to the UIN/password Query from the H.320 user after three attempts. Each attempt has a system administered timeout period. Internal MCU has a problem allocating trunk resources necessary to route the dial-out call for the specified dial-numbers. This problem can be associated with routing pattern or trunk associated translation (for example, TAC specified in the dial-out number or routing pattern points to a trunk group without members), or it can indicate a lack of trunk resources (for example, every trunk member is maintenance busy or every in-service member is busy on a call). Network Clearing received from DS1 - the disconnect came from the network. The endpoint that had the disconnect notification capability disconnected without notifying the MCU. No-ring This dial-out drop reason occurs when the call has been up for 30 seconds and no ringing is detected. Not-MCU The dial-out destination number(s) of the “CAS” extension has terminated to a number that is not a dial-in cascade MCU extension. 2 of 4

Password Either the user entered the wrong password or the audio add-on user did not enter it within the specified time period. Note that the audio add-on user gets one attempt to enter a correct password and inter-digit timing for each digit (that is, about 10 seconds between digits). Pre-AnsDrop The call disconnected before answer by an endpoint. The cause of the disconnect may be the network, an endpoint, or a terminal adapter. This drop reason is different from ‘No-answer,’ which indicates that a 60-second timeout occurred while alerting. In this case, the call drops before the 60-second timer has expired. Some busy endpoints connected through terminal adapters display this behavior. Resource MCU could not provide resources (VC or MMI) when the call arrived or lost the resources during the call. This could be due to them being Out of Service, busied out by craft, or being used by system maintenance. This drop reason could also occur if the DS1/ MMI cable is disconnected. If there was a resource problem when the call arrived, it would get reorder (fast busy) and not get disconnected by the MCU. Reorder This dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects that there are no available trunks in the network to place the call. This drop reason is detected by MCU CPTR resources. See “Dial-out” for a description of CPTR usage. System An MCU restart (level 2) disconnected every call. UIN-Inv The user entered an invalid User Identification Number. Unknown The system could not determine the cause of the disconnect. Wrong-num This dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects the wrong destination number was dialed. This drop reason is detected by MCU CPTR resources SDN cause value. See “Dial-out” for details. UCC controller intentionally disconnected the endpoint.

l

l

l

l l l

l

l

AC Num

Administered Connection Number - from 1 to 128. AC number can be used to further diagnose a problem by combining status conference information with status administered connection and data stored in the error and alarm logs. The data endpoint that the channel is using. The MMI port for the channel. 3 of 4

Ports Trunk Ports Video

Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008

175

Maintenance SAT Commands

Table 26: status conference field descriptions, page 2 4 of 4 Field Ports Aud Description If the endpoint type is not “UCC,” the VC audio encoder port (which is always paired to a decoder port) for the channel (only the first channel). Because only one audio encoder port is allocated per endpoint, it appears together with the ESM data port in the endpoint’s channel 1 port slot position of the Port Aud/ESM column. For “UCC” endpoint type, the channel 1 port slot position displays the allocated Call Classifier resource. The Expansion Service Module MMI data port. This field is always blank. Endpoint’s assigned summer group number. The summer group port assignments are on screen 1. For Avaya use only. 4 of 4

status conference endpoint field descriptions, page 1
Table 27: status conference endpoint field descriptions, page 1 1 of 8 Field Endpoint Product Manufacturer/ Country Terminal Name Sum Grp Description Endpoint-ID is a slot number associated with the endpoint entered on the conference forms. Product identification number obtained from the endpoint. Manufacturer identification number and manufacturer’s country code obtained from the endpoint. blank Summer group number to which this endpoint belongs and the VC Audio Level (L1) and Level 2 (L2) summer ports for this group. These fields have an entry only for conferences with over 6 participants. Blank Blank 1 of 8

Dial Out #1 Dial Out #2

Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008

177

Maintenance SAT Commands

Table 27: status conference endpoint field descriptions, page 1 2 of 8 Field In Use Description Is the endpoint currently participating in the conference or in process of connecting to the conference? – y, c, e, f, n, blank.
l

y – The endpoint is in use and is fully connected on all media in an active conference. c – The endpoint is in use and is fully connected, however the endpoint has changed the conference audio or video capability or has changed the rate of the conference because of rate adaptation. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode fields to identify which capability was reduced. e – The endpoint is in use but the endpoint had capability problems. The endpoint does not have one of the required capabilities (Vid, Bhl, MLP) to be a full participant. For MLP capabilities, see the T120 field. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode field to identify the missing capability. f – The endpoint is in use but is not connected to all media. This indicates that the endpoint has declared every required capability (channel/video/audio/data) but is not fully connected to all conference media at this time. This endpoint may be in the process of connecting, has failed to connect, or is not a valid video source. This condition requires analysis of this endpoint’s capabilities and mode fields to identify the problem. n – The endpoint was connected in a conference but has/was disconnected or attempted to connect to a conference but was unsuccessful. blank – The field is blank until the first call is made from/to the endpoint.

y – The endpoint has the required number of channels. e – The endpoint has not declared support for the correct number of channels and cannot participate fully in the conference. n – The endpoint has declared the correct number of channels, but every channel has not yet joined the conference, due to either a network or endpoint problem. blank – Audio add-on endpoints always have a blank Chl field. y – The endpoint has the required audio capability. Audio add-on endpoint always have the Aud field set to y once the endpoint has joined the conference. c – This endpoint is PCM only, and it changed the video quality of the conference by changing the operating audio from G.728 to G.711. If the administered audio mode is auto and the administered bandwidth is 112 kbps (56 k/channel) or 128 kbps (64 k/channel), the system starts out with the highest common audio of G.728. When the administered bandwidth is greater than 128 kbps, the system starts out with the highest common bandwidth of 7 kHz. e – A PCM-only endpoint that did not have the capability of supporting the administered audio mode of G.728 (such as a data conference) G – 278/G.711 endpoint that did not have the capability of supporting the administered audio mode of 7 kHz. Such endpoints operate with PCM audio and interwork with the current operating audio mode. blank – The field is blank until the first call is made from/to the endpoint. 3 of 8

y – The endpoint has the required video capability and should be receiving video if the Chl, Aud, and Dat fields are y. c – It downgraded the conference’s video quality - either from CIF to ACIF or by decreasing the frame rate. The conference video mode is set by default to CIF and if a QCIF-only endpoint joins the conference, then the entire conference is made to operate in QCIF, with the video clarity downgraded. Also, the conference frame rate is initially set to the highest frame rate that can then be reduced by any endpoint. If the conference video mode is not administered with upgrade capability, then if the video parameters for a conference have been “downgraded,” they are not “upgraded” until every endpoint disconnects from the conference. e – The endpoint has not declared any video capability in its cap-set. n – Audio only, not receiving video, possibly due to an audio or data problem. blank – Audio add-on endpoint always have the Vid field set to blank.

l

l l

l

Mlp

The state of the Control Link to the ESM (T.120 stack terminator), the endpoint MLP data capability, and the state of the data connection in the T.120 stack. This field value is always blank, indicating that the Data Mode for the conference is none, and therefore, the data does not apply, or the endpoint has never joined the conference. Does it have the Still Frame Graphics capability? – y, e, blank
l l

Gx

y – This endpoint has this capability. e – This endpoint did not declare this capability. The conference retains the still frame graphics capability when a non-compliant endpoint joins the conference. blank – This endpoint has never joined the conference. 4 of 8

5 – A 56-kbps (low-speed) endpoint has joined a high-speed (128-kbps or above) conference. This endpoint is connected with audio-only capability, but is neither a valid video source nor destination. 6 – A 64-kbps (low-speed) endpoint has joined a high-speed (128-kbps or above) conference. This endpoint is connected with audio-only capability, but is neither a valid video source nor destination. y – This endpoint has joined the conference at the administered rate of 64 kbps, but (because rate adaptation to 56 kbps was triggered by another endpoint) this endpoint has successfully rate adapted to 56 kbps. c – The administered bandwidth of the conference is 64 kbps and this endpoint has joined the conference at 56 kbps. The first 56-kbps endpoint that joins 64-kbps rate-adaptable conference triggers rate adaptation (see Join Time below). n – A 64-kbps conference was triggered to rate adapt to 56 kbps by some other endpoint. This endpoint joined the conference at the bandwidth of 64 kbps, but encountered problems in rate adapting down to 56 kbps. This endpoint may have the audio and may be receiving video, but is not a valid video source. blank – Rate adaptation was never triggered by any endpoints. So, if this endpoint is in use and connected, then it joined the conference at the administered bandwidth.

l

l

l

l

l

Bond Mode

BONDing Mode – blank. This field is blank for calls that are not related to bonding. 5 of 8

t – At the time the command was invoked, voice energy (talking) was detected from the endpoint. m – At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint indicated to the MCU that it was muted. It is possible that an endpoint may mute, but not send any indication to the MCU. In this situation the MCU does not display a mute indication. M – At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint’s audio was muted via UDD/CRCS Agent interface. M displays when both the endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent have muted the endpoint audio. S – At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint’s audio was muted because of solo-audio state set by UCC/CRCS Agent. While in solo-audio state, new endpoints joining the conference are automatically muted. blank – At the time the command was invoked voice energy (talking) was not being detected from the endpoint. 6 of 8

Table 27: status conference endpoint field descriptions, page 1 7 of 8 Field Vs Description Indication of the MCU video state for this endpoint – a, b, B, c, i, r, R, s, S, u, U, v, blank. For quad-screen conferences an * is affixed before the value of Vs to indicate that an endpoint is currently part of the mixed image. A # may be affixed before the value of Vs to indicate that an endpoint was fixed to be in the mixed image (via administration or UCC/CRCS Agent), but instead, a Fill video is shown in its place. This occurs when the video of an endpoint that is fixed in a quadrant cannot be used as a video source because the endpoint is currently not joined to the conference, has suppressed its video, or has invalid video to be the video source. Notice that at most four endpoints have an * or # affixed before the Vs field value. For quad-screen conference in VAS mode, the mixed image is broadcast to every endpoint. For quad-screen conference in presentation mode, the mixed image is return video to the presenter.
l

a – This value applies only to quad-screen conferences. *a indicates that an endpoint is part of the current mixed image and is fixed in one of the quadrants via administration. *a indicates that the endpoint is fixed in a quadrant but is not currently connected (Fill image displays). b – For full-screen conference it indicates that at the time the command was invoked, this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites. This conference was in VAS, broadcast, or presentation mode. For quad-screen VAS conference it is prefixed with an asterisk (*) and indicates that this endpoint’s video is part of the mixed image because of VAS. For quad-screen presentation conferences, b (without an asterisk) identifies the presenter as the broadcaster. c – At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites. The conference was in chair mode and the broadcaster was designated by the chair. Chair features can only be performed in full-screen mode. B – At the time the command was invoked the endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites because of the UCC roll call feature. UCC roll call feature can only be performed in full-screen mode. i – At the time the command was invoked the endpoint was not a valid video source. For continuous presence conference, if this endpoint is fixed in a particular quadrant, an asterisk (#) is affixed before i. 7 of 8

r – For full-screen conferences, at the time the command was invoked the endpoint’s video was the return video to the broadcaster. For continuous presence conference in presentation mode, *r represents a VAS quadrant that is part of the mixed image. R – At the time the command was invoked, the endpoint’s video was the return video to the broadcaster because of the UCC browse feature. UCC Browse feature can only be performed in full-screen mode. s – At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was suppressed at the request of the endpoint. For continuous presence conference with fixed quadrant participants, if this endpoint is fixed in a particular quadrant a # is affixed before s. S – At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was suppressed via UCC/CRCS Agent interface. For continuous presence conference with fixed quadrant participants, if this endpoint is fixed in a particular quadrant, # is affixed before S. S displays when both the endpoint and the UCC/CRCS Agent have suppressed the endpoint video. u – For full-screen conferences, at the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites. The conference was in VAS mode and the broadcaster was designated by the UCC/CRSCS Agent interface. For quad-screen conferences, it indicates that UCC/CRCS Agent designated this endpoint as fixed in a quadrant. An asterisk (*) is affixed before u if the endpoint is currently part of the quad image, and # is affixed if the endpoint is not currently joined. U – Applies only to quad-screen conference and indicates that UCC/ CRCS Agent designated a quadrant as VAS. An asterisk (*) is affixed before U to indicate that this endpoint is part of the current quad image. v – At the time the command was invoked this endpoint’s video was being broadcast to other sites. The conference was in VAS mode but the endpoint has asked to be a broadcaster via “See-Me” request and was granted a MCV (Multipoint Command Visualize) token. The See-Me feature is only performed in full-screen mode. blank – At the time of the request the endpoint’s video was not broadcast, return, video, or part of the mixed-image, but it is a valid video source. 8 of 8

status conference endpoint field descriptions, page 2
status conference endpoint field descriptions, page 2 1 of 5 Field Join Time Drop Time Description Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel joined the conference. Time (in 24-hour notation) when the channel disconnected. If the first channel has a drop time, then it means that the endpoint is idle. If there is a drop time without a join time, it means that the call disconnected without being joined to the conference. 1 of 5

2-pri - This drop reason occurs when an administration error causes a mismatch in primary-secondary designation for a cascade link. This mismatch shows that both MCUs are administered as primaries (see “Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary compatibility). 2-sec - This drop reason occurs when an administration error causes a mismatch in primary-secondary designation for a cascade link. This mismatch shows that both MCUs are administered as secondaries (see “Cascading” for a description of primary-secondary compatibility). Agent - The reservation agent has caused the call to disconnect (for example, the agent has changed a connected dial-out destination number). Bandwidth - Mismatch between a call and the conference it attempted to join. For example, a 56-kbps call attempted to join a 64-kbps conference that does not allow rate adaptation. BondHshake - BONDing handshake drop reason can be caused due to the following reasons: information channel parameter not supported or invalid, parameter negotiation terminated out of sequence, timer expired because of the secondary channels did not establish, or BONDing framing was not detected for one of the other channels. Busy - This dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects that the conferee’s terminal equipment is busy. This drop reason is detected by an ISDN cause value (for example h0). See “Dial-out” for a description of CPTR usage. Chair - disconnected the endpoint, using either Chair Command Disconnect (CCD) or Chair Command Kill (CCK) signals. Conf End - The conference was ended due to reaching stop time for a reserved conference or due to an active conference being converted to file. 2 of 5

List of SAT Commands
status conference endpoint field descriptions. The cause of the disconnect may be the network. This drop reason is detected by MCU CPTR resources. No-ring . TAC specified in the dial-out number or routing pattern points to a trunk group without members). This drop reason is different from ‘No-answer. Not-MCU .The call disconnected before answer by an endpoint. The endpoint that had the disconnect notification capability disconnected without notifying the MCU. every trunk member is maintenance busy or every in-service member is busy on a call). Network .’ which indicates that a 60-second timeout occurred while alerting. Some busy endpoints connected through terminal adapters display this behavior. The endpoint notified the MCU that it intended to disconnect. or it can indicate a lack of trunk resources (for example.his dial-out drop reason occurs when the call has been up for 30 seconds and no ringing is detected.The dial-out destination number(s) of the “CAS” extension has terminated to a number that is not a dial-in cascade MCU extension. an endpoint. Far-end Clearing received from DS1—The disconnect came from either the network or the endpoint. Reorder . the call drops before the 60-second timer has expired. Internal MCU has a problem allocating trunk resources necessary to route the dial-out call for the specified dial-numbers. 3 of 5
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008
187
. IDtimeout—The MCU has not received response to the UIN/password Query from the H. or a terminal adapter. This problem can be associated with routing pattern or trunk associated translation (for example.his dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects that there are no available trunks in the network to place the call. Multi Frame Alignment (MFA) and getting a corrected coded cap-set) or framing was lost for some time (over 40 seconds) and the endpoint was disconnected.320 user after three attempts. Pre-AnsDrop. Handshake Either framing was never found (the endpoint could not complete initialization—Problems finding Frame Alignment Signal (FAS). See “Dial-out” for a description of CPTR usage. page 2 3 of 5 Field Drop Reason (cont’d) Description
l
Endpoint Clearing received from DS1—The disconnect came from the endpoint.Clearing received from DS1—The disconnect came from the network. In this case. Each attempt has a system administered timeout period.

The MMI port for the channel.The user entered an invalid User Identification Number. Additional bonding related information may be obtained from supplementary BONDing Drop Codes described above. The Expansion Service Module MMI data port.Maintenance SAT Commands
status conference endpoint field descriptions. Media Gateways and Servers
. For “UCC” endpoint type. See “Dial-out” for details. This could be due to them being Out of Service. Password .An MCU restart (level 2) disconnected every call.MCU could not provide resources (VC or MMI) when the call arrived or lost the resources during the call. the channel 1 port slot position displays the allocated Call Classifier resource. busied out by craft. it appears together with the ESM data port in the endpoint’s channel 1 port slot position of the Port Aud/ ESM column. Administered Connection Number .This dial-out drop reason occurs when the MCU detects the wrong destination number was dialed. page 2 4 of 5 Field Drop Reason (cont’d) Description
l
Resource .” the VC audio encoder port (which is always paired to a decoder port) for the channel (only the first channel).controller intentionally disconnected the endpoint.Either the user entered the wrong password or the audio add-on user did not enter it within the specified time period. System . This drop reason is detected by MCU CPTR resources SDN cause value. Unknown -The system could not determine the cause of the disconnect. If the endpoint type is not “UCC. Because only one audio encoder port is allocated per endpoint. about 10 seconds between digits). The data endpoint that the channel is using.
l
l l l
l
l
Drop Code
A detail code complementing the Drop Reason (see above).from 1 to 128. or being used by system maintenance. This field is always blank. UCC . it would get reorder (fast busy) and not get disconnected by the MCU. AC number can be used to further diagnose a problem by combining status conference information with status administered connection and data stored in the error and alarm logs. UIN-Inv . Wrong-num . If there was a resource problem when the call arrived. Note that the audio add-on user gets one attempt to enter a correct password and inter-digit timing for each digit (that is. 4 of 5
AC Num
Ports Trunk Ports Video Ports Aud
Ports ESM
188 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. This drop reason could also occur if the DS1/MMI cable is disconnected.

page 3 Conference Info Field Description
CONFERENCE INFO: Applies mostly to full-screen conferences. or endpoint MCV request.
l l l l l
Broadcast: a broadcast mode broadcaster. action by UCC. action by Chair. MCU
190 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Presenter: a presentation mode broadcaster. Indicates the endpoint number that is the current return video. Rollcall: the broadcaster was designated by the UCC via the Rollcall feature. Media Gateways and Servers
.
l
l
l
Next Return Vid
Indicates the endpoint number that is selected to be the next return video. Applies to full-screen and quad-screen presentation mode conferences. Browse: the return video was designated by the UCC via the Browse feature.Maintenance SAT Commands
status conference endpoint field descriptions. See-Me: the broadcaster is a result of MCV request from an endpoint. VAS: a Voice Activated Switching return video. This is true only when conference mode is broadcast with auto scan. Chair: the broadcaster was designated by the chair. VAS: Voice Activated Switching broadcaster. page 3 Conference Info
status conference endpoint field descriptions.
l l
Next Broadcaster Return Vid
Indicates the endpoint number that is selected to be the next broadcaster. Broadcaster Indicates the endpoint number that is the current broadcaster. The return video can be qualified with the following keywords:
l
blank: the return video is the previous broadcaster forced to be return video because of VAS. The broadcaster qualifier identifies which action forced this endpoint to become return video. UCC: the broadcaster was designated by the UCC. Autoscan: auto scan return video.

It implies that only one B-channel is being used.’ Other possible AUDIO mode values include neutral (neutralized I-channel) and Au-off. facility bandwidth. page 3
Table 28: status conference endpoint field descriptions. Frm (no audio signal) which never match conference mode and are not supported by MCU. The Outgoing data is the rate from the MCU toward the endpoint. or in the event of problems. XRATE may be 64 when the endpoint is just dialing in. The Incoming data is the rate at which the MCU thinks the endpoint is communicating based on the Bit-rate Allocation Signal (BAS) codes received from the endpoint/codec and the capabilities the MCU has declared. Table 30: Audio Mode Configurations on page 193 summarizes expected endpoint audio mode with different configurations of transfer rate. MCU may or may not send video to such an endpoint.0 Issue 4 January 2008
191
.List of SAT Commands
status conference endpoint field descriptions. Audio rate (kbps bandwidth) of the conference and the endpoint must be the same but not necessarily their mode. 1 of 2
AUDIO
Communication Manager Release 5. and whether or not every endpoint supports the highest common audio mode (HC audio) when the administered mode is auto. This may be different from the endpoint in (EPT-IN) or endpoint out (EPT-OUT) modes. Communication modes coming in from an endpoint. n indicates that the modes are not compatible. One of the supported rates in Table 29: Supported Transfer Rates on page 193. conference mode. The highest common conference mode is dependent on the administered bandwidth. When the audio rate of the conference and the endpoint are different the endpoint’s audio will interwork but the endpoint’s video will be invalid. y indicates mode compatibility. Communication modes sent out to an endpoint based on the number of channels connected and the capabilities of the endpoint. The following are column definitions for this section of page 3 CONF CMD STAT EPT-IN EPT-OUT XRATE The desired conference operating mode. A ‘–’ in the table indicates ‘does not apply. page 3 MODE COMMANDS/ COMMUNICATION MODES 1 of 2 Fields Description
MODE COMMANDS/COMMUNICATION MODES This is a collection of both incoming and outgoing bandwidth allocations for the multiplex. labels for the various types of mode commands y/n Compatibility of conference mode and the incoming mode.

H. or SG4 (proprietary) indicate that video is on in the direction indicated. 1472. Other values in this mode will affect video status. The LSD mode should be LSD-off. even when we receive derestrict command which does not match the conference communication mode of restrict. Not-comp-6B-H0 indicates that the sender is not interoperating between 6B and H0. Encryption mode. The High Speed MLP mode. Single-/multi-channel interoperability mode. 320. video-off when the video is off. 448. The HMLP mode should be H-MLP-off. 2 of 2
VIDEO
MLP
H_MLP LSD HSD CRYPT S/M
192 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Other values in this mode will affect video status. 224. 512. or 672 kbps. Multi Layer Protocol data mode. 256. The MLP mode should be MLP-off when Data Mode is administered as none. if the capability indicates restrict (MISC capability has restrict displayed on Page 4) the STAT 56/64 is y to indicate 56/64 compatibility between the conference and the endpoint. or 1920 kbps. In such a case. 280. H. The Video mode: H. Low Speed Data mode. other values in this mode will affect video status. Other values in this mode will affect video status. Other values in this mode will affect video status. Normally this value is Not-comp-6B-H0. The HSD mode should be HSD-off.CTX (proprietary). 6B-H0-comp indicates that the sender is interoperating multiple channels and a single channel (for example. the MLP mode should be var-MLP. It is restrict when operating at rates of either 56. The CRYPT mode should be encrypt-off. Note that if the conference is configured for N x 56-kbps operation. 6B and H0). the endpoint may signal either via capabilities or modes that is operating at the proper rate. 168. page 3 MODE COMMANDS/ COMMUNICATION MODES 2 of 2 Fields 56/64 Description The 56/64 field is derestrict when operating at per-channel rates of either 64.261 (recommended). Other values will affect video status. 112. 336. High Speed Data mode. 768. 128.Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 28: status conference endpoint field descriptions. Other values in this mode will affect video status. 384. When Data Mode is administered as any-mlp or ww-pcs. 1536.CTX+ (proprietary). 192. Media Gateways and Servers
. Again.

Media Gateways and Servers
.711-Mu-48k G.Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 30: Audio Mode Configurations 2 of 2
Admin Mode (HC Audio) All Support HC Audio Xfer Rate Facility BW Conf Mode Expected Endpoint Mode
G.722-48k G. MAC in turn tells this endpoint (by sending it AIM) that there is no audio output from MCU. y on input (I) indicates that this endpoint has suppressed its video (indicated video is muted).711-A-56k G.722-48k
G. MCU will not VAS to an endpoint displaying mute indicate. and then wrap around to 0x01. The endpoint is included in the audio portion of the conference but not the video portion.711-mu-56k G.722 G.711 G.722
– – – –
– – – –
64k 56k 64k 56k
G. y on input (I) indicates that this endpoint has muted its audio.711-Mu-48k 2 of 2
status conference endpoint field descriptions. y on output (O) indicates that every other endpoint in the conference has muted its audio (have sent AIM to MCU).722-56k G. n indicates that the endpoint is viewed as capable of being a valid source (although not necessarily at this moment). Video Indicate Suppressed. Value of n on input indicates that this endpoint has not muted (only if endpoint audio mode is turned on).711-A-56k G. n is correct for video. AIM and VIS are BAS commands which can be sent as input (I) to MCU from an endpoint or as output (O) from MCU to an endpoint.711-A-56k G. AIM Audio Indicate Muted. The flags can be y or n.711-A-48k G. page 3 Endpoint Misc Info 1 of 2 Field Description
EPT MISC EPT MISC contains miscellaneous states and counters for an endpoint. 1 of 2
VIS
MIS
194 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. y on output (O) indicates that the MCU is not sending video to this endpoint because there is no video broadcaster (broadcaster has not joined or broadcaster’s video is not valid). page 3
status conference endpoint field descriptions.722-56k G. The counters start with initial value of 0x00.711-A-48k G. Video will not be sent. they increment to 0xff. Multipoint Indicate Secondary-status. n on output indicates that there is an audio path open across the bridge. y indicates that MIS was sent to an endpoint and that this endpoint is viewed as a secondary endpoint.711-A-48k G. This command is only sent as output (O) to an endpoint.711-Mu-56k G.711 G.

The VRCV counter indicates the number of times video was sent/not sent to this endpoint. other than the broadcaster. when it receives an invalid audio code word. The HYPR counter indicates the number of times this endpoint was hyperactive. This is used during Still Frame Graphics and to force “presentation” mode. and when endpoint is hyperactive. y indicates that the decoder was muted by the VC board or the software in the MCU. y indicates that the VC board is detecting voice energy from the endpoint.261 counter indicates the number of times the framing was lost. VC board mutes the decoder when it loses MMI or endpoint framing is lost. y indicates hyperactivity from an endpoint (MCU isolated endpoint from the MCU conference due to “thrashing” behavior) and affects endpoint’s status as a video source (for 5 seconds of hyperactivity timer). The only time that the MCU software mutes the decoder of an endpoint is to mute every endpoint. y indicates that the endpoint is the return video source. when a mode of a conference is “broadcastw/scan” (broadcast with auto scan). indicating QCIF format. y indicates that the endpoint is watching the video of the broadcast source. 2 of 2
TALK VRCV
BCTK
RTTK
BCLS RTLS HYPR
DMUTE
VFMT H. The RTTK counter indicates the number of times this endpoint was the return video source. y indicates that the endpoint is watching the video of the return source. Applies to single screen conferences. y indicates that an endpoint has requested to become a broadcaster.List of SAT Commands
status conference endpoint field descriptions. Applies to single screen and quad-screen presentation mode conferences. The H. y indicates video framing loss. Applies to single screen conferences. y indicates that the endpoint is the video broadcast source. y indicates if the endpoint is receiving video (MMCH is sending video to the endpoint).0 Issue 4 January 2008
195
. Always n.261
Communication Manager Release 5. page 3 Endpoint Misc Info 2 of 2 Field MCV Description Multipoint Command Visualize. Applies to single screen and quad-screen presentation mode conferences. The DMUTE counter indicates the number of times this endpoint’s decoder was muted by the VC board. This command is only sent as input (I) from an endpoint. The BCTK counter indicates the number of times this endpoint was the video broadcast source. The video format applicable only to quad-screen conferences. The TALK counter indicates the number of times a start/stop was detected.

224. Multiframe numbering is present (required in 2B call). A-OUT A-IN M-FRM MFA MFN FAS MCUFAL MCU has endpoint framing. MFA. A counter of the number of times the MCU indicates to the endpoint that it has lost endpoint FAW or multichannel synchronization (M-FRM). This counter starts with an initial value of 0x00. MCU Frame Alignment Loss (MCUFAL). 768. 320. This counter starts with an initial value of 0x00. For 1-channel calls (at rates of 112. 256. This number should match the column header. only CHL 1 is used.
FEFAL
196 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Endpoint has MCU framing Multichannel frame alignment is present (alignment of both channels in 2B). both CHL 1 and 2 are used. page 3
status conference endpoint field descriptions. 384. increments to 0xff. 1472. Far End Frame Alignment Loss (FEFAL). Multiframe alignment word is present (required in 2B call). The MCUFAL count is also shown in the Fr Err field on page 2. M-FRM. and MFN are flags with values of y or n. 280. increments to 0xff. For 2B calls. then wraps around to 0x01. 128. page 3 Frame Alignment Word Info Field Description
Frame Alignment Word (FAW) Information The FAW section of page 3 provides the channel Frame Alignment Word information for the communication paths labeled CHL 1 and 2. then wraps around to 0x01.Maintenance SAT Commands
status conference endpoint field descriptions. 168. A-OUT. A counter of the number of changes the MCU detects in the endpoint’s a-bit (A-OUT). and 1920 kbps). 336. Media Gateways and Servers
. Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) channel number (1 or 2). The endpoint a-bit toggles when an endpoint gains or loses MCU framing. A-IN. 196. 1536. The MCU a-bit toggles when the MCU gains or loses endpoint multichannel synchronization.

H. status conference endpoint field descriptions. cic (Chair Indicate Capability) indicates chair control capability.CTX. Every value is blank if there is an active call or if this is an audio-only endpoint. Support of CIF implies support of QCIF. if an endpoint does not declare the VID H. 1 of 2
l
198 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. and other special capabilities.or 384-kbps conference. For example. the vfmt field is QCIF). A MISC capability of derestrict and a 56/64 command of derestrict together indicate that an endpoint is operating at 64 kbps. Otherwise. cfps and qfps are the maximum frame rate (frames/second) at which the endpoint can receive video for CIF and QCIF operating modes. If they signal either way that they are operating at 56 kbps in a 64.does not display if the endpoint has no video capability. Media Gateways and Servers
. da_sfg indicates support for H. 10 fps. terminal names.CTX+ and SG4 are proprietary video format capabilities.Maintenance SAT Commands
status conference endpoint field descriptions. and 7. In general. H.261 Still Frame Graphics transfers. If either is restrict. such as. 15 fps. for larger screens. Another way is the 56/64 command mode with restrict. which ZCIF is blocked. vfmt . page 4 1 of 2 Field VID Description Provides information about the type of video and frame rate the endpoint supports. mbe indicates support for Multi Byte Extension.CTX capability.4 fps. SG4_sfg indicates support for SG4 Still Frame Graphics
l
l l l
MISC
The restrict field is one way for an endpoint to indicate that it is operating at 56 kbps per channel. support of WorldWorx PCS specific features. but the MCU continues to send Selected Communication Mode (SCM) toward them when possible. CIF frame-rate values are 30 fps. they are an audio-only source. The differences are less observable on very small displays. but may run at higher frame rates and less clear. the cfps value should be blank. values for this field include:
l l
FCIF for full CIF QCIF for quarter CIF. Other field values include:
l l
dcomp indicates support for WorldWorx PCS data compliance. page 4. MBE capability is used for the exchange of passwords. CIF displays sharper resolution video.
Fields on this page appear only when an endpoint declares the specific capability.CTX field does not appear. If the endpoint does not support CIF (that is. the conference operates at 56 kbps. the H. An endpoint on a 56-kbps conference must send one or both of the 2 indications that they are operating at 56 kbps before they become a video source in a 56-kbps conference.

The g722_48 field indicates endpoint support for G. the endpoint must signal 384-kbps support. The g722_64 field indicates endpoint support for G. Endpoints may occasionally take 2x64 (or the current channel rate: 384. expecting the endpoints to do likewise (64x2 is displayed.728 is supported (LB_CELP). This is Mode 0 forcing and is part of normal procedures. The HSD fields indicate the capabilities for High speed Data conferencing. the endpoint sends its capabilities to indicate 384-kbps support. 2 of 2
AUD
LSD HSD MLP HMLP
Communication Manager Release 5. For a 2B conference. For a 384-kbps (H0) call. the MCU provides Audio Only Communications Mode (ACOM). 711m and 711a are PCM (G. page 4 2 of 2 Field XR Description Transfer rate capabilities are statement about the speeds at which the endpoint can operate over the current connection and operate a Px64 Multiplex. if this is not displayed. If an endpoint does not indicate support for 384 kbps on a 384-/ 336-kbps conference. On a 336-kbps call. The audio fields are statements of the audio protocols that the endpoint supports. there is no 64x2 capability). The g728 field indicates whether G.List of SAT Commands
status conference endpoint field descriptions. The MCU will provide AOCM if the endpoint does not signal support matching the configuration of the conference. 768. g722_48 indicates that the endpoint supports G. which displays as 384. respectively. The HMLP fields indicate the conference’s capability for High Speed MLP data conferencing. The LSD fields indicate the capabilities for Low Speed Data conferencing. and at least one is required of endpoints. the MCU sets the rate to 2x64.722 (7 kHz) at both 48 and 56 kbps.711) and support Mu and A-law. This value depends upon the type of the endpoint and how that endpoint is currently configured. 1472.722 at 64 kbps in an unframed (not supported by the MCU) mode. 1536) out of their capability.722 audio at both rates. Therefore.0 Issue 4 January 2008
199
. The MLP fields indicate the capabilities for Multi Layer Protocol Data capabilities.

Once the timer expires. .The initial channel call has not yet connected. connected—means that the call associated with the AC has been answered and join cut-through to the conference. page 6 1 of 2 Field Dial-Out Number Description The actual numbers that are dialed out by the administered connections for each channel in the call. and all retries are stopped.
l
l
not scheduled—is transient in nature and indicates that an AC is about to enter the “attempting to connect” state. waiting to retry—means that the AC is inactive (sleeping) and waiting for the retry timer to expire. .The AC has reached an administered retry threshold. This is particularly useful with bonding dial-out calls. disabled—this may mean one of three things: . The following are connection states associated with dial-out ACs:
l
Connection State
enabled—is transient in nature and indicates that an AC is about to enter the attempting to connect state. 1 of 2
l
l
l
202 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. page 6
status conference endpoint field descriptions.Maintenance SAT Commands
status conference endpoint field descriptions. the AC sends a dial out call and enters the “attempting to connect” state. Indicates the current call state of the AC. No dial out call attempt is made for the additional channel(s) until the initial channel has reached a connected state. Verify this by checking the error log and checking whether an error type of 9 is logged against the AC.The AC was in a connected state and the far end disconnected. ACs in this state indicate that the dial out call has failed at least once. but the call has not yet connected. Note that the dial Out #1 and #2 on page 1 of the forms display the DCP endpoint number. Media Gateways and Servers
. attempting to connect—means that the AC is active on a call.

ISDN or CPTR cause value (values lower than 0x7f) recorded when the last dial out call was dropped.Failure Cause Values 1 of 2
Failure Cause (hexadecimal) Description
Failure Cause
0x00 (0t0) 0x01 (0t1) 0x02 (0t2) 0x06 (0t6) 0x10 (0t16) 0x11 (0t17) 0x12 (0t18) 0x15 (0t21) 0x12 (0t22) 0x1C (0t28) 0x1D (0t29) 0x1F (0t31) 0x22 (0t34) 0x26 (0t38) 0x29 (0t41)
N/A Incorrect destination address Reason unknown Reason unknown Normal call clearing Endpoint not available ISDN timer expired Reason unknown Destination address changed Bad destination or access denied Access denied Reason unknown Trunks unavailable Temporary or facility failure Temporary or facility failure 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. This field does not clear when the AC connects.List of SAT Commands
status conference endpoint field descriptions.0 Issue 4 January 2008
203
. Table 31: Status AC . page 6 2 of 2 Field Retry Count Description Number of retries have been attempted for this AC during this join attempt. Values above 0x7f are generated internally. This field clears when a new join attempt is made via a Redial feature.Failure Cause Values on page 203 lists all possible failure cause values displayed by this field and its associated description. Note that this is different from the Join Count which counts the number of times the channel joined the conference during this conference session. Err Type appears as a decimal. This value is logged in the error log and appears with display errors. 2 of 2 Table 31: Status AC .

the port is assigned as an external device minor (mn) alarm port p . Two rows appear for circuit packs with more then 8 ports.DS1 Circuit Packs Location 01B05 01B06 01B10 01B11 01B12 01C06 01C13 01C16 01C18 Code TN464F TN464D TN767C TN767E TN767E TN464E TN767D TN464F Vintage 000002 000002 000003 000003 conflict no board 000003 000024 000002 Signaling isdn-pri isdn-pri none robbed-bit none none common-channel robbed-bit isdn-pri Name CSU MOD 120A1 n/a n/a 120A1 <blank> <blank> unknown unkonwn none
208 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.the port is assigned as an external device major (mj) alarm port mn .32 . Activate the port with the TTI association sequence.the circuit number of an assigned port mmj .Maintenance SAT Commands
list configuration field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Assigned Ports Description Each port on the circuit pack is represented by a position corresponding to its circuit number in ascending order from left to right. Each port on a TN556 ISDN-BRI circuit pack can have two BRI endpoints. Identifies the current status of the port that corresponds to the position: 01 .the port is not assigned and is supported by Terminal Translation Initialization. 2 of 2 The following display shows a typical result of list configuration ds1.psa (personal station access) t . Media Gateways and Servers
.the port exists but is unassigned.
list configuration ds1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . BRI ports appear once when assigned only one endpoint and twice when fully configured with two endpoints. u . The assigned ports for list configuration ds1 do not appear.

Appears for list configuration ds1 option. unknown = the circuit pack is a TN464E or TN767D n/a = the circuit pack is a TN464D or TN767C or earlier suffix DS1 board
Signaling
Name
CSU MOD
Communication Manager Release 5. Values are the same as the signaling mode administered for the ds1 circuit pack. Values are the same as the signaling mode administered for the ds1 circuit pack. Contains the identification number of the Integrated CSU module present on the DS1 circuit pack (TN767E or later / TN464F or later).The T1 link is down to a DS1 circuit pack Appears for list configuration ds1.0 Issue 4 January 2008
209
. Other values that may be shown: no board .List of SAT Commands
list configuration ds1 field descriptions
list configuration ds1 field descriptions Field Location Code Vintage Description Location of the DS1 circuit pack The TN or UN code and suffix of the DS1 circuit packs The vintage number. or none. or the hardware (HW) and firmware (FW) vintages. or none if the circuit pack is not administered.The circuit pack is administered but not physically installed conflict . Appears for list configuration ds1. of the circuit pack. or none if the circuit pack is not administered.The circuit pack administered to the slot differs from the circuit pack that is physically installed no link .

Media Gateways and Servers
. See Common Input Parameters on page 25. the relevant fields display no tape or memory card. this field contains the message “power supply not present. all other files on the device are marked invalid. (This does not indicate that the system does not recognize the presence of the device. or if the power supply is removed from the carrier. fields for tape or memory card data display coredump. If the memory card cannot be read at the time the command is entered.Maintenance SAT Commands
list configuration power-supply field descriptions
list configuration power-supply Field Location Power Supply Serial Number Power supply Make/Model Number SAP ® Power Supply Firmware Version Description The power supply cabinet/carrier/slot The serial number of the power supply The apparatus code and hardware revision number of the power supply.)
212 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. The version number of the power supply firmware (10 characters)
list configuration software-versions
list configuration software-versions [memory-resident] [schedule] Use list configuration software-version to display:
l
software version numbers and compatibility indexes of the software load modules stored in system memory (RAM) the dates and times when translation and announcement data were last saved information about any software update files that have been applied to the system
Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
l l
Action/Object
list configuration software-versions
memory-resident schedule
Specifies display of RAM-resident files.
init inads craft
If the memory card contains a core dump file.” Part number SAP is a registered trademark of SAP America. Inc. If the system cannot communicate with the power supply. When a core dump is present.

2007
list configuration software-versions
list configuration software-versions field descriptions Field SOFTWARE VERSION Memory Resident Disk Resident TRANSLATION DATA Memory Resident Description Information related to the current software-load module stored in memory Version number of the RAM-resident load module The last date and time that translation data was saved to disk.List of SAT Commands
The following display shows a typical result of list configuration software-version.00.
Disk Resident Disk Second Copy
Communication Manager Release 5. and is blank if the disk is not installed. This date is read from disk.824.0 Issue 4 January 2008
213
. Date and time marked on the disk when translation data was last read into memory. The last date and time that translation data was saved to disk. Date invalid appears when the timestamp does not contain the expected information. This is stored in memory and is not modified by changes to translation data.00.0. This date is read from disk.0 Disk Resident: R015x. The last date and time that translation data was saved to disk. This date is read from the second copy of the file on the disk.824. and is blank if the disk is not installed.0.0 TRANSLATION DATA Memory Resident: 11:12 am Disk Resident: 11:12 am Disk Second Copy: good
FRI OCT 19. Information related to the translation files as stored in memory and the disk. 2007 FRI OCT 19.
list configuration software-versions SOFTWARE VERSIONS SOFTWARE VERSION Memory Resident: R015x.

Only one login in addition to craft may be enabled to use profile 3 at any one time. Only logins assigned to profiles 0 (init).
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
enable craft2
xyz
The name of a second craft login
Profiles 0-2
disable craft2
Use disable craft2 to remove the second craft login assigned to profile 3. disable the current login (disable craft2) and enable a new one.0 Issue 4 January 2008
215
. To change the name of the second craft login.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
disable craft2
Profiles 0-2
cti-link
See: busyout cti-link on page 216 list cti-link on page 217 list usage cti-link on page 218 release cti-link on page 218 test cti-link on page 218
Communication Manager Release 5. and 2 (dadmin) can execute this command. 1 (inads). and 2 (dadmin) can execute this command. Only logins assigned to profiles 0 (init).List of SAT Commands
enable craft2 disable craft2
enable craft2
Use enable craft2 xyz to create a second craft login assigned to profile 3. 1 (inads).

Common Command Output Screens on page 28. CentreVu CT). See status link on page 358 for more details on links.
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Feature Interaction
busyout cti-link
link
Link number (1. Periodic and scheduled tests continue to run. which is connected to an Ethernet LAN. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33.
216 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. A Warning alarm is generated even if more severe CTI link (for example.
Feature interactions for busyout cti-link
l l
All ASAI service is disabled. adj-ip) alarms are present.
l
l l
For more information. The release of CTI link from busyout retires all alarms. background maintenance generates new alarms within a few minutes. No alarms more severe than a Warning are generated until the CTI link is released from busyout. An ASAI adjunct link provides connectivity to an ASAI adjunct (for example. If a problem still exists.8)
init inads craft customer -type login
See Feature interactions for busyout cti-link on page 216. Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
busyout cti-link
busyout cti-link link Use busyout cti-link to busyout a specified endpoint for a link that is administered on the AESVCS Administration page of the ip-services screen. see Common Input Parameters on page 25.

status data-module system port field descriptions Field CF Destination Ext Maintenance Busy Connected Ports Service State Description The call-forwarding destination. the connected station extension is shown. The operational state of the associated port. in-service/active The data module is connected and in use. if any. Whether the object is busied out for testing. The operational state of the data-module: in-service/idle The data module is connected but idle. out-of-service The data module has been removed from service. the channel number is shown. the following fields will be for more information. The location of the port connected to the data module. Media Gateways and Servers
. For data channels. of the station. For DTDMs. Locations of ports to which the data module is currently connected.Maintenance SAT Commands
status data-module field descriptions
status data-module field descriptions Field Data Ext/Sta Ext for Stn DM Port/ ChannelNumber Service State Description The data module extension number. disconnected The data module no longer appears to be present
If the specified port is administered as a system port.
222 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

Echo cancellation is a software. Plan 1 is display only.
Communication Manager Release 5. If DS1 Echo Cancellation is y on the TRUNK GROUP form. The echo cancellation parameters used for a given trunk member are determined by the Echo Cancellation Plan number administered on the DS1 CIRCUIT PACK form for that specific trunk’s board. Initially. It is not intended for channels that support data. echo cancellation is turned off for every TN2405AP trunk member in that trunk group.10 can be changed. all 10 plans are identical (all 120 fields on each plan have the same default values).0 Issue 4 January 2008
225
. right-to-use feature that is intended for channels supporting voice. The TN464GP/TN2464BP has the capability to detect modem tone and to turn off echo cancellation accordingly. If DS1 Echo Cancellation is n on the TRUNK GROUP form. These tests are not be available for background or demand testing. Each plan contains approximately 120 parameters. Plans 2 .
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
display disabled-tests
init inads craft cust rcust
ds1-echo-cancellation
change ds1-echo-cancellation
pin-cancellation xx Use change ds1-echo-cancellation to change the plan number of the echo cancellation circuitry. Communication Manager allows 10 different sets of parameters (plans) to be administered.List of SAT Commands
disabled-tests
display disabled-tests
This command lists the numbers for all maintenance tests that have been disabled by INADS. echo cancellation is applied to every TN2405AP trunk member in that trunk group. Echo cancellation is turned on or off on a trunk group basis using change trunk-group. Echo Cancellation on the TN464GP/ TN2464BP is selectable per channel.

and then busyout a facility on the standby PNC. see Common Input Parameters on page 25. it switches the packet and control traffic to another facility. the circuit pack must be busied out.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Busying out a non-packet facility disrupts all traffic carried on that facility. Common Command Output Screens on page 28. and some circuit connections.List of SAT Commands
busyout ds1-facility
busyout ds1-facility location [ override ] Use busyout ds1-facility to put a DS1 facility of a DS1C complex into a maintenance busy state. When override is used. Common Command Output Screens on page 28. all packet traffic. it cannot be busied out.
Qualifier Qualifier Description
l
Action/Object
busyout ds1-facility
location override
Location of the ds1-facility All packet and circuit traffic on the packet facility is switched to another facility.
l
The packet facility carries the control channel for every facility in the complex. and all traffic that was on the destination facility before the switch is dropped. the packet facility is set on the “a” facility. If system software detects a problem with this facility. Using override to busy the packet facility disrupts all traffic on the facility to which the packet and control traffic is moved. see Common Input Parameters on page 25. The other facilities carry circuit connections only. If there is only one facility left in service on the circuit pack.0 Issue 4 January 2008
227
. and all traffic that was on the destination facility before the switch is dropped. Whenever the circuit pack resets. Use busyout pnc to busyout a standby PNC. The busyout command is not allowed on the packet facility without override. There is no way to tell which facility is carrying the packet and control traffic without attempting to busy it out. all packet and circuit traffic on the packet facility is switched to one of the other three facilities. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33.
On critical-reliability systems (duplicated PNC) a facility on the active PNC cannot be busied out. This facility cannot be determined in advance. Each DS1C complex uses from 1 to 4 DS1 facilities. For more information. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. In this case. Example: busyout ipserver-interface 6b
For more information.
Communication Manager Release 5.

See DS1-FAC (DS1 Facility) on page 728 in Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. Configure the external device to loop back the signal. This initiates a destructive test that sends a test pattern to an external device and returns it for comparison to the original.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
test ds1-facility
location short long external loopback
The location of the DS1 Converter circuit pack plus a letter (a to d) corresponding to the four facilities connected to the circuit pack.Maintenance SAT Commands
test ds1-facility
test ds1-facility location [short | long | external loopback] [repeat#] [schedule] Use test ds1-facility on S8700 MC to perform a series of tests on the specified facility. Media Gateways and Servers
. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190) and DS1-BD (DS1 Interface Circuit Pack) on page 717 in Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. See Common Input Parameters on page 25. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). Each test runs diagnostics on the facility and returns results of the test along with any possible error codes. The long test is destructive and is not allowed unless the facility has been busied out. Examples: test ds1-facility 04a01d test ds1-facility 03a01a sh c
repeat# schedule
ds1-loop
228 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

the following error message appears: Parameter valid only if a loopback/span test is active on the DS1
Communication Manager Release 5. Long-duration loopback tests execute for an extended period of time until the system technician terminates it. If the [inject-single-bit-error] parameter is used. or one-way span test is active on the DS1 circuit pack. far-end CSU.List of SAT Commands
test ds1-loop
test ds1-loop location [cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin [number-of-bits bit-pattern] | far-csu-loopback-test-begin | one-way-span-test-begin | end-loopback/span-test | inject-single-bit-error | ds1/ csu-loopback-tests] For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 Interface circuit packs. use test ds1-loop for loopback and one-way span testing of the DS1 span. Based on the command parameter. Use list measurements ds1 summary to monitor the status of a long-duration loopback/span test.
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default Feature Interaction
test ds1-loop
location cpe-loopback-jack-test-begin number-of-bits bit-pattern far-csu-loopback-test-begin one-way-span-test-begin end-loopback/span-test inject-single-bit-error ds1/csu-loopback-tests See Parameters for test ds1-loop on page 230.0 Issue 4 January 2008
229
. but no CPE loopback jack. that the board is a TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 Interface board. a long-duration loopback/span test or series of short-duration loopback tests will be executed. Examples: test ds1-loop test ds1-loop test ds1-loop test ds1-loop test ds1-loop test ds1-loop
system technician inads init super-user logins with Maintain Switch Circuit Packs permissions
ds1/ csu-loop back-
See Feature Interactions for test ds1-loop
01c08 1-3c03 cpe 10c03 end 02d12 fa 02d12 inj 1-3c03 cpe-loopback-jack
Use test ds1-loop to validate that the board exists at the specified location. Short-duration loopback tests return the result of the test to the screen when finished executing.

and CSU Module Repeater LoopBack. These tests are performed sequentially for a short duration each. For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards. It is represented by the cabinet number. For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards. Specify the number-of-bits in the loop-up code as well as the actual bit-pattern (in hexadecimal). this causes a long-duration loopback test to be setup through the far-end CSU (channel service unit). The command allows you to specify a loop-up code for the CPE loopback jack if it differs from the default of 0x47F. this parameter causes a single bit error to be sent within an active framed 3-in-24 test pattern used in long-duration loopback and span testing. Media Gateways and Servers
. far-end CSU. and the slot position.
cpe-loopback-jack-test-begi n [number-of-bits bit-pattern]
far-csu-loopback-test-begin
one-way-span-test-begin end-loopback/span-test
inject-single-bit-error
ds1/csu-loopback-tests
Feature Interactions for test ds1-loop
Loopback or span tests are allowed only on DS1 boards that are busied out. this parameter terminates long-duration one-way span and loopback testing.Maintenance SAT Commands
Parameters for test ds1-loop
Parameters for test ds1-loop location A location represents the physical position of the board to be tested. this causes a long-duration loopback test to be setup through the CPE (customer-premises equipment) loopback jack.
230 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. The test aborts if the busyout command has not been set For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards. Only one of the CPE loopback jack. CSU Module Equipment LoopBack. For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards. For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards. this parameter executes the following loopback tests: DS1 Board LoopBack. or DS1/CSU loopback tests may be active at any given time on a DS1 span. and individual PASS/ FAIL/ABORT test results are reported following each test. For TN464F or TN767E or later suffix DS1 boards. this begins execution of a long-duration one-way span test. A 1-digit cabinet (1-3) is entered with or without a leading zero (0). one-way span. the carrier.

Note: If you enter test eda-external-device-alrm on an IPSI-connected port. test eda-external-device-alrm performs a hardware diagnostic test on every administered external device’s alarm port. The test PASSES if the external device is not reporting an external device alarm and FAILS if the external device is reporting an external device alarm. an error message appears.List of SAT Commands
eda-external-device-alrm
See: list eda-external-device-alrm on page 231 test eda-external-device-alrm on page 231
list eda-external-device-alrm
For detailed information about list eda-external-device-alrm. or every external device. refer to EXT-DEV in Maintenance for Avaya Communication Manager and DEFINITY® Server CSI (555-233-119).
Note:
Communication Manager Release 5.
test eda-external-device-alrm
test eda-external-device-alrm all | physical-location [repeat repeat# | clear] [schedule] Use test eda-external-device-alrm to perform hardware diagnostic tests on the alarm port for either an individual device.0 Issue 4 January 2008
231
. this command performs a hardware diagnostic test on that port. If all is entered. The IPSI circuit pack contains maintenance board functionality. If the technician specifies a port. If an administered external device’s alarm port is entered. it must be administered as an external device’s alarm port either on a maintenance board or on an analog line board.

both a “major” and “minor” port can be administered with major. Thus.
init inads craft 1
Examples: test eda-external-device-alrm test eda-external-device-alrm test eda-external-device-alrm test eda-external-device-alrm
all all schedule physical 1major r 10 physical 2c1101 c
Parameters for test eda-external-device-alrm
Parameters for test eda-external-device alrm physical location For an administered external device alarm analog line port. location See Common Input Parameters on page 25. See Parameters for test eda-external-device-alrm on page 232.
232 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. minor. Since the “maintenance board” alarm connections connect to control carrier boards that are in unnumbered slots. or warning alarms. The special ports UUmajor and UUminor are used designate the major or minor maintenance board alarm connection for cabinet UU. The special locations UUmajor and UUminor designate the name of the major or minor Maintenance circuit pack alarm connection for cabinet UU (depends upon the auxiliary connector of the Port Network). the physical location represents the physical position of the port to be tested.Maintenance SAT Commands
Action/Object
Qualifier
Qualifier Description
Login
Default
test eda-external -device-alrm
all physicallocation repeat repeat# clear schedule
test every administered external device’s alarm port on analog line boards and maintenance boards. the standard port format cannot be used to designate these alarm connections. Media Gateways and Servers
.

Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
set emergency
on off auto cabinet
activates emergency transfer deactivates emergency transfer the server controls emergency transfer specify the cabinet location (1-64)
init super-user inads craft dadmin switch circuit pack maintenance permissions
Communication Manager Release 5. set emergency generates a major alarm if emergency transfer is set to on and generates a warning alarm if emergency transfer is set to off. Use status health (all cabinets) or status cabinet (individual cabinets) to see the state of emergency transfer.List of SAT Commands
emergency
set emergency
set emergency on | off | auto <cabinet> Use set emergency to manually set the state of emergency transfer on a TN2312BP in a media gateway or Compact Modular Cabinet (CMC).0 Issue 4 January 2008
233
.

even if the power supply itself fails. all fields except Pow Loc and Alm Cnt contain a single dash (-). If the power supply is in a control carrier without a redundant power supply and the carrier fails. the supply output voltage. Media Gateways and Servers
. and might work even though the power supply fails. then communication with the power supply is not available.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
status environment
cabinet carrier
cabinet location
init super-user inads craft dadmin switch circuit pack maintenance permissions
Note:
Note: The microcontroller on the power supply might provide data for diagnostic tests and status environment. The microcontroller can get input power from three sources. or its own power supply. or if the power supply is removed from the carrier. backplane power. Note: If the system cannot communicate with the power supply.Maintenance SAT Commands
environment
See: status environment on page 234 test environment on page 238
status environment
status environment <cabinet> <carrier> Use status environment to see status information for the 655A power supplies in a specified G650 or G650 stack.
Note:
234 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

Status of the ringer on the associated power supply.) 2 of 3
236 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. see Ring Set field values) off (due to short or internal failure)
Ring Voltage Set
Indicates the ringing voltage frequency. See Ring Status and Ring Control states on page 237 for the valid states for Ring Stat and Ring Ctrl:
l l l l l
ok over (overloaded) shrt (shorted) fault cmd (commanded off)
Ring Voltage Ctrl
Indicates if the associated power supply is providing ringing voltage for the G650. The ringing voltage frequency is set via a physical switch on the 655A power supply:
l l l
20 Hz (North American Ringer Signal) 25 Hz (European/International Ringer Signal) off (The ringer switch on the power supply is set to off. Fan voltage is:
l l l l
Fan Alm Ring Voltage Stat
A fan alarm occurs when one or more fans fail. Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
status environment field descriptions 2 of 3 Field Voltage Description The three voltages monitored are:
l l l
+5VDC Primary logic control -5VDC Logic support -48VDC Telephone support (Talk Battery) udr = under 12VDC mid = +12VDC hgh = +14VDC ovr = above +14
Fan Ctrl
The speed at which the fans are running. See Ring Status and Ring Control states on page 237 for the valid states for Ring Ctrl and Ring Stat:
l l l l
actv (active) stby (standby) dsbl (disabled. Only one power supply can provide ringing voltage to the carrier.

The ring generator on this power supply is off due to a short on its output. This is done when an external ringer is used. but is disabled with the ringer select switch on the power supply.
l l
AC (Alternating Current) DC (Direct Current) 3 of 3
Ring Status and Ring Control states Stat/Ctrl ok/actv ok/stby ok/dsbl Ring Generator State The ring generator on this power supply is the active ringer. Upper case letters indicate the input source that is being used. The ringer voltage on this power supply is overloaded. The ring generator on this power supply is the standby ringer The ring generator on this power supply is OK.List of SAT Commands
status environment field descriptions 3 of 3 Field Det Input Power Description y .0 Issue 4 January 2008
237
.backplane ringing is detected n .backplane ringing is not detected Type of current (active input voltage) that is being used on the power supply and an alternate source that can be used. Lower case letters indicate that an input source is present but not being used. The ring generator on this power supply is off due to a failure detected by an internal power supply audit. for example the TN2202 French Ringing circuit pack. The ring generator on this power supply is off due to a software command. but the ring generator on this power supply is still active.
over/actv shrt/off fault/off cmd/off
Communication Manager Release 5.

init super-user inads craft dadmin switch circuit pack maintenance permissions
In test environment. Maintenance Objects reported with the test environment command 1 of 2 Maintenance Object AC-POWER CABINET CARR-POW CUST-ALARM CUST-ALARM is part of the environment functionality but is not tested with test maintenance. all service to that cabinet is disrupted. Media Gateways and Servers
. Notes
DC-POWER EMG-XFER 1 of 2
238 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. See test customer-alarm on page 219.
Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
Action/Object
test environment
UU short long repeat# clear schedule
cabinet location See Common Input Parameters on page 25. and emergency transfer functions of a specified cabinet.Maintenance SAT Commands
test environment
test environment UU [short | long] [repeat# | clear] [schedule] Use test environment to perform hardware diagnostic tests of the environment monitoring and control. When a port carrier is recycled. there are 6 maintenance objects involved on S8700 IP servers. This command tests PN cabinets. and 10 maintenance objects involved on S8700 MC servers. all service and links to ports on the carrier are dropped. Circuit packs involved are the PN’s maintenance and tone-Clock (for the ring generator test). If a carrier containing an active EI or Tone-Clock is recycled. It does not recycle power on active or standby servers.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
The long test recycles power on every port circuit pack carrier and is destructive.

l
Whenever the Communication Manager software reloads. The sequence count starts over for each second. A new entry overwrites the oldest unalarmed entry. periodic tests. The error log is restricted in size. NEXT PAGE for next page. PREV PAGE for previous page
l
l
System Reboots and the Error and Alarm Logs
Avaya™ Communication Manager software attempts to save the error and alarm logs to the disk when any of the following events take place:
l l
The save translation command is executed. See Common Input Parameters on page 25.
240 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. The overwritten entry must be at least six minutes old. PREV PAGE for previous page After the Next Page key is pressed and there are no more alarms/errors to be displayed: Press CANCEL to abort.
Help Messages
l
When the first page of a multiple page list of alarms/errors or after the Prev Page key is pressed: Press CANCEL to abort or NEXT PAGE for next page After the Next Page key is pressed and there are more pages of alarms/errors to be displayed: Press CANCEL to abort.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
display errors
highresolution schedule
Include high resolution time stamps for the first occurrence and last occurrence of the error. software inconsistency. Since the logs are saved to the disk. NEXT PAGE to complete. The server that is active coming out of reload is not the same one to which the logs were last saved. or a data audit discrepancy. Errors can result from in-line firmware errors. the versions restored at reload time may not be current. See Error Log Report High Resolution on page 243. A demand or software-escalated system reboot takes place. Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use display errors to select the errors that appear on the hardware error report. failures detected while executing a test command. This shows seconds and a sequence count within a second. or the new entry is dropped. the error log is restored from the disk. This occurs when either:
l l
The attempt to save at reload did not succeed. Translations are saved as part of scheduled maintenance (as administered on the Maintenance-Related System Parameters screen).

if any. the logs will not show the errors and alarms that have been logged since the last time a save was made to the server that became active with the reboot. press ENTER. every error from the last day that are associated with active alarms display. Note: If there are SYSTEM errors in the error log. Information that could not be logged during a system reset may be found here.
display errors ERROR REPORT The following options control which errors will be displayed.0 Issue 4 January 2008
241
. of the following ) Media Gateway: ___ Cabinet: __ Port Network: __ Board Number: ____ Port: ______ Category: ________ Extension: _____ Trunk ( group/member ): __/__
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
In such a case. When every selection has been made. look for indications preceding the reload to determine whether the logs restored at reboot are complete.
Note:
display errors input form
This screen specifies which errors display on the report. When looking at errors that precede the last reload. ERROR TYPES Error Type: REPORT PERIOD Interval: _ ____ Error List: active-alarms Page 1 of 1
From:
__/__/__:__ To:
__/__/__:__
EQUIPMENT TYPE ( Choose only one. System resets less severe than a reload rarely affect the error and alarm logs. If no selections are made or if the schedule option is specified. use display initcauses on page 315 for more information.

the system will default to 1.
l l l l
To Equipment Type
Media Gateway: Enter the media gateway number. or a trunk-group and member number separated by a slash (for example. a). day. w. The HELP key displays a list of categories. h. d. Category: Enter a category to restrict the report to maintenance objects in a specific category. every error up to the current date appears. 11c0408). Default is every error. If the cabinet number is omitted. Specifies error records for the last month.Maintenance SAT Commands
display errors input field descriptions
display errors field descriptions Field Error Type Error List Interval From Description The report can be restricted to specific error codes. week. If the cabinet number is omitted. Cabinet: Enter the cabinet number. Port: Enter the cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit address of the port (for example. Extension: Enter the extension number of a port. or all errors (m. If no entry is made. hour. Trunk (group/member): Enter a trunk-group number.
l
l
l l
242 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Specifies every error record up to the time specified by mm/dd/hh/mm. The default is all. Specifies error records starting from the time specified by mm/dd/hh/mm (month/day/hour/minute). To limit the report to a specific group of components. Board: Enter the cabinet-carrier-slot address of the circuit pack (for example. 78 or 78/1). errors for the entire system are displayed. Media Gateways and Servers
. If no From date is entered. 11c04). errors. enter the location of a type of equipment in one of the following fields. it defaults to 1. If no To date is entered. Enter the port network number. or cleared-errors. errors from the earliest record in the log are displayed. Port Network. Default is active-alarms. The report can be restricted to errors from one of three lists described below: active-alarms.

Alternate Name = P/xx (P/personal CO line group #) Numerical error code that identifies the type of problem. such as TDM-BUS. First line: Month. hour. For Fiber Link-based objects. For example: l Station MO.b-PNC where x is the Fiber Link number and a. The name of the MO as it appears in the alarm and error logs. Media Gateways and Servers
. For circuit pack based MOs. The maximum entry is 999. day. and minute (and second. If the system is unable to retrieve the time of day when the error occurred. Always a-pnc for a high-reliability system with an unduplicated PNC. The alternate name depends upon the type of the object. Alternate Name = nn/n (trunk-group#/member #) l Personal CO line MO. The total number of times that the error type has occurred. Name
Error Type
Aux Data First/Last Occurrence
Seq Cnt
Err Cnt
244 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). where xx is the PN number.Maintenance SAT Commands
display errors output field descriptions
display errors output field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Port Description The physical location of the alarmed object. the location displays as x a. Only the most recent auxiliary data for each error type appears. There may be gaps in the sequence numbers within a given second because the last occurrence of an error may replace an existing entry and because sequence numbers are also assigned to software events not shown in the hardware error log. a “dummy” date will be stamped in the log so as to distinguish it from reliable data. if the high-resolution command-line option is used) of the most recent error. the location is cabinet-carrier-[slot]-[circuit]. For PN-based objects. It appears as “00/00/01:07” Sequence Count. 1 of 2
Maintenance Name Alt. hour. The meanings of these codes are explained under the name of the MO in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. Sequence numbers are assigned to the first and last occurrences of a given error within the one second period given in the time stamp. day.or b-pnc indicates one of the PNC pair. This information appears when the high-resolution option is specified on the command line. These numbers give the order in which the errors were logged. Second line: The month. Each sequence covers a period of one second. Additional numerical information about the error type. Alternate Name = nnnnn (extension) l Trunk MO. and minute (and second. the location displays as 3PN xx. if the high-resolution command-line option is used) that the error was first recorded.

The maximum entry displayed is 999.
l l l l
a ⎯ active alarm entry r ⎯ resolved alarm entry c ⎯ resolved alarm entry due to long clear option of test s ⎯ resolved alarm entry due to a software-requested (non-demand) system restart t ⎯ resolved alarm entry due to a technician-requested system restart n ⎯ not alarmed
l l
Ac
y/n The maintenance object is still under active consideration by the maintenance subsystem. An approximation of the rate at which this error occurred in the last hour. Alarm Status – A character indicating the status of this MO in the error and alarm logs. The maximum entry is 999.0 Issue 4 January 2008
245
. 2 of 2
ess
See: change system-parameters ess display system-parameters ess disable ess enable ess status ess clusters status ess port-networks
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
display errors output field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Err Rt Rt/Hr Al St Description Average hourly rate at which the error has occurred from the first occurrence to the present.

The Port Network IPSI chooses the ESS with the highest priority score in the event of a failover. For S8700 series server. Assigning an ESS to a community associates the ESS with the IPSI in the Port Networks for that community. Use statuslicense -v to see the RFA Module ID (MID) number. this is the Node Name of the A-side server For S8500 server. this is the Server ID of the B-side server For S8500 server. this is the Node Name of the only server Server ID as entered on the Set Server Identities web page during server configuration. When multiple System Preferred servers are administered. The Port Networks are assigned to Communities in the system-parameters ess form. this is the Node Name of the B-side server For S8500 server. n = Loc Prf and Loc Only may be y or n. 2 of 3
Server A Node Name Server B ID
Server B Node Name Pri Scr
Com
Sys Prf
Communication Manager Release 5. y = the System Preferred (Sys Prf) ESS has a higher value than any other Local Preferred server (independent of Community or Priority Score). simplex = S8500 server (no data needed for Server B column) duplex = S8700 series series server Server ID as entered on the Set Server Identities web page during server configuration.List of SAT Commands
change system-parameters ess field descriptions pages 1 . For S8700 series server. For S8700 series server. this is the Node Name of the only server 1 . the server with the highest administered priority value has the top priority on the IPSI Priority List. Use y to keep as much of the system network intact as possible. this is the Server ID of the A-side server For S8500 server. this is the Server ID of the only server Node Name of the media server.100 The Priority Score (plus community and preference) helps determine the position of the ESS on an IPSI’s Priority Score List. allowing one ESS to replace the Main server. Community number identifies a virtual group of one ESS and one or more Port Networks.5 2 of 3 Field Cl ID Plat Type Server A ID Description Cluster ID (MID from the RFA license file).0 Issue 4 January 2008
247
. For S8700 series server. this is blank Node Name of the media server. An IPSI uses only the Priority Score to prioritize an ESS when the server is assigned a priority score and no preferences.

district.
Loc Only
248 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. after a System Preferred ESS. If a Local Preferred server (outside its administered community) advertised to an IPSI in the same community as a Local Only server. A Local Only ESS advertises only to the IPSI within its community. Media Gateways and Servers
. etc. page 6. n = default y = the Local Only (Loc Only) preference has no priority value. the rank on the IPSI’s Priority List is determined by the priority score of each server.Maintenance SAT Commands
change system-parameters ess field descriptions pages 1 . WAN/LAN segment. A Local Only server can also use the Local Preferred setting to increase its priority on a local IPSI’s Priority List.5 3 of 3 Field Loc Prf Description y = the Local Preferred (Loc Prf) ESS has the second highest value within an IPS community. Use y to have the ESS accept the request for service only from an IPSI in the same community as the ESS. business unit. Use y to have the ESS accept the request for service from IPSIs co-located in the same geographical region. n = default 3 of 3 This is an example of change system-parameters ess. When multiple Local Preferred servers are administered within the same community. the server with the highest priority score has the higher priority on the IPSI Priority List.

field descriptions page 7 Field Description
ENTERPRISE SURVIVABLE SERVER OPTIONAL FEATURES 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. field descriptions page 6 Field Description
COMMUNITY ASSIGNMENTS FOR PORT NETWORKS PN Community 1 .65 Assign a community number to each Port Network (1 .65). page 7 field descriptions
change system-parameters ess.
This is an example of change system-parameters ess.List of SAT Commands
change system-parameters ess. page 6 field descriptions
change system-parameters ess.0 Issue 4 January 2008
249
. Match the Port Network community number and the ESS community number (also assigned on system-paramters ess) to place them in the same community.
change system-parameters ess. page 7.

scheduled = additional fields are displayed to schedule the Day and Time for all Port Networks to return to the control of the Main server after a failover occurs. field descriptions page 7 Field No Service Time Out Interval Description Number of minutes that the IPSIs wait before requesting service from the highest ESS on the priority list. An additional field. The disable ess cluster n command allows an ESS cluster to be disabled (taken out of service). A cluster may be disabled if and only if it is not controlling any IPSIs. is displayed. If a value required is greater than 120. and reboots. Note: A server cluster is either a S8500 or S8700 series. This is the time the IPSI’s connection with the main must remain up (stable) before the Auto Return takes effect.
Note:
The enabled / disabled status of ESS and Main servers is preserved across server power down. A disabled ESS will not connect to IPSIs. 2 of 2
Auto Return
display system-parameters ess
See: change system-parameters ess
disable ess
disable ess [ all | cluster n <1-999> ] Use disable ess to disable an ESS or main server from connecting to IPSIs in a port network. In the case on an unstable network.
250 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Valid values are 3 120 minutes.Maintenance SAT Commands
change system-parameters ess. yes = The Main server automatically regains control of all Port Networks after a failover occurs. 3-15 minutes no = The Main server does not automatically regain control of all Port Networks after a failover occurs. restarts. this prevents an IPSI from prematurely returning to the main. IPSI Connection up time. Media Gateways and Servers
. then scheduled should be used.

When an ESS is disabled. Execute disable ess from either a main or ESS. Be aware that if the main is not controlling IPSIs and disable ess cluster all is used. the server reboots and no SAT screen is displayed.List of SAT Commands
A disabled ESS remains registered and receives file sync translation updates. the main will also be disabled.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Use caution when using disable ess all. a TEST RESULTS screen appears If the disable ess command specifies the cluster ID of the main itself. it is generally safe to use disable ess cluster all to disable only the ESS clusters. use status ess cluster to confirm that the disable operation succeeded. An ESS may disable only its own cluster ID. Use status ess cluster to confirm that the disable operation succeeded. If the cluster involves duplicated servers. After the reboot. the server is in the ESS disabled state and will not connect to any IPSIs. When disable ess is run from the main server. any and all clusters may be disabled including the main server itself. When a valid disable ess command is run from an ESS:
l l l
the server reboots no SAT screen is displayed Once the server has rebooted. Since the main typically controls IPSIs and a cluster may not be disabled when it controls IPSIs.0 Issue 4 January 2008
251
.999) of the cluster ID for the target ESS or Main. Examples:
disable ess all disable ess cluster 9
init inads craft cust su
Communication Manager Release 5.
Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
When a valid disable ess command is run from a main server:
l l
l
Action/Object
disable ess
all cluster n
disable all ESS servers Number (1 . this process may take slightly longer while the active server informs the standby of its new ESS disabled state. it reboots.

Media Gateways and Servers
.
Error Codes
The following table describes the Error Codes that may be returned from the disable/enable ess commands:
.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following shows a typical result for disable ess all. Result 1607 1607 1607 1607 1607 1607 1607 1607 1607 1607 ABORT IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS ABORT IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS Error Code 1993
1992
In the example above. The complete operation may take several minutes since the request is first sent in a message from the main to the ESS. Name Test No.
disable ess all TEST RESULTS Port CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL 001 009 013 044 064 100 200 306 500 850 Maintenance Name ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS Alt. the standby also is updated and reboots. The disable operation for cluster 1. the ESS re-registers with the main. Use the status ess cluster command to check whether or not the disable operation succeeded for the IN PROGRESS clusters. The attempt to disable cluster ID 44 also aborted because the cluster was not registered with the main (Error Code 1992). Once the ESS receives the message. If duplicate ESS. the disable ess all command was issued from a main server. it changes to the ESS disabled state and reboots. and 10 clusters were administered. After the reboot. Otherwise. which happens to be the main. aborted because the main was in control of IPSIs (Error Code 1993). It is not until the ESS re-registers that the main receives the results of the disable request.
disable/enable ess Error Codes Error Code 1991 1992 1993 Description Requested ESS cluster is not administered Requested ESS cluster is not registered Requested ESS is controlling an IPSI PN
252 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. the disable request was sent to each respective cluster and the result is IN PROGRESS.

List of SAT Commands
disable/enable ess Error Codes Error Code 1994 2500 Description An ESS cluster may not enable/disable other clusters. Care should be taken when using enable ess all When an ESS is enabled.
Communication Manager Release 5. it reboots but does not remove its translations. Once an ESS cluster is enabled. it attempts to connect to IPSIs. the server reboots and no screen is displayed. After the reboot. If the cluster involves duplicated servers. In that case. Examples:
enable ess all enable ess cluster 9
init inads craft cust su
The following display shows the typical result for enable ess all. The exception is when the enable ess cluster command specifies the cluster ID of the main itself. Note: A server cluster is either a S8500 or S8700 series. When enable ess is run from the main server.999) of the cluster ID for the target ESS server or Main server. this process may take slightly longer while the active server informs the standby of its new ESS enabled state.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
enable ess
all cluster n
disable all ESS servers Number (1 . An ESS may enable only its own cluster ID. A TEST RESULTS screen is displayed. The TEST RESULTS screen is not displayed. Internal operation failed
enable ess
enable ess [ all | cluster n <1-999> ] The enable ess command allows an ESS cluster to be enabled (put into service).0 Issue 4 January 2008
253
.
Note:
Use enable ess from either a main or an ESS. it removes its translations and reboots. the server is in the ESS enabled state and will attempt to connect to IPSIs. When a main server is enabled. any and all cluster IDs may be enabled including the main itself.

which happens to be the main. The ESS again re-registers with the main. the enable request was sent to each respective cluster and the result is IN PROGRESS.
l l
l
Error Codes
See disable/enable ess Error Codes for a description of possible error codes returned from the enable ess command. and reboots. it changes to the ESS enabled state.
254 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. the command was issued from a main server and 10 clusters were administered. the ESS re-registers with the main. It is not until the ESS re-registration that the main receives the results of the enable request. Otherwise. After the reboot.Maintenance SAT Commands
enable ess command TEST RESULTS example
enable ess all TEST RESULTS Port CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL 001 009 013 044 064 100 200 306 500 850 Maintenance Name ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS ESS Alt. Use the status ess cluster n command to check whether or not the enable operation succeeded for the IN PROGRESS clusters. The enable operation for cluster 1. Since the ESS now has no translations. removes its translations. Name Test No. The complete operation may take several minutes while the following events occur:
l l
The request is sent from the main to the ESS. PASSED immediately because the main knows its own status. Media Gateways and Servers
. Result 1606 1606 1606 1606 1606 1606 1606 1606 1606 1606 PASS IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS PASS IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS IN PROGRESS Error Code
In the above example. Once the ESS receives the message. this triggers a translation filesync and a second reboot. The attempt to enable cluster ID 44 also PASSED because the ESS can enable its own cluster ID.

0.824.
Note:
Use status ess clusters to see the state of the Main server and all administered ESS.00.0
See status ess clusters field descriptions on page 256.00.0. This is a typical example of status ess clusters executed on an ESS (Cluster ID 60).0. with full network connectivity.0 R015x.00.00. The ESS knows only its own state.0 R015x.0.
status ess clusters Cluster ID 1 ESS CLUSTER INFORMATION Active Server ID Registered? 1 91 97 96 95 94 90 88 8 9 y y y y y y y y y y
Cluster ID 1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Enabled? y y y y n y y y n y
Translations Updated 11:02 11:02 11:02 11:02 11:02 11:02 11:02 11:02 11:02 11:02 10/25/2007 10/25/2007 10/25/2007 10/25/2007 10/25/2007 10/25/2007 10/25/2007 10/25/2007 10/25/2007 10/25/2007
Software Version R015x.0.0. It takes time for this state to be propagated to the Main server via the
Communication Manager Release 5.824.00.0.00. Under normal conditions.00.824.0.00.0 R015x.0 R015x. all ESS’s should register with the main.824.824.824.0 R015x.0 R015x.0.0 R015x.00.0 Issue 4 January 2008
255
.824.824.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
status ess cluster
none
Examples:
status ess cluster
init inads craft cust su
When status ess clusters is run on a Main server (Cluster ID 1).0 R015x.0 R015x.824.00.List of SAT Commands
status ess clusters
status ess clusters Note: A server cluster is either a S8500 or S8700 series.0.824. the Main server:
l l l
knows the identities of all of its associated ESS from the translations input to the Main knows the state of all of the ESS that have successfully registered with it shows its own state
This is a typical example of status ess clusters executed on a Main server (Cluster ID 1).

00. The cluster ID is initially obtained from the license file (where it is called the Module ID or MID). When status ess is issued on an ESS there is only one detail line since an ESS only knows its own state. 1 of 2
Cluster ID (detail line)
256 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. the cluster ID is saved in translations.999). When status ess is issued on a Main server there is one detail line for the Main server itself and a detail line for every ESS that is registered with the Main.
status ess clusters Cluster ID 60 ESS CLUSTER INFORMATION Active Server ID Registered? 90 y
Cluster ID 60
Enabled? y
Translations Updated
Software Version
11:02 10/25/2007 R015x. and for a short time (minutes) there may be a discrepancy between the state displayed by the ESS and the equivalent state displayed for the ESS on the Main server.
Note:
status ess clusters 1 of 2 Field Cluster ID (title line) Description Cluster IDentifier (1 .824. The detail lines are shown in cluster ID order. The cluster identifier of the server where status ess was run.999). Once save translation is executed. Media Gateways and Servers
. Cluster IDentifier (1 . The cluster ID of a server who’s state is known to the server where status ess was run.0.Maintenance SAT Commands
registration link. In a duplex server environment (S8700 series) both the active and the standby server have the same cluster ID.0
status ess clusters field descriptions
Note: The field definitions are the same whether the status ess command is executed on a Main server or ESS.

A save translation on the Main updates its time stamp. Note: For a Main server this time stamp may be later than those shown for ESS’s. This server will not connect to administered IPSIs l unknown = the Main does not yet know the maintenance state of the ESS.
Active Server ID
Registered
Translations Updated
Note:
Software Version
The software version of Avaya Communication Manager running on the server. This server will connect to administered IPSIs l n = disabled. 2 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. For an ESS.the ESS is not registered with the Main . but always displays its own registration as y.0 Issue 4 January 2008
257
. l y = enabled. This may be because: . l y = registered l n = not registered The Main server does not register with itself. only its server identifier is displayed. The registration state of the server.99). This is the Server ID that was entered for this server in the Set Server Identities web page during configuration. l If the server is a simplex configuration (S8500) there is only one Server IDentifier. Because in a duplex configuration only the active server registers with the Main.List of SAT Commands
status ess clusters 2 of 2 Field Enabled Description The ESS enabled / disabled state of the server. For an ESS: l The time and date of the latest translation update reported by the ESS to the Main server over the registration link. Only server IDs for registered ESS’s are displayed. A save translation [ess | all] updates the ESS translations and time stamp. ESS or Main (1 . l If the server is a duplex configurations (S8700 series) the A and B servers each have unique server identifiers. For a Main server (Cluster ID 1): l The time and date of the latest successful save translation command of any kind. this is reported to the Main server over the registration link.the ESS has not yet acknowledged a maintenance state change request from the Main via an enable ess or disable ess command The server identifier of the active server for each cluster.

only the IPSI equipped Port Networks are known to the ESS. on IP Port Network Connectivity (PNC) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) PNC systems. for brief periods. but other than the cluster identifier.
l
For ESS and Main servers. because only the Main server has access to the CSS. appear inconsistent. This server is a Main server. Each IPSI may be connected to the same.
258 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. In addition to the Main. status ess port-networks shows the status of all of the administered Port Networks. the display looks exactly the same for an ESS controlling all five Port Networks. The information displayed is very dynamic and may. or completely different servers. For Center Stage Switch (CSS) PNC systems. seven other ESSs are connected to each IPSI in every Port Network. some of the same.Maintenance SAT Commands
status ess port-networks
status ess port-networks Use status ess port-networks to see the status of all administered Port Networks on ESS and non-ESS systems.
Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
l
Action/Object
status ess port-networks
Example:
status ess port-networks
init inads craft cust su
status ess port-networks on page 259 is an example of status ess port-networks executed on a server that is controlling five Port Networks in a system.

The interface may be any circuit pack through which the Port Network may be controlled. or a TN570D Expansion Interface (CSS EI) l blank = there is no interface The type of interface whose location is shown in the Intf Loc field. they prefer to be controlled by a server in their community if possible.Maintenance SAT Commands
Status ess port-networks field descriptions 2 of 4 Field Com Num Description The community number of the Port Network (1 . The location of the Primary and Secondary IP Server Interface (if any) in this Port Network. Interface Location. l IPSI = IP Server Interface l EI = either type of Expansion Interface (TN570 or TN2305/2306) l UNKN = the interface type cannot be determined l blank = there is no interface The Port Network state from the point of view of the server on which status ess port-networks is run. Media Gateways and Servers
. a TN2305B or TN2306B ATM Expansion Interface (ATM EI). In the event of loss of connectivity with their server. only one line is displayed. each is displayed on successive lines. l up = the Port Network is up l down = the Port Network is down l unkn = the state is unknown l blank = there is no Port Network state The Port Network is up from the perspective of the server that is controlling the Port Network. such as a TN2312 IP Server Interface (IPSI). Port networks have a natural attraction for local preferred servers in the same community. l If the Port Network has duplicated IPSIs equipped. The location of the IPSI whose Packet Interface (PKTINT) is being used to deliver packet traffic to the packet bus in this Port Network. IPSI Gateway Location. Board location of the most recent interface in the Port Network with which the system tried to control the Port Network. The IPSI may be in this Port Network (this location is the same as Intf Loc). The Port Network is down from the perspective of all other servers.64) assigned to the Port Network on display system-paramters. l If the Port Network has a single IPSI. or it may be in a different Port Network. l blank = the Port Network has only an Expansion Interface from which it is controlled 2 of 4
Intf Loc
Intf Type
Port Ntwk Ste
IPSI Gtway Loc
Pri / Sec Loc
260 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

Control Cluster IDentifier. they should show the same Cluster ID l Cluster ID (1 . 3 of 4
Cntl Clus ID
l
l
l
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
Status ess port-networks field descriptions 3 of 4 Field Pri / Sec State Description The state of the Primary and Secondary IPSIs whose locations are shown in the Pri / Sec Loc field.There is no controlling server. l unknown = the IPSI state is unknown l blank = there is no IP Server Interface. (period) . This may be because: the IPSI is being reset the IPSI rejected the connection request from the server. . If there are duplicate IPSIs in this Port Network. This can occur when a new ESS is brought on-line and translated on the main server but the translations have not yet been file synchronized to every other ESS.0 Issue 4 January 2008
261
. blank . l standby = the IPSI is in standby mode (duplex Port Network connectivity). l actv-aa = the IPSI is both active and is controlling the Port Network (hosting the Arch Angel). The server on which this command is being executed cannot map from the Server ID reported by the interface to a Cluster ID known to the server in its translations. In this case the Port Network may not be controlled or is being controlled through an Expansion Interface (EI).The server where status ess port-networks is run cannot connect to the IP Server Interface in this Port Network. . .The controlling Cluster ID reported by this interface is not known to the server on which this command is executed given its own translations. perhaps because it is already connected to its limit (8) of servers. The cluster identifier of the server that was last known to be controlling this Port Network through this IPSI.999) l * (asterisk) . l active = the IPSI is active but not controlling the Port Network.There is no IPSI in this Port Network.The Cluster ID reported by this interface is not in the valid range of values.The controlling Cluster ID reported for the IPSI is not known to the server (in its translations) where status ess port-networks was run. ! (exclamation) .

(dot) . These servers are candidates to control the Port Network through the IPSI if connectivity to the current controlling server is lost. This can occur when a new ESS is brought on-line and translated on the main. The server in question should appear in the same relative position in the list of Connected Clusters for the IPSI’s pair interface.A dash indicates that the server whose Cluster ID would have been in this position has lost the socket connection to this duplicated IPSI but not the connectivity to the IPSI’s pair interface in the same port network.There is no IP Server Interface in this port network . . * (asterisk) .There is no connected Cluster ID. If a server was rejected by an IPSI. Media Gateways and Servers
.
l l
Cluster ID (1 .(dash) . 4 of 4
ethernet-options
See: get ethernet-options on page 263
262 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. but the translations have not yet been file synchronized to every other ESS.There is no IPSI in this Port Network.
l
l
l
l
blank . The list of cluster identifiers that were last known to be connected to this IP Server Interface. The Cluster ID of the controlling server should always be displayed in the list of Cluster IDs.The Cluster ID reported by the IPSI is not known to the server (in its translations) where status ess port-network was executed.The controlling Cluster ID reported by this interface is not known to the server on which the command was executed given its own translations. the information displayed here may be stale. This information will be updated periodically as each server attempts to connect or reconnect to the IPSI. The server on which this command is being executed cannot map from the Server ID reported by the interface to a Cluster ID known to the server in its translations. ! (exclamation) .Maintenance SAT Commands
Status ess port-networks field descriptions 4 of 4 Field Connected Clus(ter) IDs Description Connected Cluster IDentifiers.There is no controlling server. .999) .

If n.List of SAT Commands
Note:
Note: The Ethernet port must be administered and busied out before you can issue set ethernet-options. 10 Mbps/100 Mbps Appears when Auto Negotiation is y Half/Full Appears when Auto Negotiation is y
events
display events
display events Use display events to see a log that shows A vector event is the occurrence of something unexpected during a vector-routed call due to resource exhaustion or faulty vector
Communication Manager Release 5. the Speed and Duplex fields do not appear. n = you must manually assign the Speed and Duplex fields.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
set ethernet-options
location
The physical location of the circuit pack
set ethernet-options 1C07 SET ETHERNET OPTIONS Auto Negotiation: Speed: Duplex: y
set ethernet-options field descriptions
set ethernet-options field descriptions Field Auto Negotiation Speed Duplex Description y = the system automatically negotiates the highest possible network speed.0 Issue 4 January 2008
265
.

07-600780 (formerly 07-300477.Maintenance SAT Commands
programming. See Avaya Call Center Release 4. Media Gateways and Servers
. 555-230-714). route-step failures are typically due to the programming of an invalid extension. to see how to interpret vectoring fields on this report. Enter the desired parameters and press ENTER. EVENT CATEGORY Category: REPORT PERIOD Interval: ___ From: __/__/__:__ To: __/__/__:__ denial Page 1 of 1
SEARCH OPTIONS Vector Number: Event Type: Extension: ___ _____
266 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. For example.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
display events
init inads craft cust rcust
display events input form
Use the Event Report to request events of a certain type or from a certain time period.01 Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide. and vectoring problems due resource exhaustion or faulty vector programming. 07-300186. Use display events to diagnose and correct IP registration denials. An IP event occurs when an IP endpoint registration is denied. The following example shows the input screen for display events:
display events EVENT REPORT The following options control which events will be displayed. These types of failures are not due to faulty hardware or system software error and do not constitute incorrect feature operation.

0 Issue 4 January 2008
267
. If blank. Enter a specific event type to include in the report. If fields are blank. If blank.
Report Period Interval Start/Stop Time Vector Number Event Type Extension
See Avaya Call Center Release 4. If blank. all events for all extensions are reported. Enter the date and time of day when you want to start and end the search. events for every vector are reported. 07-600780 (formerly 07-300477. h (hour). In particular. Enter a specific vector number to include in the report. this field is ignored. 07-300186. Enter a specific event type to include in the report.
Communication Manager Release 5. the Event Data 2 field is associated with possible causes and repair strategies for the event. d (day). m (minute). or a (all). If the category field is meetme.List of SAT Commands
display events field descriptions
display events input field descriptions Field Category Description Enter the type of event to display: all contact-cl data-error denial meetme vector Select the time period for the vector events you want to see. all event types are reported.01 Call Vectoring and Expert Agent Selection (EAS) Guide. 555-230-714) to see how to interpret this report. every recorded vector event is reported. The time period for which events are reported: m (month).

0 Issue 4 January 2008
269
.
extended-user-profile
See change extended-user-profile on page 269 display extended-user-profile n on page 270
change extended-user-profile
Use change extended-user-profile to administer detailed access permissions for the vector and station forms. and the type of data in the Event 1 and Event 2 fields.
Communication Manager Release 5.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
change extended-user-profile
n
The number of the extended profile to change. the text that appears in the Event Description field. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190) lists the event type. The screen name is Extended User Profile.List of SAT Commands
display events output field descriptions 2 of 2 Field First Occur Last Occur Evnt Cnt Description The time and date when this event first occurred The time and date when this event last occurred The number of occurrences of the event between the First Occur and Last Occur times 2 of 2 See Chapter 2: Denial Events in Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. a further explanation of the condition.

display extended-user-profile n
Use display extended-user-profile to see the access permissions on an existing Extended User Profile.23. Display only.Maintenance SAT Commands
change extended-user-profile screen display
change extended-user-profile 37 Extended User Profile 37 User Profile Name: Example Profile Form R:vector M:station Allow Only 1.9. Display only.800-803. Category and type of form (SAT screen) that are administered for extended permissions. Media Gateways and Servers
.804-810.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
display extended-user-profile
n
Number of the extended user-profile to display. certain.2. all = access to all instances of the form blank = no access to the form List specific instances in a valid format as: l list separated by commas (1. or no instances of the form.
270 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Specify access to all.125-206. As many combinations can be administered as can fit in the field.302.3) l one or multiple pair separated by a dash (1000-2000).813 all
change extended-user-profile screen field descriptions
change extended-user-profile field descriptions Field User Profile Name Form Allow Only Description The name of the standard profile for which this is the extended profile. The screen name is Extended User Profile.16.

To troubleshoot broken connectivity. The default is that all connections that failed the last background maintenance ping test are tested. If a previously failed connection passes the ping test. 1417 1417 Result FAIL FAIL Error Code 2805 1007
test failed-ip-network-region field descriptions
test failed-ip-network-region field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Region Dest.
test failed-ip-network-region all TEST RESULTS Region 2 3 Dest. If network region x is specified. The following display shows a typical result for test failed-ip-network-region. also see display failed-ip-network-region on page 272 and change ip-network-region on page 326. Region 1 1 Maintenance Name NR_CONN NR_CONN Test No. then the associated minor alarm is cleared. then just failed connections from region x are tested. Region Maintenance Name Description Network region that had a connection failure to “Dest.0 Issue 4 January 2008
273
. A network region to which “Region” is connected. 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. for example:
l l l l
5:9 (Region 5 has 9 broken paths) 4:5 (Region 4 has 5 broken paths) 2:4 (Region 2 has 4 broken paths) 1:2 (Region 1 has 2 broken paths)
test failed-ip-network-region
test failed-ip-network-region [all | x] Use test failed-ip-network-region to initiate a real-time ping test for failed network-region connections. where the connection between the two regions is previously failed the ping test The name of the MO as it appears in the alarm and error logs. Region”.List of SAT Commands
The network regions are ordered from worst to best.

When PNC duplication is enabled. Before Avaya Communication Manager Release 2. the TN2312BP resides in slot A01 of a G650 media gateway. follow troubleshooting procedures in NR-CONN (Network-Region Connect).0. add fiber-link restricted the placement of an expansion interface (EI) circuit pack to slot A01 in the A carrier of a port network. each fiber link is duplicated and exists as a pair. In Communication Manager Release 2. Result Description Test Number used to run ping test Result of ping test. A fiber link is a connection carrying all circuit and packet traffic between two port networks.Maintenance SAT Commands
test failed-ip-network-region field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Test No.0. A fiber link may contain a DS1 converter complex used to provide connectivity to a remote PN. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190) ping test error code 2 of 2
Error Code
fiber-link
See: add fiber-link on page 274 busyout fiber-link on page 276 change fiber-link on page 277 display fiber-link on page 280 list fiber-link on page 280 reset fiber-link on page 283 test fiber-link on page 283
add fiber-link
add fiber-link fiber# [a-pnc | b-pnc] Use add fiber-link to create a fiber link. only the DS1 Converter complex attributes fields can be changed. If test failed.
274 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. On critical-reliability systems (duplicated PNC). Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. or a port network and a switch node. May be PASS or FAIL. Media Gateways and Servers
. two switch nodes.

List of SAT Commands
Slot B01 of a port network can be used for a duplicate fiber connection when IPSI duplication is not active. a second page appears for administering the DS1C complex attributes.0 Issue 4 January 2008
275
.
add fiber-link next FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION Fiber Link #: 6 Is one endpoint remoted via DS1 Converter Complex? no ENDPOINT-1 (A-PNC) Board Location: Board Type: ENDPOINT-1 (B-PNC) Board Location: Board Type: Fiber Translation: Type of Transceivers: ENDPOINT-2 (A-PNC) Board Location: Board Type: ENDPOINT-2 (B-PNC) Board Location: Board Type: Converter? Page 1 of 1
add fiber-link field descriptions
add fiber-link field descriptions page 1 1 of 2 Field Fiber Link # Is one endpoint remoted via DS1 Converter Complex Board Location Board Type Fiber Translation Description Identifying number of the fiber link. 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. the type of circuit pack administered at each endpoint. When IPSI duplication is required.
The physical address (cabinet-carrier-slot or gateway:module) of the circuit packs comprising the two endpoints (ENDPOINT-1 and ENDPOINT-2) of the fiber link. the duplicate IPSI must reside in slot B01 and any fiber connection there must be moved. If y. multi-mode or single-mode Use for faster remote diagnosis. y/n y indicates that a DS1C converter complex is used on this link to remotely locate a port network. ei or sni.

Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). A/B Use for faster remote diagnosis. or a port network and a switch node. 2 of 2
busyout fiber-link
busyout fiber-link fiber# [a-pnc | b-pnc] Use busyout fiber-link to put a fiber link into a maintenance busy state.Maintenance SAT Commands
add fiber-link field descriptions page 1 2 of 2 Field Converter Type of Transceivers Description y/n Use for faster remote diagnosis. including its number. busyout is destructive. and new calls will not be established over the link. endpoint.or high-reliability system (unduplicated PNC). A fiber link may contain a DS1 converter complex used to provide connectivity to a remote PN. Media Gateways and Servers
. Every call and application link carried on the busied-out fiber link will be torn down. For more information about fiber links.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
On a standard. See Common Command Output Screens on page 28 for output screen field descriptions. and other useful information. see Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. See status link on page 358 for more details on links.
276 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. For more information on busyout. see FIBER-LK (Fiber Link) on page 833 of the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. is allowed only on a fiber link on the standby PNC does not impact service requires that the standby PNC be busied first
On a critical-reliability system with duplicated PNC. busyout fiber-link:
l l l
Use list fiber-link to see a list of every fiber link administered on the system. two switch nodes. A fiber link is a connection carrying all circuit and packet traffic between two port networks.

to distinguish between the two fibers of a duplicated fiber pair. In a system with duplicated PNC. Translation data changes after the ENTER key is pressed. Examples: Critical-Reliability (duplicated PNC): busyout fiber-link 01 b-pnc busyout fiber-link 03 (defaults to a-pnc)
a-pnc
For more information. each fiber link is duplicated and exists as a pair. Press CANCEL any time before pressing ENTER to return to the command line without changing any translation data. only the DS1 Converter complex attributes fields can be changed. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. Example: change fiber-link 21
To change the endpoint board locations.0 Issue 4 January 2008
277
.
Communication Manager Release 5. with a fiber link pair. remove a fiber and add it again for either a:
l l
High-reliability system. Common Command Output Screens on page 28. For an unduplicated PNC. to distinguish between the two fibers of a duplicated pair. this represents a fiber link pair. on a duplicated PNC. Use on a system with duplicated PNC. a-pnc is the only valid qualifier.List of SAT Commands
Action/Object
Qualifier
Qualifier Description
Login
Default
busyout fiber-link
fiber # a-pnc b-pnc
The administered number assigned to the fiber link. On critical-reliability systems (duplicated PNC). see Common Input Parameters on page 25. an unduplicated PNC Critical-reliability system with a fully operational duplicated PNC
See status link on page 358 for more details on links.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
change fiber-link
fiber#
The administered number associated with a fiber link or.
change fiber-link
change fiber-link fiber# Use change fiber-link to change the translation data associated with an existing fiber link. Use on a system with duplicated PNC. When PNC duplication is enabled.

See Table 32: DS1 Line Equalization Settings on page 280. page 2
The following fields appear when a DS1 converter complex is administered on the fiber link.0 Issue 4 January 2008
279
.List of SAT Commands
change fiber-link field descriptions. B. C. Zero Code Suppression (ZCS) line coding is in place following an initialization until changed by administration. validation is performed to ensure that the board has been administered and is of the correct type (DS1 CONV). Page 3 fields change when their counterpoints on page 2 are changed. Facility A is required for the DS1 CONV complex. Either line coding option may be used on the DS1 Interface that carries the packet time slots. esf/d4 specifies the data framing format used on the facility. Same as for ENDPOINT-2 of the DS1 CONV complex. change-fiber link field descriptions page 2 Field Board Location Description Under DS1C-1.
Framing Mode
Communication Manager Release 5. When the location is entered. The circuit pack is administered by change circuit-packs. the fields are repeated as display-only on page 3 for the B-PNC. the physical location of the converter board connected to ENDPOINT-1. Use page 2 for the A-PNC. an automatic selection process is executed until the DS1 Interface is brought into frame. Attributes of the four DS1 facilities (A. If the PNC is duplicated. or until an Options CCMS message is received by the framing options master. The line equalization setting defaults to the median value of 3. The framing option on the framing option slave converter board can change to track the framing option master’s option. Once options are set by administration. DS1 CONV complex attributes are administered here. y/n Specifies whether the indicated facility has been provided and installed. D) that can be connected to the DS1 CONV. This setting remains in effect until changed by administration. Incorrect equalizer settings may cause a higher error rate on the DS1 facility. or sent new options. they remain fixed on the framing option master until the board is again initialized.
DS1 Converter Facilities Facility Installed
DS1 CONV-2 Line Compensation Zero Code Suppression
zcs/b8zs specifies the line coding format for each facility. reset. There are 2 line coding options supported by the DS1 Interfaces to meet the density requirements in the data stream. When esf.

This setting remains in effect until changed by administration. The output for display fiber-link is the same as that for change fiber-link.Maintenance SAT Commands
The line equalization setting defaults to the median value of 3. See Common Input Parameters on page 25. Incorrect equalizer settings may cause a higher error rate on the DS1 facility.
See status link on page 358 for more details on links. Table 32: DS1 Line Equalization Settings Equalizer Setting 1 2 3 4 5 Distance to DSX-1 Interface (feet) 22 AWG ABAM and 24 AWG PDS 1 to 133 133 to 266 266 to 399 399 to 533 533 to 655 26 AWG PDS 0 to 90 90 to 180 180 to 270 270 to 360 360 to 450
display fiber-link
display fiber-link fiber# [schedule] Use display fiber-link to see the translation data associated with an existing fiber link. Media Gateways and Servers
. or fiber link pair in a duplicated PNCs.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
display fiber-link
fiber# schedule
The administered number associated with a fiber link.
list fiber-link
list fiber-link [schedule]
280 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

list fiber-link field descriptions
list fiber-link field descriptions 1 of 2 Field FIBER LINK # TYPE A-PNC LOC Description The administered number used to identify the fiber link (1 to 27).List of SAT Commands
Use list fiber-link to list every fiber link in the system. and to see a summary of data entered on the fiber link screen (add. or remove fiber-link).
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
list fiber-link
schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25. change. The types of circuit packs that constitute endpoint 1 and endpoint 2 of the fiber link (ei or sni).
See status link on page 358 for more details on links. The physical locations (cabinet-carrier-slot number) of the circuit packs that constitute the endpoints.0 Issue 4 January 2008
281
. 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. display. The following display shows a typical result for list fiber-link.

2 of 2
DS1 CONV TYPE
Fiber mismatch
Even though a DS1-fed EPN is in service with no complaints. all timeslots are mapped correctly. the physical location (cabinet-carrier-slot number) of the circuit packs that constitute the endpoints of the link in the B-PNC. The end result is that the system link is up.
282 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. In a system with duplicated PNC. This indicates that the two DS1 spans are crossed. This is only a problem when there are DS1 problems. the system link comes up on either A or B facility.ENDPOINT 2 -------TYPE A-PNC DS1 B-PNC DS1 LOC CONV LOC CONV LOC LOC sni 27E02 ei 28A01 28A02 B ei 29A01 29A02 B ei 30A01 30A02 B ei 31A01 31A02 A ei 32A01 32A02 A Page 2
DS1 CONV TYPE TN1654 TN1654 TN1654 TN1654 TN1654
This “MISMATCH” indicates that the two ends of the DS1 fiber do not agree which DS1 facility is carrying the Primary Facility. The EPN DS1C board searches both spans for the control channel. the A-facility in PPN is connected to the B-facility in the EPN. that is. To fix this problem flip the A and B spans at one end.ENDPOINT 1 -------LINK# TYPE A-PNC DS1 B-PNC DS1 LOC CONV LOC CONV LOC LOC 27 ei 27A01 28 sni 27E03 27E01 Primary Facility:B 29 sni 27E20 27E21 Primary Facility:B 30 sni 27E19 27A02 Primary Facility:B 31 sni 27E04 27A18 Primary Facility:A 32 sni 01E05 01D10 Primary Facility:B MISMATCH -------. and there are no end-user problems. either PPN or EPN. This then becomes fiber group 1 and the other span is fiber group 2. or control channels of the fiber. Whether or not an endpoint of the link is remotely located by means of a DS1C Converter complex.Maintenance SAT Commands
list fiber-link field descriptions 2 of 2 Field DS1 CONV LOC B-PNC LOC Description Location of the DS1 Converter. Media Gateways and Servers
. and when it finds it. The following example shows this condition:
list fiber-link FIBER LINK ADMINISTRATION FIBER -------. list fiber-link can report a “MISMATCH” for the Primary Facility.

this distinguishes between the two fibers in a duplicated pair. or a combination thereof. A fiber link must be busied out before being reset. On a high-reliability system (unduplicated PNC) this is always a-pnc and need not be specified. Use list fiber-link to see a list of fiber links and their locations. the fiber must be on the standby PNC and the standby PNC must first be busied out. a series of hardware diagnostic tests are performed on the specified fiber link. A fiber link is a connection between port networks (PNs). switch nodes (SNs). The long test sequence includes destructive tests.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default Feature Interaction
reset fiber-link
fiber#
The administered number of the fiber link (1-44). or between a PN and the Center Stage Switch (CSS). If the fiber link is administered.
reset fiber-link
a-pnc b-pnc
test fiber-link
Use test fiber-link to validate that the optical fiber connection between switch node interfaces (SNI) and expansion interfaces (EI).
Use reset fiber-link to reset the Expansion Interface and/or Switch Node Interface circuit packs that are endpoints of a specified fiber link. with each end terminated on either an Expansion Interface (EI) or a Switch Node Interface (SNI). Every destructive test aborts unless the fiber link is first busied out.List of SAT Commands
reset fiber-link
reset fiber-link fiber# [a-pnc | b-pnc]
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
The reset fiber-link command is destructive on a high-reliability system (unduplicated PNC).
Communication Manager Release 5. and may cause an entire port network to be removed from service. The test results along with any possible error codes are displayed on the MT. are administered. To busyout a fiber on critical-reliability systems. The short test sequence is non-destructive and can be performed regardless of whether the fiber link is busied out. On a critical-reliability system (duplicated PNC). This connection is comprised of a bi-directional optical fiber connection (optionally extended via a DS1 Converter complex). this number designates a fiber link pair. See busyout fiber-link. the following qualifier specifies which fiber in the pair is to be reset For a critical-reliability system (duplicated PNC).0 Issue 4 January 2008
283
. Fiber links provide the medium for circuit and packet connections between PNs. dropping the link in the process. See status link on page 358 for more details on links.

284 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. See status link on page 358 for more details on links. clear firmware-counters clears the firmware counters of specified SNI. For details. Examples: Critical-reliability system: test fiber-link 1 a-pnc schedule test fiber-link 03 b-pnc sh r 3
The following display shows a typical result with test fiber-link 1 b-pnc. 777 759 989 237 238 Result Error Code
PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS
Port
On critical-reliability systems (duplicated PNC) there are two fibers associated with every fiber link number.
test fiber-link 1 b-pnc TEST RESULTS Port 1 1 1 1 1 B-PNC B-PNC B-PNC B-PNC B-PNC Maintenance Name FIBER-LK FIBER-LK FIBER-LK FIBER-LK FIBER-LK Alt.
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
test fiberlink
link# a-pnc b-pnc short long repeat repeat# clear schedule
The number associated with a fiber link or fiber link pair (on duplicated PNCs). Name Test No. Media Gateways and Servers
. every call over that fiber is dropped. or of an the entire PNC (A or B). List fiber-link displays the location of endpoints for each fiber link On critical-reliability systems (duplicated PNC) this identifier is used to distinguish between the two fibers of a duplicated fiber pair. When a fiber is busied out. see Common Input Parameters on page 25. SNC.Maintenance SAT Commands
The long sequence includes destructive tests and requires that the fiber link be busied out first. ATM-EI or DS1C circuit packs. A-PNC and B-PNC distinguish one from the other.

Test clear commands do not clear alarms on SNI. because firmware is cleared and appears as if no problems were ever encountered. and DS1C circuit packs. SNC.
firmware download
See: change firmware download on page 288 disable firmware download on page 291 display firmware download on page 291 status firmware download on page 293 test firmware download on page 295
change firmware download
change firmware download schedule-number Use change firmware download schedule-number to schedule a C-LAN-distributed download or a self-download firmware download. To do so. Every circuit pack in the standby PNC can be cleared at once by specifying a-pnc or b-pnc.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use clear firmware-counter to quickly clear lingering alarms after a hardware problem has been fixed. Media Gateways and Servers
.
Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
Action/Object
clear firmware-counters
location a-pnc b-pnc
The specified location must be occupied by an SNI. immediately or at a later date and time.
!
WARNING:
WARNING: Clear firmware-counters can mask actual hardware problems. see Common Command Output Screens on page 28.
For more information. schedule-number is a value between 1 and 4. SNC. the standby PNC must first be busied out.
288 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.
init inads craft cust rcust
!
WARNING:
WARNING: Clear firmware-counters can mask actual hardware problems because firmware is cleared and appears as if no problems were ever encountered. or DS1C circuit pack.

If y and every board was successfully downloaded. This field is always blank for a change firmware download. and hh:mm. AP. For “self-downloads”. the image file is removed. 2 digits for month. including the file extension.Maintenance SAT Commands
change firmware-download field descriptions
change firmware-download field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Source Board Location Description The board location where the firmware image resides. the firmware vintage of the entered image file. The value for this field can be self (download of multiple boards) or auto (Communication Manager chooses the correct C-LAN board to do the download). GP. For “remote downloads”. The firmware image file name. 1 of 2
Schedule Download Remove Image File After Successful Download Start Date/ Time
290 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Display-only. Start Date/Time and Stop Date/Time appear. this location is the same as the target board location. For example. If y. to download. The date and time to begin the firmware download (mm/dd/yyyy. and with status firmware download after a download is complete. The IP address of the File Server. y/n Specify whether to automatically remove the firmware image file on the source board after the download is successful for the specified target boards. Password for the file server. If n the download begins when the screen is submitted. y/n Specify whether to run the download immediately or at some future time. 2 digits for hour. this location is a C-LAN board.
File Server File Retrieval Protocol Login Password Firmware Image File Name Target Board Code Suffix Firmware Vintage
The TN-code of the target board to be downloaded. Display-only field. and 2 digits for minutes) This field appears when Schedule Download field is y. Media Gateways and Servers
. such as TN799. Login for the file server. This field contains a value with display firmware download while a download is in progress. The suffix of the target board to be downloaded. and the file system on the source board is disabled. and 4 digits for year. DP. 2 digits for day.

disable firmware download on page 291. but the remaining boards are not downloaded. If a target board is currently downloading. the download continues until completion. If a scheduled download has not yet occurred or is currently in progress. Use change firmware download on page 288 to schedule a download. and 2 digits for the minutes). It indicates the date and time to end the firmware download to end.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
disable firmware download
n
schedule number
display firmware download
display firmware download schedule Use display firmware download to see the status of the specified download schedule. The field is formatted: mm/dd/yyyy (2 digits for the month. Run status firmware download on page 293 to determine how far along the current download is. If this field is blank. See status firmware download on page 293. use display firmware download to view the settings for the scheduled downloads.4). 2 of 2
Target Location
disable firmware download
disable firmware download schedule-number Use disable firmware download to stop the firmware download for a specified schedule (1 . the target location is the same as the source location. the fields are blank. 2 digits for the day. These fields contain the target board locations of the boards that will receive the download file image.
Communication Manager Release 5. and the MO FW-STDL (Firmware Station Download) on page 850 in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. If all downloads have finished. For a self-download. the system finishes downloading to the circuit pack in progress and then aborts the remainder of the download schedule. and test ipserver-interface on page 347. If the scheduled stop time is reached before the new firmware image file has been downloaded to every circuit pack.0 Issue 4 January 2008
291
. and hh:mm (2 digits for the hour. the download is first completed for the current board. and 4 digits for the year). Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190) for more information.List of SAT Commands
change firmware-download field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Stop Date/ Time Description Appears when the Schedule Download field is y.

The following status flags are shown for each target board: P C F S A The download to the board is pending. or was scheduled. Use last to see the download schedule of the last completed download for a particular schedule. status firmware download shows a blank download schedule.List of SAT Commands
status firmware download
status firmware download [ schedule# | last schedule# ] Use status firmware download to see the download status for each board that is scheduled. Look into the error logs for firmware download for more information about the failure.0 Issue 4 January 2008
293
. The download to the board was completed successfully. The board was skipped (the board requires manual intervention to busy-out). The download to the board failed. If there is no active download schedule and there was no previous schedule for the last qualifier to invoke. to receive new downloaded firmware as requested by change firmware download.
Action/Object
Qualifier
Qualifier Description
Login
Default
status firmware download
last
last completed or aborted download schedule
Communication Manager Release 5. The download to the board was aborted.

If a download is in progress or has already completed.
firmware station-download
See: change firmware station-download on page 296 disable firmware station-download on page 296 display firmware station-download on page 297 status firmware station-download on page 297 test firmware station-download on page 300
Communication Manager Release 5. then this test resolves the errors and clears the alarms. If there are FW-DWNLD errors or alarms. then this command verifies the Firmware Download screen entries. 2. If there is a download scheduled. See Firmware Download Test (#1413) on page 2014 in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. Open a browser window on your computer and go to http://www. but before the download begins. use status firmware download to view progress and status. It is highly recommended that you execute test firmware download after scheduling a download with change firmware download.0 Issue 4 January 2008
295
. Select Support. The test is blocked if a download is in progress.avaya.com/. For the complete download procedure: 1. 3. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190) for more information about the test that is run and the troubleshooting procedures to use if the test does not pass.List of SAT Commands
test firmware download
test firmware download n Run test firmware download when there is a download scheduled or there are errors or alarms against the FW-DWNLD maintenance object from a previous download. Select Software and Firmware Downloads.

You must schedule a new download for any Aborted terminals. If the schedule has just started and no downloads are listed. Media Gateways and Servers
. The download has been suspended due to the system’s occupancy level. Downloading will resume at the scheduled Start Date/Time listed on the screen. Check the start time to see when it is scheduled to start. The schedule resumes when the occupancy level drops to a safe level. the system may be waiting for a FAC requested or terminal requested download to complete before it begins. Actively downloading terminals should be listed with a status of ACTV. Download was stopped at the Stop Date/Time but not all of the terminals have been attempted. The download was stopped because there was no firmware image present in memory. The scheduled download has completed either due to all terminals in the range of extensions having completed or due to the stop timer. damaged or lost. While the scheduled download was running. At least two terminals rejected the firmware as invalid. the Schedule state remains Active until all currently active terminal downloads have completed. This could happen if the firmware image was bad. two or more consecutive terminals failed to respond to the download process. Download is currently active. See Table 34: Reason Codes for status firmware station-download command on page 299. Download was aborted for the entire range of terminals. the download was aborted to avoid problems with any further terminals. An Active schedule was disabled with the disable firmware station-download command. The download was stopped due to a system error. After an active schedule is disabled. As a result.Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 33: Schedule States of status firmware station-download command
State Schedule Done? Description
Idle Pending Active
No No No
No downloads Pending or Active and there are no unresolved errors/ alarms for the last download Download has been scheduled but not yet started. Check the Reason Codes of the failed terminals in the list to find the reason why the download failed.
Resumepending Aborted Failed
No
Yes Yes
Completed Disabled
Yes Yes
No Image Restart Sys Fail Sys Occ
Yes Yes Yes No
Dnld Timeout
Yes
298 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. The download was stopped due to a system restart.

Download to this terminal was aborted. The terminal could not be downloaded due to a discrepancy relating to the maximum number of downloads allowed.0 Issue 4 January 2008
299
. The system restarted during an active download. Terminal was in use at the time that it was to be downloaded. The terminal rejected the firmware because the firmware image failed the image validity test. The terminal was busied out by craft and could not be downloaded. Download to the terminal timed out due to an internal error in the station firmware download process. however the actual terminal type of the hardware is not valid for this download schedule. The download schedule had to be stopped. The terminal that was added to the download list at the scheduled start time no longer exists. Schedule a new download with adequate time for the downloads to complete. The terminal did not respond to the download request. The terminal being downloaded could not write its flash memory. All terminals that were actively downloading when the reset occurred are marked with a status of FAIL with this reason code. The terminal rejected the firmware because the firmware image failed the checksum test.List of SAT Commands
Table 34: Reason Codes for status firmware station-download command 1 of 2
Reason Code Status Description
1
ABORT
The firmware image that was noted in the change firmware station-download form has disappeared. The terminal could not be downloaded because the schedule aborted for an unknown reason. The firmware image may not be the right image for the hardware being downloaded to. As a result. This can occur when a station is removed during an active download schedule. all terminals that were not downloaded are marked with a status of ABORT with this reason code. 1 of 2
2 3
ABORT ABORT
4 5 6
ABORT ABORT ABORT
18 32 1000 1012 3841
ABORT ABORT ABORT ABORT ABORT or FAIL FAIL FAIL
128 129
130 131
FAIL FAIL
Communication Manager Release 5. Download to this terminal was aborted. or select the continue daily option to allow the schedule to resume the following day. An internal error occurred while preparing to download to this station. The translated terminal type is valid. The terminal was not downloaded before the scheduled stop time occurred.

This capability is not available if another hardware group test has been started. Press CANCEL to cancel a hardware group test executing in the foreground. Halt a hardware group test (test hardware-group) temporarily or permanently with cancel hardware-group for a background test. periodic background maintenance. and for security reasons the MT running the hardware group test is logged off. If test hardware-group running in the foreground is successfully canceled with cancel hardware-group from another terminal. Use resume hardware-group to restart the canceled hardware-group test after logging back on. Use status hardware-group to see the status of a hardware group test.0 Issue 4 January 2008
301
. Use resume hardware-group. the internally generated port translations for ports that are otherwise untranslated are removed. all activity related to scheduled background maintenance. If resume hardware-group is then entered. All activity related to scheduled background maintenance.List of SAT Commands
Use cancel hardware-group to temporarily or permanently abort the execution of test hardware-group. the following message appears on the terminal where the hardware group command was executing: Hardware-group command aborted with cancel. or start another test with test hardware-group. the internally generated port translations for previously untranslated ports are removed.
resume hardware-group
resume hardware-group Use resume hardware-group to restart a hardware group test at the point where it was canceled. When a hardware group test is executing in the foreground with the continuously option and CANCEL is pressed or cancel hardware-group is entered. to resume the same test. only customer-administered ports will subsequently be tested. or by pressing CANCEL for a foreground test. When test hardware-group all-ports is canceled. and data audits will restart if test hardware-group is canceled. Resume does not reinstate the port translations that were removed by the cancel. and data audits is suspended for the duration of the execution of test hardware-group. command entered from another terminal. periodic background maintenance. If resume hardware-group is
Communication Manager Release 5. the hardware group test is canceled. The status of a canceled test hardware-group appears as canceled on the status hardware-group screen.
All-Ports Option
When test hardware-group all-ports is canceled.
Scheduled and Periodic Maintenance
When test hardware-group is entered.

Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
status hardware-group
init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse
302 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. a success message appears.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
resume hardware-group
init inads
When a test that was executing in the background is resumed. test results appear. Media Gateways and Servers
. When a test that was executing in the foreground is resumed. only customer-administered ports are tested. and the state (active/canceled/complete) of the hardware group test.Maintenance SAT Commands
then entered.
status hardware-group
status hardware-group Use status hardware-group to see summary information about the active or last hardware group tests. The information includes the number and percentage of maintenance objects tested. the specific hardware group test command (see test ipserver-interface on page 347) initiated. the time elapsed since initiating the hardware group test. the percentage of tests passed/failed/aborted. Resume does not reinstate the port translations that were removed by cancellation of test hardware-group all-ports.

If a test was canceled and then restarted this time excludes the cancel period. MM is minutes. The time appears as HH:MM:SS where HH is hours.List of SAT Commands
The following display shows the output of status hardware-group. canceled: testing has been canceled. The total number of MOs in the group that was specified in test hardware-group. If hardware-group has finished it indicates the length of time it took to complete the command. The number of MOs in the specified group (see test ipserver-interface on page 347) that have had been tested by current hardware-group. 1 of 2
Total Number of MOs to be Tested Percent Complete Elapsed Test Time
Communication Manager Release 5. and SS is seconds.
status hardware-group HARDWARE GROUP STATUS Hardware Group Command State: Number of MOs Tested: Total Number of MOs to be Tested: Percent Complete: Elapsed Test Time (hr:min:sec): Repetition Number: Percentage of Tests Passed: Percentage of Tests Failed: Percentage of Tests Aborted: active 11070 12300 90% 4:15:30 1 82% 11% 7% page 1 of 1
ENTERED HARDWARE GROUP Command Command: Test sequence: Test repetition: Output Options: Hardware Options: test hardware-group system short repeat 3 failures all-ports
status hardware-group field descriptions
status hardware-group field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Hardware Group Command State Number of MOs Tested Description The state of a hardware-group command: active: testing is in progress. complete the command has completed and there is no testing going on. The duration of the hardware-group test. A ratio of the number of MOs completed and the total number of MOs to test in the command.0 Issue 4 January 2008
303
. This includes every MO that either was actually tested or was aborted due to resource contention.

The tests executed vary depending on the options chosen and types of hardware in the group. Media Gateways and Servers
. A hardware-group command running in the foreground can be aborted by pressing CANCEL or by entering cancel hardware-group at another terminal. The percentage of tests that were aborted.
304 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Hardware group tests started with the all-ports option can be resumed. but they will not always test every port that originally would have been tested. 2 of 2
test hardware-group
test hardware-group [system | carrier UUC | cabinet UU | port-network PN# | pnc a-pnc | b-pnc | board location] [schedule] Use test hardware-group to run a series of demand maintenance tests on all hardware in a specified group: a carrier. Displays the selections that were chosen on the input screen: auto-page. or failures. Use cancel for a test running in the background. PNC (A or B). circuit pack or the entire system. The hardware-group action/object and qualifiers that were entered. background. port network. cabinet. Displays the selections that were chosen on the input screen (all-ports). short/long.Maintenance SAT Commands
status hardware-group field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Repetition Number Percentage of Tests Passed Percentage of Tests Failed Percentage of Tests Aborted Command Test sequence Test repetition Output options Hardware options Description The number of iterations that have been completed corresponding to the ‘repeat’ or the ‘continuously’ option. so test results for several maintenance objects may be intermixed. The percentage of tests that passed. You can restart a canceled hardware-group test at the point it left off by entering resume hardware-group. Some tests are run concurrently to speed execution. The percentage of tests that failed. Displays either continuously or the keyword repeat along with the repeat value entered.

please try later If an attempt is made to add an unadministered trunk port to a trunk group at the same time as it is being tested because of test hardware-group with the all-ports option. including every circuit pack and port. the request will fail. The status tti command may be used to determine the state of the TTI background task.List of SAT Commands
Action/ Object
Qualifier
Qualifier Description
Login
Feature Interaction
test hardware -group
system carrier UUC cabinet UU port-network PN# pnc a-pnc b-pnc board location schedule
Every maintenance object included in the specified hardware group is tested. active alarms on line ports may be cleared by this task. See Common Input Parameters on page 25. All other hardware will be tested normally. See test environment on page 238. If add station is entered for an untranslated port at the same time as it is being tested by test hardware-group with the all-ports option. some unadministered ports may not be tested. some unadministered ports may not be tested. When a cabinet or larger entity is specified. If test hardware-group is issued with the all-ports option while the TTI background task is active. environmental MOs are tested.0 Issue 4 January 2008
305
. the request to add station will fail and the following message appears: Object in use. please try later If test hardware-group is issued with the all-ports option when a translation save operation is active. In addition. and the following message appears: Object in use. Examples: test hardware-group test hardware-group test hardware-group test hardware-group
see test hardware-group feature interactions on page 305
system port-network 11 pnc a-pnc board 01c07
test hardware-group feature interactions
test hardware-group feature interactions 1 of 2 Test hardware-group TTI Only one test hardware-group command can be active at any given time. 1 of 2
Add Station
Trunk Administration
Save Translation
Communication Manager Release 5.

periodic background maintenance. The performance of test hardware-group is affected by call processing traffic. When test hardware-group is canceled or when test hardware-group completes. and data audits background maintenance activity will be restarted where it left off. choice of the short or long option. and data audits is suspended for the duration of the execution of test hardware-group. all suspended periodic. regardless of whether the ports are translated or not. When test hardware-group is entered. administration activity. the hardware goes through the standard escalation strategy.
test hardware-group system TEST HARDWARE-GROUP SELECTIONS Select the desired options for the specified test. 2 of 2 The following is a typical input form for test hardware-group. Test sequence: short Test repetition: repeat_____ Output OPTIONS: Auto-page? n Background? n Failures? n Page 1 of 1
System Interaction
Scheduled and Periodic Maintenance
count: 1
HARDWARE OPTIONS: All-ports? n
306 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. This alarming strategy is the same. Media Gateways and Servers
. all activity related to scheduled background maintenance. scheduled. whether the all-ports option was chosen and other demand maintenance activity.Maintenance SAT Commands
test hardware-group feature interactions 2 of 2 Hardware Alarms When a hardware error is detected by test hardware-group. Alarms will be raised on hardware that manifest hard errors.

y/n Enter y to display a new screen when the screen fills up with results. for the following circuit packs. Error results are logged in the error log but not displayed on the screen. percent completed. Enter continuously to cause the test sequence repeat until the command is canceled. The message line shows a running count of the number of maintenance objects already tested. Enter y to see failure results only on the screen. Enter y to test all customer-translated line and trunk ports and. This option is incompatible with the auto-page and “continuously” options. long is more comprehensive and is not destructive. specify the number of repetitions. Enter y to run the tests in the background and free up the terminal for other tasks.List of SAT Commands
test hardware-group field descriptions
test hardware-group field descriptions Field Test sequence Test Repetition Description short / long. testing stops until you press PAGE or CANCEL. test results appear in the normal format. untranslated ports as well:
count Auto-page
Background
Failures All-ports
When test hardware-group is run in the foreground. This option is incompatible with the background option. the total number included in the tests.
Communication Manager Release 5. When Test repetition is set to repeat. and repetition count. If n. Enter repeat to enter a number of times that the entire test sequence is to be repeated. once the screen fills with results.0 Issue 4 January 2008
307
.

Percentage of CPU time currently dedicated to call processing. rounded to the nearest whole number Call processing has priority over system management and will draw occupancy from the SM or IDLE categories.248 Gateway status
9:51 THU AUG 16 2007
status health field descriptions
status health field descriptions 1 of 3 Field St Sm Description Percentage of CPU time currently dedicated to high priority items such as the operating system. Percentage of CPU time currently idle and available for use. rounded to the nearest whole number If a large amount of periodic or scheduled maintenance testing is being performed. Media Gateways and Servers
.
status health OCC: St: 4% Sm: 4% ALARMS:Maj: 0 Min: 9 Logins:3 BUSYOUT:Trk: 0 Cab 1 2 3 4 5 EmTr Maj Min Wrn auto0| 1| 41 auto0| 1| 5 auto0| 0| 5 auto0| 0| 0 auto0| 0| 0 PNC up up/up up/up up/up up/up Cab EmTr Cp: Wrn: Stn: 22% Idl: 70% 61 0 Oth: 0
Maj Min Wrn PNC
Use 'Status Media-Gateway' for H. rounded to the nearest whole number Number of major alarms logged Number of minor alarms logged Number of warning alarms logged Number of current users Number of maintenance busied-out trunks 1 of 3
Cp
Idl Maj Min Wrn Logins Trk
310 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. rounded to the nearest whole number Percentage of CPU time currently dedicated to system management or periodic and scheduled maintenance.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following example shows the output for status health. this number can be high without affecting service.

NoEqp means that the cabinet has circuit packs that do not support Emergency Transfer. n. This setting should only be in effect during an emergency. excluding trunks and stations Cabinet number Use list cabinet to relate cabinet numbers to port network numbers.List of SAT Commands
status health field descriptions 2 of 3 Field Stn Oth Cab EmTr Description Number of maintenance busied-out stations Number of busied-out maintenance objects. See EMG-XFER (Emergency Transfer) on page 778 in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. The following states are available: auto.0 Issue 4 January 2008
311
.Emergency Transfer is under system control and is not currently activated (normal operating state). The Expansion Archangel Link (EAL) may be down. off Emergency Transfer is manually prevented from occurring. The setting of the switch in this PN is not available to the switch. This setting should only be in effect when a technician is on site. Emergency Transfer shows the current setting of the switches on the PN’s Maintenance circuit packs that control Emergency Transfer.a. on Emergency Transfer has been manually activated. auto+ Emergency Transfer is under system control and is in effect. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). 2 of 3
Communication Manager Release 5.

the second in B. Min.. Use list cabinet to see the carriers and port networks in each cabinet in the system. The control is up. and the third in D and E.g. Wrn PNC Description Number of major. and the 2nd up in D and E. Carriers A. The first is in carrier A. dn Both EAL and INL (if applicable) are not available. aa Points to a problem with the archangel. Media Gateways and Servers
. if applicable) are available. and the fourth in D and E. the third in C. minor or warning alarms associated with the cabinet An asterisk indicates that the number exceeds 99 or 999.Maintenance SAT Commands
status health field descriptions 3 of 3 Field Maj. Current Port Network Connectivity (PNC) status for each of the port networks in the cabinet When multiple port networks exist within a cabinet. the second in B and C. the 4th in D. up/up). fe (Far End) The INL is available but the EAL is not available. up/up: 2 port networks share a cabinet. the 2nd in B. B. and C are listed first and separated from Carriers D and E by a slash (e. but the archangel is not functioning and is not available. ne (Near End) The EAL is available but the INL is not available. the 3rd in C. up/up/up/up/up: 5 (the maximum allowed) port networks share a cabinet. up/up/up: 3 port networks share a cabinet. and C carriers. up Both the Expansion Archangel Link (EAL) and the Indirect Neighbor Link (INL. and the 5th in E. 3 of 3
history
list history
list history [date] [time] [login x] [action x] [object x] [qualifer x] [schedule]
312 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. B. The first is in A. The first is in carrier A. up/up/up/up: 4 port networks share a cabinet. The first up is associated with the PN contained in A.

there could be other users concurrently issuing data commands and altering the contents of the transaction log. If this occurs. Therefore.0 Issue 4 January 2008
313
. the final entries of the report show the data commands issued by the other users since the recent change history report was originally requested. Also.
init inads craft cust browse rms
See list history feature interactions on page 313
list history feature interactions
The translation log is written to memory as translation data when save translation is executed. 2007 Date 10/25 10/25 10/25 10/25 10/25 10/25 10/25 10/25 10/25 10/25 10/25 10/25 Time Port 13:46 13:35 13:29 13:27 13:24 13:19 13:17 11:21 11:20 11:20 10:13 9:35 MAINT MAINT S01505 S01506 S01507 MAINT MAINT MAINT MAINT MAINT MAINT Login init init maint ip-u ip-u ip-u init init init init init init Actn Object save logn save cha cha cha logn logf logn logf logn save translation translation sta sta sta Qualifier Page 1
21466 21467 21468
translation
Communication Manager Release 5. using set time to alter the system clock could make it look as if the recent change history report is not in true LIFO order.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default Feature Interaction
list history
date time login action object qualifier schedule
MM or MM/DD HH or HH:MM login-id action performed object acted on extension. if the user pages the entire way through the report. the oldest entries in the transaction log (maximum 250 commands) may have been overwritten by data commands issued by these other users. See Common Input Parameters on page 25. This includes the history of ACTR moves. This time stamp is noted when translation is loaded from memory and included in every recent change history report.List of SAT Commands
list history with no options generates a log of the most recently completed data-affecting administration and maintenance commands. When a user requests a recent change history report. etc. which can be used to track moves and help reduce fraud. The translation data is time stamped when saved.
list history HISTORY Date of Loaded Translation: 1:02am FRI OCT 19.

One or more qualifiers describing the characteristics of the Action/Object pair. Access the Communication Manager web interface log pages through Select Diagnostics > System Logs.
l
Login Actn
User login The action part of the command. see Maintenance Procedures for Avaya Communication Manager. Where the object is multiple words in length.
l
TTI. This field is truncated after 4 characters to allow enough space for objects and qualifiers and to uniquely identify each action. every succeeding word is treated as a qualifier. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300432) (formerly 03-300192). Media Gateways and Servers
. The time list history was issued (hh:mm). The following types of activities are logged:
314 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. This field is truncated after 31 characters to keep information for a command on a single line. Syslog supports storing events in different files or ’logs’ depending on the nature of the event.
Object
Qualifier
Communication Manager events are also logged in the Linux syslog. only the first word appears in the object field. PSA. IP station registrations and unregistrations are recorded when the Record IP Registrations in History Log field is y on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. Syslog is a standard Linux service that supports storing event information in local files as well as sending events to an external syslog server. and the other one recording the moved-to port. The qualifier (12 characters) specifying the object of the command. CTA and ACTR moves are recorded when the CTA/PSA/TTI Transactions in History Log field is y on the Feature-Related System Parameters screen. specifying the operation to be performed. The port type to which the user was connected when list history was issued.Maintenance SAT Commands
list history field descriptions
list history field descriptions Field Date Time Port Description The date list history was issued (mm/dd). For more information on Communication Manager web interface System Logs. These transactions appear as two separate records: one recording the moved-from port.

either by a technician command or by system software. When a reset 4 (reload) occurs. If the reset is escalated. The administrator can configure the level of detail that is logged.List of SAT Commands
l
Security-related events: Communication Manager logs all events related to security to the secure log. System Administration Terminal (SAT) interface logging: Administration changes are logged to the command history log with the date and time.
l
l
Web page logging: Attempts to access the Avaya server’s web pages and changes to a value in a web page are logged.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
display initcauses
schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25
Communication Manager Release 5. information about the recovery is stored. Display initcauses shows information for restarts of the active processor only. the unique identify of the person making the change. either successfully or unsuccessfully. When the processor resets and the system is restarted. The error log contains information about the reset. the value of the parameter that is changing and the status of the operation (successful or not). the error log is saved on the disk. Communication Manager logs attempts by users to view information to which they are not permitted access or attempts to submit forms with invalid or non-acceptable values. only the reset that successfully completes is recorded.
initcauses
display initcauses
| schedule] Use display initcauses to see a history of recovery steps taken by the system. Changes to a web page are logged only if the page is submitted. Records of the last 16 restarts are retained in the initcauses log in chronological order. An administrator cannot disable or change parameters related to security events.0 Issue 4 January 2008
315
.

Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
list usage integ-annc-board
location
board location
Communication Manager Release 5. The system’s software escalation strategy can perform a higher level restart than the one initiated if problems prevent or conditions interfere with normal execution. Look for a change of mode to help determine when an interchange occurred. The month. State of the server immediately after the interchange. l Active = Mode of a simplex server and for a duplex server that is the active server. For more information on Announcements/Audio Sources screens and integrated announcement boards. at the time of the restart. l Standby = Mode of a standby server in a duplex configuration l BUSY OUT = Mode of a standby server that has been placed out-of-service with a busyout command.List of SAT Commands
display initcauses field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Escalated Description y/n y = the restart was escalated to a higher level than originally attempted.0 Issue 4 January 2008
317
. see Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509). day and time of the restart. 2 of 2 See also reset system on page 571.
Mode
Time
integ-annc-board
list usage integ-annc-board
list usage integ-annc-board location Use list usage integ-annc-board to see information on the announcements and audio groups on an announcement circuit pack.

Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
status ip-board
CCccss
board location
318 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. The screen also shows the time of the last port reset.
list usage integ-annc-board 01B18 ANNOUNCEMENT GROUP BOARD USAGE USED BY Audio Group Audio Group Announcement Group Group Announcement 4 23 2087 Member 28 Member 101 Extension 9876543210 Page 1
list usage integ-annc-board field descriptions
list usage integ-annc-board field descriptions Field USED BY Description The type of announcement source on the announcement circuit pack Audio Group with Audio Group number and Member number Announcement with Announcement number and Extension
ip-board
status ip-board
status ip-board location Status ip-board has the same syntax and output as status clan-ip except the list of allowed boards is larger.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following screen shows a typical result for list usage integ-annc-board. Media Gateways and Servers
.
Note:
Use status ip-board location to see the data in the first two columns of the following table. Note: status ip-board location is a SAT command that cannot be run on the MAPD board. the last hour start time and end time for the error counter statistics.

The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing. for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams which meet this `no-route’ criterion.g. Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down. for lack of buffer space). Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.List of SAT Commands
status ip-board field descriptions
status ip-board field descriptions 1 of 2
Field Name Output type MIB data Description
Incoming datagram header errors
Counter
Long
ipInHdrErrors
The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers.0 Issue 4 January 2008
319
. The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces. Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams. but which were discarded (e. The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. version number mismatch. Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.. other format errors. including those received in error. but which were discarded (e.g. The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user-protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. 1 of 2
Outgoing datagrams with no route available
Counter
Long
ipOutNoRoutes
Incoming datagrams received Incoming datagrams discarded
Counter
Long
ipInReceives
Counter
Long
ipInDiscards
Outgoing datagrams submitted for transmission
Counter
Long
ipOutRequests
Outgoing datagrams discarded
Counter
Long
ipOutDiscards
Communication Manager Release 5. time-to-live exceeded. and errors discovered in processing their IP options. including bad checksums. The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination..

standard used by U.all endpoints (except Avaya 46x4 IP Telephones) within a network region using this codec set .all endpoints communicating between two network regions and using this codec set l Enter none for an unencrypted media stream. Prevents encryption when using this codec set.Maintenance SAT Commands
change ip-codec-set field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Packet Size (ms) Media Encryption Description Size of the packet in milliseconds (ms). Use to encrypt: . l Enter aea for Avaya Encryption Algorithm. Not as secure as AES.S. Default value when Media Encryption Over IP is y for the first time on the Special Applications screen. government to protect sensitive (unclassified) information. Media Gateways and Servers
. Enter the options in the order of preference. The options for each codec set apply to all codecs defined in that set. l 1-srtp-aescm128-hmac80 l 2-srtp-aescm128-hmac32 l 3-srtp-aescm128-hmac80-unauth l 4-srtp-aescm128-hmac32-unauth l 5-srtp-aescm128-hmac80-unenc l 6-srtp-aescm128-hmac32-unenc l 7-srtp-aescm128-hmac80-unenc-unauth l 8-srtp-aescm128-hmac32-unenc-unauth Or leave blank 2 of 2
ip-interface
322 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. l Enter aes for Advanced Encryption Standard encryption. Appears when Media Encryption Over IP is y on the system-parameters customer-options screen. Reduces circuit-switched to IP call capacity by 25%. Enter aes in one of the fields to add AES Media Encryption.

This field sends VLAN instructions to C-LAN and Media Processor boards. The subnet mask is a 32-bit binary number that divides the network ID and the host ID in an IP address. This field appears for list ip-interface clan. This field cannot be administered for VAL boards. n is displayed in this column. If media processor boards are not duplicated. Address of a network node that serves as the default gateway for the IP interface. Threshold number of sockets in use for IP endpoint registration on the C-LAN before a warning message is logged.0 Issue 4 January 2008
325
.List of SAT Commands
list ip-interface field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Subnet Mask Gateway Address Num Skts Warn Net Rgn VLAN Description Subnet mask associated with the IP address for the IP interface. Virtual Address The virtual address of the duplicated TN2602 (Crossfire) circuit pack pair. It does not send VLAN instructions to IP endpoints such as IP telephones and softphones. Network region number for the IP interface. 2 of 2
Dup
ip-network-region
See: change ip-network-region on page 326 status ip-network-region on page 328
Communication Manager Release 5. The next board in this list is the associated duplicated IP Media Resource 320 circuit pack.the IP Media Resource 320 circuit pack is duplicated. This field appears on list ip-interface medpro for duplicated TN2602 circuit packs . n .the IP interface circuit is not duplicated y .

xxx. Media Gateways and Servers
. if available. Valid entries are 0 (a simple route) and 1 (a complex route).xxx.xxx. The name is administered on the Node Name screen and can include the keyword Default indicating the default route. A metric value of 1 is used only when the switch has more than one C-LAN board installed.xxx.xxx.xxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxx.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following example shows the output from list ip-route.xxx C-LAN Metric/ Port Network Bits xxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxxxxxx 0 24 0 24 1 24 Accepted by C-LAN accepted pending rejected
list ip-route field descriptions
list ip-route field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Route Number Destination Node Gateway Subnet Mask C-LAN Port Metric Description IP-route number Destination of the route. Identifies which portion of an IP address is a network address and which is a host identifier. 1 of 2
330 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. The node name of the Gateway through which the destination is to be reached. The destination IP subnet address.
list ip-route IP ROUTING Route Number xxx xxx xxx Destination Gateway/ Node Subnet Mask xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxx. The Gateway is a name administered on the Node Name screen. A metric-1 route diverts usage of the route to a metric-0 route. Indicates the C-LAN port location that provides the interface for the route.xxx.xxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxx xxx. Specifies the desirability of the IP route in terms of the efficiency of data transmission over the route.

Routes for a link are downloaded to the C-LAN circuit pack when the link comes into service. Typically. or are duplicates of existing routes). 2 of 2
l
l
netstat ip-route
netstat ip-route [board location] Use netstat ip-route to see the routing tables that are resident in the C-LAN and/or VAL circuit packs. With the board option. or it has been sent but no reply has been received. such as a link coming up.0 Issue 4 January 2008
331
. Possibilities include:
l l
Description
accepted – the route has been accepted by the C-LAN circuit pack rejected – the route has been rejected by the C-LAN circuit pack. The Gateway may not be on the attached ethernet subnet or may not be the IP address of the far end of the PPP link. pending – the route has not been sent to the C-LAN circuit pack. only the specified C-LAN or VAL circuit pack appears. obsolete – the route is no longer needed (some host routes were needed in R7 but are no longer needed in subsequent releases.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
netstat ip-route board location
(none) Display routing tables for all C-LAN and VAL circuit packs specific C-LAN or VAL circuit pack
init inads craft
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
list ip-route field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Network Bits Accepted by C-LAN Indicates whether a C-LAN circuit pack has accepted the administered IP-route. this status changes to accepted or rejected when some condition changes. all C-LAN and VAL circuit packs are displayed. Without the board option.

0 255. Timeout . Fixed field giving the destination of the route.0.” indicating the default route. which is administered as port 33.255.255.
l
Gateway Subnet Mask Intfc/Err
pppn represents one of the PPP interfaces on the C-LAN.0.255. typically because the RSCL is down.Board was busied out.168. The destination is a name administered on the Node Name screen which can include the keyword “Default.0 **** Intfc/Err motfec0 lo0 lo0 motfec0 LPBK_IP
netstat ip-route field descriptions
netstat ip-route field descriptions Field Bd/Pt Destination Description The circuit pack location for the pack that provides the interface for the route.Query timed out. cpm0 represents the ethernet interface on the C-LAN which is administered as port 17. motfec0 represents the internet interface on the VAL circuit pack.8 192.Loopback request failed.168.8 192.0.255.255.0. The Gateway must be a name administered on the Node Name screen.113 **** Subnet Mask 0.22.22. Media Gateways and Servers
.255.0. The node name of the Gateway by which the Destination can be reached.0. Subnet mask information entered on the IP Interfaces screen.264 127.0 **** Gateway 192.255 255.0.0. BD BUSY .0. which is administered as port n+1.168. LPBK_IP .0.0 255.
netstat ip-route IP ROUTING Bd/Pt 01A0633 01S0618 01A0618 01A0633 07A04 Destination 0.
l
l
l l
l l l
332 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.SNMP call failed.0.1 127.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following example shows the output from netstat ip-route.22.1 127. SNMP . lo0 represents the loopback interface on the C-LAN or VAL.0 127.0.

SNMP . or within a range of ip addresses.Adding a route failed.Deleting a route failed.Failed to acquire loopback address. The refresh failed for the following reasons: Add . or a certain group of IP stations.Maintenance SAT Commands
refresh ip-route all field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Routes Added Failure Reason Description Number of routes that were added from the C-LAN route tables. Each defined ip station receives a reset message and is unregistered. to all IP endpoints in a specific network region. Media Gateways and Servers
. Brd Busy. Timeout . Delete . You can limit the reset to only IP phones.the CLAN-BD has been busied out. 2 of 2
ip-stations
reset ip-stations
reset ip-stations [ip-phones | all | tti] [ ip-network-region n | all-regions | ipaddr n n] Use reset ip-stations to simultaneously unregister and reset all IP endpoints on a system.SNMP query to the board failed. Loopback .SNMP query timeout.
334 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. RSCL is probably down. to IP phones in a specific network region.

9.List of SAT Commands
Use reset ip-stations to initiate simultaneous firmware upgrades to many IP stations. An event is logged in the Events Report (display events)
When reset ip-stations is issued:
l l l
l
If reset ip-station is executed a second time before all stations have reset. the “Command completed successfully” message appears. or a certain group of IP stations. “Command already running.76. but all the resets are not complete.
Communication Manager Release 5. Please try again later” appears. not all IP stations have already been reset. resubmit the command to restart the process.323 stations including:
l l l l l
IP phones IP Softphones IP Agents IP E-consoles All endpoints that appear as IP stations to Communication Manager The system unregisters each station Each station individually resets “Command completed successfully” appears immediately at the SAT. When reset ip-stations is submitted.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default Feature Interaction
reset ip-stations
all ip-phones tti ip-network-region n all-regions ipaddr n n
reset all IP endpoints reset IP phones only reset phones in TTI state only reset IP endpoints in specified IP network region reset IP endpoints in all network regions reset IP endpoints within an ip address range Examples: reset ip-stations reset ip-stations reset ip-stations reset ip-stations 135.77. If the system resets while reset ip-stations is running. However.70
(all)
all-ip all regions
See Feature Interactions for reset ip-stations on page 336
ip-phones ip-network-region 2 ip-phones ip-network-region 2 ip-phones ipaddr 135.9.0 Issue 4 January 2008
335
. You can reset IP stations on one ip-network region to prevent overloading a system with large numbers of IP station resets.70
Use reset ip-stations to reset H.

and C-LANS controlled by the processor on a Survivable Remote EPN. Media Gateways and Servers
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
add ipserver-interface
n
Port network Example: add ipserver-interface 10
336 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Network regions are associated with specific media processing resources. and limit the performance impacts of simultaneously resetting large numbers of IP stations. and reset ip-stations is run on the main processor. This also applies on G3R only to IP stations registered to C-LANs controlled by an ATM WAN Spare Processor. Administer IP-network regions to a size that DHCP and TFTP servers can handle. if there are IP endpoints registered to both a main processor and a Local Survivable Processor (LSP). the IP endpoints registered to the LSP are not reset.Maintenance SAT Commands
Feature Interactions for reset ip-stations
Network Regions
When setting up IP-network regions.
Duplicated systems
In duplicated systems. For example. consider the number of IP endpoints assigned to each region.
ipserver-interface
See: add ipserver-interface on page 336 busyout ipserver-interface on page 338 change ipserver-interface on page 339 display ipserver-interface on page 339 get forced-takeover ipserver-interface on page 340 list ipserver-interface on page 342 release ipserver-interface on page 344 remove ipserver-interface on page 344 reset ipserver-interface on page 346 set ipserver-interface on page 346 test ipserver-interface on page 347
add ipserver-interface
add ipserver-interface n Use add ipserver-interface n to administer a port-network n to be IPSI controlled. submit reset ip-stations on the processor where the IP endpoints are registered.

Media Gateways and Servers
.
S8700 MC
If the IPSI is not duplicated:
l
busyout causes a fallback to traditional control where the Expansion Interface is the ArchAngel PKT-INT functionality is moved to an IPSI in another port network the active IPSI cannot be busied out the standby Tone-Clock is busied out
l
If the IPSIs are duplicated in the port network (the required argument is a cabinet/carrier):
l l
338 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.1p Call Control DiffServ Call priority setting (1-7) DiffServ code point (DSCP) 2 of 2 Description Location of the IPSI board Name of the host machine DHCP client identifier Secondary IPSI fields (S8700 MC only) Location of the IPSI board Name of the host machine DHCP client identifier
busyout ipserver-interface
busyout ipserver-interface Uc Use busyout ipserver-interface to force an IPSI circuit pack to be out of service.Maintenance SAT Commands
add ipserver-interface field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Location Host DHCP ID Secondary IPSI Location Host DHCP ID QoS Parameters Call Control 802.

64>]
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Moving a port network from one server to another causes a level 2 reset of the Port Network. the get forced-takeover ipserver-interface command will only attempt to gain control of port networks with the same community number as the Local Only server. Test #1605 will immediately PASS. but during the reset they will not have access to any features such as Hold.Maintenance SAT Commands
get forced-takeover ipserver-interface
get forced-takeover ipserver-interface [ all | port-network n <1 . A test result of IN PROGRESS will be shown for Port Networks in other communities. The command is issued from the server intended to control the port network. If the Port Network is not controlled by the Main server or ESS where get forced-takeover ipserver-interface is issued.
340 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. See display system-parameters ess for Local Only and community assignments.
The get forced-takeover ipserver-interface command provides for manually taking control of IPSI port networks. Media Gateways and Servers
. Conference. Shuffled IP calls are not dropped.
l
!
Important:
Important: On an ESS administered as Local Only. the server shows the test result as IN PROGRESS. etc.
l
If the Port Network targeted by get forced-takeover ipserver-interface is already controlled by the Main server or ESS where the command is issued. Transfer. This resets every board in the port network and drops any established calls carried by the port network. but the get forced-takeover ip-server command will not attempt to gain control of these Port Networks.

1p Call Control DiffServ Call priority setting (1-7) DiffServ code point (DSCP) 2 of 2 Location of the IPSI board Name of the host machine DHCP client identifier
reset ipserver-interface
reset ipserver-interface UUc Use reset ipserver-interface to reset an IPSI in the named cabinet/carrier. Media Gateways and Servers
. Note:
Note:
Use busy ipserver-interface to take the IPSI out of service before a reset is allowed. Example: reset ipserver-interface 2a
set ipserver-interface
set ipserver-interface Uc | a-all | b-all Use set ipserver-interface Uc to set a specified IPSI to be active for a given cabinet carrier. This is equivalent to reset board location.Maintenance SAT Commands
remove ipserver-interface field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Host DHCP ID Description Name of the host machine DHCP client identifier
Secondary IPSI: These fields appear on S8700 MC Location Host DHCP ID QoS Parameters Call Control 802.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
reset ipserverinterface
UU c
Specify the cabinet with the board you want to test. Specify the carrier you want to test.
346 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) for additional information on any error codes that occur. Examples: set ipserver-interface 1b set ipserver-interface a-all set ipserver-interface b-all
test ipserver-interface
test ipserver-interface Uc Use test ipserver-interface to perform a board test for an IPSI in the named cabinet/ carrier. Sets all “a” side IPSIs active. It tests all clock and PKT-INT components. Use list ipserver-interface to see the IPSI Control State and verify that the interchange occurred. This is useful in preparation of hub/subnet maintenance.0 Issue 4 January 2008
347
. Sets all “b” side IPSIs active.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
set ipserverinterface
Uc a-all b-all
Specify the cabinet and carrier with the IPSI board you want to make active.0.List of SAT Commands
Use set ipserver-interface a-all or b-all to set all the a. See IPSV-CTL (IP Server Interface Control) on page 897 in Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager 4.or b-side IPSIs in the control network to be active.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
test ipserverinterface
Uc
Cabinet and carrier you want to test. Examples: test ipserver-interface 3A test ipserver-interface 12A repeat 2
Communication Manager Release 5.

number of
Communication Manager Release 5. bit error rate. of the test call. Cabinet.
list isdnpri-testcall ISDN-PRI TESTCALLS B-Channel 078/001 Start Time 25/14:36 Duration 120 M/T Port 1B1102
Field Descriptions for list isdnpri-testcall
list isdnpri-testcall field descriptions Field B-Channel Start Time Duration M/T Port Description The trunk-group number and member number of the trunk in use.
status isdnpri-testcall
status isdnpri-testcall group# / member# Use status isdnpri-testcall to display the progress of an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call on the specified trunk. hour and minute when the test call began. The tested ISDN-PRI B-channel’s port number. in minutes. carrier.0 Issue 4 January 2008
349
.List of SAT Commands
list isdnpri-testcall
list isdnpri-testcall [schedule] Use list isdnpri-testcall to display the ISDN-PRI trunks currently in use for outgoing ISDN test calls. Expected duration.
The following display shows a typical result for list isdnpri-testcall.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
list isdnpri-testcall
schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25. slot and circuit number of the port on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack in use for the outgoing test call. Day of the month.

the trunk should be taken out of service. The number appears in scientific notation.Maintenance SAT Commands
bits transmitted. The following example shows the output from status isdnpri-testcall 80/1. 1 of 2
350 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. it can be decided to take the ISDN trunk out of service. If the trunk is used for voice. number of blocks transmitted. If the trunk is used for data and the rates are high. The measured bit error count according to the comparison of the sent and received bit pattern. High rates may also be due to some type of power hit on the line. The number of bits generated. the trunk may not have to be taken out of service. This is subjective data because the ISDN trunk may be used for data or voice. the ISDN-PRI trunk “may” be in a troubled state. duration specified.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Feature Interaction
status isdnpri-testcall
group number group member number
Administered trunk group number Administered group number (trunk within a trunk group)
init inads craft
see below
Example: status isdnpri-testcall 78/1
status isdnpri-testcall feature interactions
If the bit error rate or block error rate is greater than zero. start time. block error rate. duration of test call. Media Gateways and Servers
. The number appears in scientific notation.
status isdnpri-testcall 80/1 ISDN TESTCALL STATUS Bit Number Block Number Error Of Error Of Start Rate Bits Rate Blocks Time 0EE0 4EE7 0EE0 6EE2 Duration Reason Duration Of Of Specified Test Termination 100 in progress Page 1 of 1
Port 1B1401
25/12:36 120
status isdn testcall field descriptions
status isdn testcall field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Port Bit Error Rate Number of Bits Description This field specifies the physical address of the ISDN-PRI B-channel. and reason of termination are displayed on the status screen. Based on the statistical information displayed on the terminal.

A termination reason of “canceled” means the test call has been canceled with clear isdnpri-testcall.” “overflow. A reason of “no bits” means that no bits have been received because the ISDN-PRI test call circuit connection is bad. The number appears in scientific notation. The number of blocks generated. A termination reason of “internal fail” specifies that there is an internal error on the Maintenance/Test circuit pack. A reason of “in progress” means the test is still running and a reason of “data corrupt” is used for any other error condition. The reason of termination indicates why the test call has terminated. Valid reasons of termination are “finished.List of SAT Commands
status isdn testcall field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Block error Rate Number of Blocks Start Time Duration Specified Duration of Test Reason of Termination Description The measured block error count according to the comparison of the sent and received bit pattern.” “transmission.
Communication Manager Release 5.” “canceled.” “internal fail.0 Issue 4 January 2008
351
. 2 of 2
test isdnpri-testcall
test isdnpri-testcall group#/member# [minutes num-minutes] [schedule] Use test isdnpri-testcall to start an outgoing ISDN-PRI test call.” “no bits.” “data corrupt. The number appears in scientific notation. The duration specified in minutes for how long the test call should run. The time the test call started (dd/hh:mm).” and “in progress. A reason of “transmission” means there has been a data transmission interruption.” A termination reason of “finished” means the test finished in the specified time. The duration specified in minutes for how long the test call has been running. A blank indicates that the default amount of time was used to run the test. Only one ISDN trunk in each port network can be tested at one time. Valid durations are 1-120 (minutes) or blank (to indicate the default amount of minutes was used to run the test). The maximum number of asynchronous outgoing test calls that can be run simultaneously depends on the number of Maintenance/Test circuit packs in the system. A reason of “overflow” denotes that the bits transmitted have overflowed buffer allocation. probably caused from a power hit.

352 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.4 or 9. Example: test isdnpri-testcall 78/2 minutes 10
The output screen for test isdnpri-testcall shows: Result PASS – The test call was successfully initiated. see Test #258 under ISDN-TRK (DS1 ISDN Trunk) in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. See Common Input Parameters on page 25. a B-channel or Maintenance/ Test circuit pack).Maintenance SAT Commands
For more information. Media Gateways and Servers
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
test isdnpri-testc all
group# member# minutes num-minutes schedule
Specify the trunk over which to originate the test call. The duration defaults to 8. ABORT – Resources were not available (for example.6 seconds. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). FAIL – An outgoing test call could not be initiated. Specify the duration of the test call in minutes from 1 to 120.

one is for the housekeeping events and the other is used for automatic wake-up events and emergency access events.List of SAT Commands
journal-link
status journal-link
status journal-link wakeup-log | pms-log Use status journal-link to see the operational status of a wakeup-log or a pms-log printer link. if the Property Management System is not functional. emergency access to attendant events and. If the link is down. housekeeping events.0 Issue 4 January 2008
353
. When the system includes two printers. emergency access events and scheduled reports Status the printer that handles housekeeping events while the PMS is down Examples: status journal-link wakeup-log status journal-link pms-log
The following display shows a typical result for status journal-link wakeup-log. the number of times the switch has tried to re-establish the link will be shown. A journal printer is used to document automatic wake-up events.
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
status journal -link
wakeup-log pms-log
Status the printer that handles automatic wakeup events. See status link on page 358 for more details on links.
status journal-link wakeup-log JOURNAL LINK STATUS Link State: down Number of retries: 1 Maintenance Busy? no
Communication Manager Release 5.

down — The link is physically down.Maintenance SAT Commands
status journal-link field descriptions
status journal-link field descriptions Field Link State Description The operational status of the link: up — normal operational state. extension not administered — An extension number for the printer has not been assigned on the hospitality system parameters.
Maintenance Busy
journal-printer
See: busyout journal-printer on page 354 release journal-printer on page 355 test journal-printer on page 356
busyout journal-printer
busyout journal-printer pms-log | wakeup-log Use busyout journal-printer to put the link to the Property Management System log or wakeup log printers in a maintenance busy state. When busied out. the link is dropped and no data transfer can take place over it. Whether there is any maintenance testing being performed upon the link. the link is established and is capable of supporting the application. Media Gateways and Servers
.
354 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

Note: Specific component maintenance performed on a link sometimes conflicts with link maintenance. frequent attempts at re-setup may delay the recovery of a faulty component. See Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. The printer that handles housekeeping events while the PMS is down. busyout the link to disable attempted link re-setup.
release journal-printer
release journal-printer wakeup-log | pms-log Use release journal-printer to return to service a busied out link to the Property Management System (PMS) log or wakeup log printers. Common Command Output Screens on page 28. If a maintenance test requires that the component be idle.
init inads craft nms
See note below.List of SAT Commands
Use busyout journal-printer to prevent unwanted interference between different maintenance processes. For best results.
Note:
Communication Manager Release 5. see Common Input Parameters on page 25. emergency access events and scheduled reports. For information on journal printers. Busyout the link to prevent re-setup attempts. Frequent link re-setup attempts may delay component recovery. because busied-out objects create link setup failure. and resulting in attempts by the system to reestablish the link. see status journal-link on page 353.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
busyout journalprinter
pms-log wakeup-log
Busies out the link to the Property Management System printer Busies out the link to the Wakeup Log printer Examples: busyout journal-printer pms-log busyout journal-printer wakeup-log
For more information.
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default Feature Interaction
release journalprinter
wakeuplog pms-log
The printer that handles automatic wakeup events. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. see busyout pms-link on page 451. causing link set-up to fail.0 Issue 4 January 2008
355
. Maintenance software may put a component that is part of a link in a busy state.
For general information on journal printer links.

since it must be idle for certain tests to take place.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
test journalprinter
pms-log wakeup-log short long repeat-number clear schedule
Test the link to the Property Management System printer. The system may then perform frequent attempts to re-establish the link. cabinet. JNL-PRNT designates the wakeup-log printer.
The output screen for test journal-printer includes: Maintenance Name PMS-PRNT designates the PMS-log printer. whose maintenance name is PMS-PRNT Test the wakeup-log printer. causing the link to drop. PNC or switch node is recognized by the system.
Background maintenance activity on a link can interfere with testing and recovery of a particular component of the link. or PNC (A or B). as part of a test. maintenance software may busyout a component of the link.Maintenance SAT Commands
test journal-printer
test journal-printer pms-log | wakeup-log [short | long] [repeat-number| clear] [schedule] Use test journal-printer to perform hardware diagnostics on the link between the switch and a specified journal printer link to either the pms-log printer or the wakeup-log printer. Busying out the link will prevent the system from these attempts to set up the link. This can delay recovery of the component.
356 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Also use test led to identify a port network.
led
test led
test led [ all | cabinet UU | port-network PN# | switch-node SN# | media gateway # | a-pnc | b-pnc] [repeat repeat#] Use test led to verify that a specified cabinet. For example. whose maintenance name is JNL-PRNT See Common Input Parameters on page 25. port network. Remember that a busyout will tear down a link if it is not already down. Media Gateways and Servers
.

even though the test numbers show up differently in the results.
link
See: busyout link on page 358 clear link on page 358 status link on page 358 test link on page 363
Communication Manager Release 5.
init inads craft dadmin Customer superuser login if the Processor and System MSP feature is enabled (display system-parameters customer-options). Once every repeat cycle is completed. the red. They are turned off in the same order in which they came on.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
test license
short long
On an S87xx server. depending on the Error value. FAIL. and the customer superuser login is administered on the Permissions screen
For more information. the system is in License-Error or No-License mode. every affected LED is restored to reflect its current status. The cycle can be repeated a number of times with the repeat option. the system is in License-Normal mode. See Common Input Parameters on page 25. If the test results are:
l l
PASS. green and yellow circuit pack LEDs are turned on until all administered carriers in the specified group have been lit for 2 seconds.
license
test license
test license [short | long] Use test license to run a license file check on the server so you do not have to wait for the next hourly update to see if certain license errors have been cleared.List of SAT Commands
When test led is entered. see Common Command Output Screens on page 28. short and long run the same test function.0 Issue 4 January 2008
357
.

status link
status link n (with C-LAN circuit pack–Ethernet connection) Use status link to see:
l l l
static information about the link the data extension and port used.4 Processor Interface circuit pack 1a2 or 1b2 = 5 . Media Gateways and Servers
.
Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
Action/ Object
busyout link
link#
A number assigned to the link on the Communication Interface Links screen. adjunct. The statistical counters cannot be cleared for a C-LAN’s Ethernet link. See status link on page 358 for more details on links. see Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. See status link on page 358 for more details on links.Maintenance SAT Commands
busyout link
busyout link# Use busyout link to put a specified packet gateway link in a maintenance busy state. see Common Input Parameters on page 25. and protocol information a counter of CHAP failures for PPP links
358 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.8
For more information. or switch connected to the link will be inaccessible and the link will have to be re-established later when returned to service.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Busyout of a link drops all calls and packet traffic dependent on that link. The application. Processor Interface circuit pack 1a1 or 1a1 = 1 . For more information. Use clear clan-port to clear the counters associated with a numbered PPP C-LAN link. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. connect speed. Common Command Output Screens on page 28.
clear link
clear link n Use clear link to clear the counters associated with a numbered PPP C-LAN link.

One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space. including framing characters. page 2 1 of 2 Field Incoming received Unicast packets Incoming received multicast packets Incoming dropped octets Incoming errored packets Incoming packets discarded Description The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.List of SAT Commands
status link screen. The number of non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol. including those that were discarded or not sent. The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. The total number of octets received on the interface. Page 2
status link 1 ERROR COUNTERS Reset Time: 03/08 17:38 Incoming Received: Since Reset Incoming Dropped: Since Reset Outgoing Transmitted: Since Reset Outgoing Dropped: Since Reset CRC Check: 0 Unicast Pkts 5649003 Error Pkts 0 Unicast Pkts 4181883 Error Pkts 0 Multicast Pkts 1401469 Discard Pkts 83 Multicast Pkts 773 Discard Pkts 0 Octets 492543628 Octets 689650382 Page 2 of 4
Collision Count: 0
status link field descriptions. 1 of 2
Outgoing Transmitted unicast packets
Communication Manager Release 5. The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address. page 2
status link field descriptions.0 Issue 4 January 2008
361
.

status link 1 PROCESSOR CHANNEL STATUS UP: 001. page 2 2 of 2 Field Outgoing multicast packets Description The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a non. Information about administered hop channels displays on page 4 of the screen. The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted. One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space.unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or subnetwork-multicast) address. The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface. The processor or hop channel status information can take either 1 or 2 pages on this screen. including framing characters. Media Gateways and Servers
. depending on the number of links being reported and their condition. page 3
The example below is for processor channels (page 3 of the screen). 2 of 2
Outgoing transmitted octets Outgoing errored packets Outgoing packets discarded
status link screen.004 Page 3 of 4
362 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.Maintenance SAT Commands
status link field descriptions. including those that were discarded or not sent.

List of SAT Commands
status link field descriptions. page 3 Field UP DN PND Description Channels are up. page 4
The following is an example of the output of page 4 of status link.0 Issue 4 January 2008
363
.
status link 1 TCP/IP Applications Currently Active Service Type ALARM1 ALARM2 CDR1 CDR2 DOLAN PMS PMS_JRNL PMS_LOG SAT SAT_LSTN SYS_PRNT Sessions 0 0 0 0 66 0 0 0 0 0 0 Page 4 of 4
test link
test link link# [short | long] [repeat repeat# | clear] [schedule]
Communication Manager Release 5. Channels are in a pending state from the down to the up state (processor channels only)
status link. Note that the service type of DOLAN reflects the total of IP endpoints and H323 signaling groups on that C-LAN. page 3
Note: A dash (–) or a colon (:) between numbers indicates all numbers including and between the indicated numbers. Channels are down. The screen displays every TCP/IP socket link that is currently up and active and that is using the Ethernet link n via the C-LAN board or the Processor Ethernet interface.
Note:
status link field descriptions.

Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
test link
link# short long repeat repeat# clear schedule
Each link is identified by a number (1-16) assigned on the communication-interface links screen. display communication-interface links shows the location and identification of each link. See status link on page 358 for more details on links.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
change logging-levels
xyz
364 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.
logging-levels
See: change logging-levels on page 364 display logging-levels on page 366
change logging-levels
change logging-levels Use change logging-levels to control how much information is logged for SAT activity.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use test link to verify that the specified link is administered and performs a series of tests on the link. Media Gateways and Servers
. See Common Input Parameters on page 25.

However the form access is logged. This value applies to EVERY field on a form. log commands associated with the following actions
display logging-levels
display logging-levels Use display logging-levels to see what SAT activities are being logged to the Command History log. Enter n to disable SAT activity logging.
login-id
reset login-id
reset login-ID n
366 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. y/n Enter y to log these commands and transactions to the Command History log. The value prior to the change is not logged. new = causes only the value following a change to be logged. both = causes both the value prior to a change and the value after a change to be logged. See change logging-levels on page 364 for screen and field descriptions.
Log Data Values
When enabled. none =Neither the value prior to the change nor the value after the change is logged.Maintenance SAT Commands
change logging-levels screen field descriptions
change logging-levels field descriptions Field Enable Command Logging Description y/n Enter y to enable SAT activity logging. The Command History log is stored via syslog and is available from the server web pages only.

or on. 1. 9. and is a reflection of the system at the time the request was made.List of SAT Commands
Use reset login-ID to terminate a SAT session on a TCP/IP link.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
reset login-id
n
The number (0-999) of the SAT session Example: reset login-id 9
init
logins
status logins
status logins Screen name: COMMUNICATION MANAGER LOGIN INFORMATION Use status logins to see information about all of the users that are currently using the Communication Manager SAT. Users may have logged off.0 Issue 4 January 2008
367
. or the command may have finished executing while the information is being displayed. or other traditional connection. Use status logins to see the ID number of all active SAT sessions. It does not show users that may be accessing the server but have no SAT session active. 4 Active Command status logins Session ID 1
Communication Manager Release 5.
status logins COMMUNICATION MANAGER LOGIN INFORMATION Login init Profile 0 User’s Address 135. This screen shows only those users who have a SAT session active. The screen does not automatically update. The following is an example of the results of status logins.

368 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.Maintenance SAT Commands
status logins screen field descriptions
display profile-base field descriptions Field Login Profile User’s Address Active Command Session ID Description Login name.
maintenance
See: reset maintenance on page 368 test maintenance on page 368
reset maintenance
reset maintenance UUC Use reset maintenance to reset a specified maintenance circuit pack. Media Gateways and Servers
. EI link. Specify a cabinet. 1 through 44. The user profile number assigned to the login. For a PN’s Maintenance circuit pack. User’s IP address (correct regardless of whether the user is connected through a CLAN or a processor interface) Current or last command issued by the login. the MT interface.
test maintenance
test maintenance [C] [short | long] [repeat# | clear] [schedule] Use test maintenance to perform hardware diagnostic tests on the PN’s Maintenance circuit packs. to reset the PN’s Maintenance circuit pack in the ‘a’ carrier of the specified cabinet. The session number assigned by the system. dropping any local login to that circuit pack. The cabinet number defaults to 1. This field may not be accurate. The long test resets the PN’s Maintenance circuit pack. in chronological order of access. and sanity functions are tested. Parameter C specifies a cabinet. reset. dropping the local login via the Maintenance board. and updates are not reflected until the next execution of status logins.

a. but the ISDN Notification field displays not sent. Communication Manager software sends a message to the network requesting that the source of the incoming call be identified and the call be registered. If the public ISDN does not send any response. c. If the Communication Manager server is indirectly connected via a QSIG or DCS private network to a public ISDN that follows the ETSI or Australian ISDN protocol standard. the ISDN Notification field on the MCT History report will show acknowledged. but the ISDN Notification field displays not sent. If the public ISDN sends an acknowledgement. Note that this includes the following two cases: 1. the ISDN Notification field on the MCT History report will show rejected. the private-network message is proprietary. If the public ISDN sends a rejection (perhaps because the feature was not subscribed). the ISDN Notification field on the MCT History report will display not sent. MCT enables customers to collect information that could be used to identify a calling party whose conversation is deemed to have a malicious intent. This information can be viewed using the Malicious Call Trace History report.Maintenance SAT Commands
mct-history
list mct-history
Use list mct-history to display the data associated with the Malicious Call Trace (MCT) feature chronologically. b. The gateway server then notifies the public ISDN that MCT has been activated. 2. a message is sent through the private network to the gateway server.
370 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. with the newest data displayed first. If the Communication Manager server is directly connected to a public ISDN that follows the Australian ISDN protocol standard (Country Protocol 2). the ISDN Notification field on the MCT History report will show no response. the public ISDN is notified when MCT is activated. Media Gateways and Servers
. Note that in the QSIG case. Several scenarios are possible:
l
Communication Manager software records information about the caller.
l
l
If the Communication Manager server is not connected directly to a public ISDN that follows the ETSI protocol standard. If the Communication Manager server is connected directly to a public ISDN that follows the ETSI protocol standard. including the Calling Number whenever possible for incoming trunk calls. so all servers between the user activating MCT and the gateway must be Communication Manager servers.

The time of the occurrence. The extension of the user who received the malicious call. The controlling extension user then has access (via display messages) to the information regarding the malicious call.
Active Ext Recorder Port Redir From Actual Party Parties on Call ISDN Notification
Communication Manager Release 5. The port of a voice recorder being used to record the malicious call. Controlling Extension: The extension of the user who enabled the MCT control feature. and whether the network responded. For redirected calls. forwarding). The extension of the user that activated the MCT feature. Whether an ISDN notification was sent to the PSTN notifying them of the call.. the party from which the malicious call was redirected (e. The extensions of other parties connected to the malicious call when the MCT feature was activated.g. coverage.0 Issue 4 January 2008
371
.List of SAT Commands
The following is an example of the MCT history report:
list mct-history MALICIOUS CALL TRACE HISTORY Recorder Redir From/ Port Actual Party 07E0401 none 43990 Page 1
Date 12/20
Time 14:54
Contr Ext/ Active Ext none 43990
Parties on Call ______________ 43991 no party #3 no party #4 no party #5 no party #6
ISDN Notification: not sent 9/20 10:58 41908 41970 none 0 41801 08A0704 07E0401 no party #4 no party #5 no party #6
ISDN Notification: not sent
Field Descriptions for list mct-history
Table 35: Field Descriptions for list mct-history Date Time Contr Ext The date of the occurrence.

If the data cannot be retrieved for the 15-minute interval. the delta equals the total. high Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC — detects and corrects errors on every frame) errors could suggest that: .the LAN connection may be “noisy” . The data is collected at 15-minute intervals over 24 hours for the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) and collisions for ethernet connections.
374 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. or congestion on the bus. Use the list to infer some LAN performance characteristics.a wire is frayed or broken
l
The 24-hour history gives the ability to look back at these measures if the trouble cleared. After the occurrence of “N/A” (not available).
list measurements clan ethernet
list measurements clan ethernet location [schedule] Use list measurements clan ethernet to see a 24-hour history of important packet-level statistics.a wire connection is loose . N/A appears. For example:
l
high collision counts could indicate high traffic on the LAN segment. The delta (the change from the last inquiry) and the total are provided for each error count. Media Gateways and Servers
. refer to “Automatic Circuit Assurance” in Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509).Maintenance SAT Commands
Table 36: list measurements command qualifier information 3 of 3
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
tone-receiver trunk-group voice-conditioners
list measurements tone-receiver on page 201
3 of 3
list measurements aca
For more information about using ACA.

The current 15-minute interval in which the action was performed The error count for CRC errors The total value of the counter on the board The counter value can be up to 11 digits long because of the 32-bit counter on the board. and reseating the board all clear the firmware counters.List of SAT Commands
The primary use of this command is to quickly and unambiguously determine whether the fault lies within the Avaya-provided equipment or with the LAN or LAN administration to which the system is connected.0 Issue 4 January 2008
375
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
list measurements clan ethernet
location schedule
Cabinet-carrier-slot address of the C-LAN circuit pack See Common Input Parameters on page 25. using reset board.
init inads craft cust
Example: list measurements clan ethernet 1A05 The following example shows the output from list measurements clan ethernet. Busying out or releasing a board or a port.
list measurements clan ethernet 1C10 Switch Name: sierra Date:4:07pm WED AUG 01. the delta equals the total.2007 Page 1
C-LAN ETHERNET PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENTS DETAILED REPORT Date 08/01 08/01 08/01 08/01 08/01 Time 0308 0253 0238 0223 0208 CRC Check Collision Count Total Delta Total Delta 650 50 650 250 600 600 400 400 N/A N/A N/A N/A 1000000570 20 10000000570 20 1000000550 10000000550 10000000550 10000000550
list measurements clan ethernet field descriptions
list measurements clan ethernet field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Date Time CRC Check Total Description The date that the data was collected. 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. After an N/A occurs.

Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
list measurements clan ethernet field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Delta Collision Count Description The difference between the current and the previous sample The error count for collisions on the ethernet 2 of 2
376 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

the report shows asterisks. from current hour backwards. The difference between the current and the previous sample The number of invalid frames detected.
summary yesterday-peak summary today-peak summary last-hour
detail yesterday-peak loc detail today-peak loc detail last-hour loc
378 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. Invalid frames are the frames that are misaligned.Maintenance SAT Commands
list measurements clan ppp field descriptions
list measurements clan ppp field descriptions Field Date Time CRC Check Total Description The date that the data was collected The current 15-minute interval in which the action was performed The error count for CRC errors Total value of the board counter. Busying out or releasing a board or a port. and reseating the board all clear the firmware counters. Lists the measurements for the previous day’s peak for the specified board.bit counter on the board. The number of failed attempts for ppp authentication
Delta Invalid Frame CHAP Failures
list measurements clan sockets
list measurements clan sockets qualifier [schedule] Use list measurements clan sockets on IP Media Processor and Medpro. After the occurrence of an “N/A” the delta equals the total. in socket usage (Erl). using reset board. The screen output may reflect multiple C-LAN boards. for the indicated board. The counter value can be up to 7 digits long because the 16. Lists the measurements for the previous day’s peak.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
list measurements clan sockets
hourly location
Lists the measurements for the last 24 hours. If the switch clock is changed. for the C-LAN boards administered on the IP interfaces screen.

and error count (from 0 to 900 in increments of four) of the 15-minute interval in the previous 24-hour period that contains the maximum value for each error category.900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid) The categories correspond to measurement error counters:
l
Description
Errored Seconds: the value of the errored seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval (0 .List of SAT Commands
list measurements ds1-summary field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Synchronized Loopback/Span Test Bit-Error Count Test Duration Worst 15-Minute Interval (Date. (0 . Unavailable/Failed Seconds: the value of the failed seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval (0 .0 Issue 4 January 2008
383
. Bursty Errored Seconds: the value of the bursty errored seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval (0 . Count) 24-Hour Count Current Interval Count Category The date.900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). (0 .900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid).900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). Severely Errored Seconds: the value of the severely errored seconds counter for the specified 15-minute interval(0 . Controlled Slip Seconds Loss of Frame Count: 2 of 2
l
l
l
l l
list measurements ip codec
list measurements ip codec qualifier
Communication Manager Release 5.900 or N/A if data for the 15-minute interval is invalid). end time. Time.65535) The error count for the current (incomplete) 15-minute interval for each of the four error categories. The sum of all valid 15-minute counts for the previous 24-hour period for each error category.

The list measurements ip codec command works on IP Media Processor and Medpro. the report shows asterisks.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
list measurements ip codec hourly region#
Example: list measurements ip codec hourly region 4 Lists the measurements for the last 24 hours.711 Usage (Erl) + G. and monitor traffic trunk-groups reports corresponding to IP trunk groups. If the switch clock is changed. Media Gateways and Servers
. The peak hour in a given region is the hour at which [G. Lists the measurements for the previous day’s peak for the indicated region. for the indicated region. compare the list measurements ip codec report with the lines of the list measurements trunk-group. the report shows asterisks. A single report output combines statistics from IP Media Processor and Medpro circuit packs.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use list measurements ip codec to see IP media processing codec resource measurements. It is required that the switch not have mixed IP and non-IP ports in a single trunk group. To estimate the amount of IP traffic used on IP trunks versus IP stations. The report output may span multiple IP Media Processor or Medpro boards. list performance trunk-group. the report shows asterisks. If the switch clock is changed. The IP media processing codec resource measurements are listed by software.
summary yesterday-peak summary today-peak summary last-hour
detail reg# yesterday-peak detail reg# today-peak detail reg# last-hour
384 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.711 Usage (Erl)] is a maximum for that region. from current hour backwards. list measurements outage-trunk. If the switch clock is changed. for every region with MEDPRO resources administered on the IP Interfaces screen. Codecs are considered to be part of a common pool. Lists the measurements for the previous day’s peak.

but was successfully allocated to a resource in another region.x xxxxx xxxxx xxxx.729 call.723 or G.x xxxxx xxxxx G723/9 ------------------------Usage In Reg Out of (Erl) Peg Reg Peg xxxx.
list measurements ip codec summary yesterday-peak Switch Name: IP CODEC RESOURCE SUMMARY REPORT G711 --------------------Usage In Reg Out of (Erl) Peg Reg Peg xxxx.723/9 Usage (ERL)
G. but was successfully allocated to a resource in another region.
386 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.723 or G. Usage shall be measured from the time the voice channel is allocated until it is released.Maintenance SAT Commands
list measurements ip codec field descriptions 2 of 2 Field G.711 call.723 or G.x xxxxx xxxxx xxxx. 2007
G.729 resource on an IP Media Processor is in use Total number of times an IP media processor port in the region was allocated to a G. The total number of times an IP media processor port was needed in the region for a G. Out of Region does not include denials.729 codecs during the measurement interval.729 resource on a Medpro is in use twice the total time (in seconds) that a G.723/9 In Reg peg G.723 or G.729 call. If Network regions are interconnected is n.x xxxxx xxxxx Date: 5:27 pm WED AUG 15. Out of Region does not include denials. Out of Region is always 0. Media Gateways and Servers
. Usage in Erlangs of G. 2 of 2 The following example shows the Measurements IP CODEC yesterday-peak – Page 1.711 call. The total number of times an IP media processor port was needed in the region for a G.x xxxxx xxxxx xxxx. Calculated by: (Total Call Seconds) / 3600 where Total Call Seconds is a sum of the following: total time (in seconds) that a G. If “Network regions are interconnected” is n.x xxxxx xxxxx xxxx.711 Out of Reg peg Description Total number of times an IP media processor port in the region was allocated to a G.723/9 Out of Reg peg
Meas Hour 0400 0300 0600
Region 1 2 44
DSP Rscs xxxx xxxx xxxx
The reports list measurements ip codec summary today-peak and list measurements ip codec summary last-hour are similar to the above report. Out of Region is always 0. Includes time that the voice channels are on a call.723 or G.711 In Reg Peg G.

xx xx.711 resource on an IP Media Processor is in use twice the total time (in seconds) that a G. 2007
Communication Manager Release 5. but was successfully allocated to a resource in another region.xx Page 1
In Reg peg Out of Reg peg
Denied Peg
% Blk
% out of Srv
5:27 pm
WED AUG 15.x xxxx..List of SAT Commands
list measurements ip dsp-resource field descriptions 2 of 2 Field DSP Usage (ERL) Description Usage in Erlangs of every codec during the measurement interval. either manually busied out or maintenance busy.e.xx % Out of Srv xx.729 resource on an IP Media Processor is in use. Out of Region does not include denials.0 Issue 4 January 2008
389
. The total number of times an IP media processor port was needed in the region for a call but could not be allocated in this region nor any other region because every IP media processor port was busy. during the measured interval. Includes calls that are successfully allocated out of region and denied altogether. not successful). Calculated by: (Total Call Seconds) / 3600 where Total Call Seconds is a sum of the following: total time (in seconds) that any codec resource on a Medpro is in use total time (in seconds) that a G. Percent of CCS time that any IP media processor ports were out of service. Includes time that the voice channels are on a call. Total number of times an IP media processor port in the region was allocated to a call. Out of Region is always 0. resulting in the call not being able to go through. The total number of times an IP media processor port was needed in the region for a call. Calculated by: (Total Time in CCS that any port was OOS / (Available Resources * 36)) * 100. The percent of attempted allocations of IP media processor ports in the region that are blocked (i.x In Reg Peg xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx Out of Reg Peg xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx Denied Peg xxxxx xxxxx xxxxx % Blk xx.xx xx. Usage shall be measured from the time the voice channel is allocated until it is released.xx xx.
list measurements ip dsp-resource summary yesterday-peak Switch Name: Date: IP DSP RESOURCE SUMMARY REPORT Meas Hour Region 0400 1 0300 2 0600 44 DSP Rscs xxxx xxxx xxxx DSP Usage (Erl) xxxx. If “Network regions are interconnected” is n.x xxxx.xx xx. 2 of 2 The following example shows the Measurements ip dsp-resource Summary – Page 1.723 or G.

The number of packets sent during the interval. Lists a summary of the number of tone receiver ports the server used and had available for the previous day’s peak. 2 of 2
list measurements tone-receiver
list measurements tone-receiver qualifier Use list measurements tone-receiver to see how many tone receiver ports the server is using and has available.List of SAT Commands
list measurements ip signaling-groups field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Interval Average Latency (ms) Interval Packets Sent Interval Packets Lost (%) Description The average latency for the interval. today’s peak. or the last-hour.
Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008
393
. today’s peak.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
list measurements tone-receiver
schedule summary yesterday-peak summary today-peak summary last-hour detail yesterday-peak detail today-peak detail last-hour
See Common Input Parameters on page 25. Lists a detail of the number of tone receiver ports the server used and had available for the previous day’s peak. The percent lost packets during the interval (if 100% the corresponding latency is shown as ****). or the last-hour.

Those requests denied are given reorder tone. CC-TTR. or MFCR receivers during the listed hour. The peak (or maximum) number is calculated by incrementing a counter for each request and decreasing the counter when the request fails or a tone receiver is released. then the request is offered to the next port network. certain requests were either queued or denied during the peak time interval. If a request for a receiver is made in one port network. The system-wide total number of requests queued during the listed hour.Maintenance SAT Commands
list measurements tone-receiver summary last-hour field descriptions
list measurements tone-receiver summary last-hour field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Switch Name Date Hour Meas Type Total Req Description Name of switch Time and date of report The hour the measurement was taken Type of tone-receiver being measured Total Requests. GPTD. The total number of requests is calculated by incrementing a counter for each request. Media Gateways and Servers
. by call processing. 1 of 2
Peak Req
Total Queued
Peak Queued
Total Denied
396 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. then the request is queued. GPTD. The system-wide maximum number of call requests queued at any one time during the listed hour. CC-CPTR. The system-wide total number of requests. A request is queued when there are no receivers immediately available. or MFCR receivers that occurred at any one time for the listed hour. The system-wide peak number of simultaneous requests for DTMF. CC-TTR. Peak Requests. If no receivers are available on any port network. Only DTMF and CC-TTR requests are queued. Denied requests fail and are given the reorder tone. CC-CPTR. The system-wide total number of requests denied because no receivers were available during the listed hour. Maximum queue size: l TMF requests = 4 l CC-TTR call vectoring requests = 80. For DTMF-receiver or CCTR requests. If the Peak Req field indicates a number higher than listed in the Avail field. Queued call requests do not receive dial tone until a tone receiver becomes available. for DTMF. and no receivers are available. this happens only after the queue is full.

keep the value displayed in the Avail field greater than that displayed in the Peak Req field. Suggested action: l Increase the number of tone receivers by the number displayed in the Peak Denied field.0 Issue 4 January 2008
397
. l Administer the system as “non-blocking” for tone receivers: increase the number of tone receivers (the Avail field) so all requests receive service immediately and no requests are queued. Type of tone-receiver Number of tone-receivers of each type available for use Tone capabilities of each tone-receiver 2 of 2
TR Type Total Avail Capabilities
media-gateway
See: add media-gateway on page 397 change media-gateway on page 400 display media-gateway on page 400 list media-gateway on page 401 list configuration media-gateway on page 210 list trace media-gateway on page 609 status media-gateways on page 404 test media-gateway on page 406
add media-gateway
add media-gateway [ x | next ] Use add media-gateway from the primary server to add a Media Gateway to the system.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
add media-gateway
x next
Number to assign to the media gateway Next available number
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
list measurements tone-receiver summary last-hour field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Peak Denied Description The system-wide peak number of requests denied because no receivers were available during the listed hour. For example.

MAC Address
Display only. Used by the primary server to allocate resources from the nearest Media Gateway. If an administered Media Module is in conflict with the inserted Media Module.0 Issue 4 January 2008
399
. Once the media gateway has registered. Once the Media Gateway has registered. Blank until the Media Gateway registers for the first time. IP Address of the media gateway. This is the IP address of the H.248 media gateway platform. G450. until a media gateway with a different IP address is validly registered with the same administered identifier. even if the media gateway becomes unregistered. J2320. Appears when Type is G250. 2 of 3
Max Survivable IP Ext:
MGP IP Address Module Type
Name Name (Controller) Network Region Number
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
add media-gateway field descriptions 2 of 3 Field IP Address Description Display only. until a Media Gateway with a different MAC Address is validly registered with the same administered identifier. a pound sign (#) appears to the left of the Module Type field on the Media Gateway screen. you must reboot the media gateway to ensure optimal audio quality. etc. G350. For information about SLS. MAC Address of the media gateway. The populated IP address is persistent over reboots. that MAC Address appears. Network Region assigned to the media gateway. Refer to the administration guide of the media gateway being added for valid media modules and slot configuration. VoIP resources in SLS can handle a limited number of simultaneous endpoint registrations. and number plan area code. Administering this field above the default value can result in system performance problems. day-light savings rule. Name assigned to the gateway Name assigned to the controller. see Administration for the Avaya 250 and Avaya 350 Media Gateways (03-300436). The platform could reside in a network component which has its own IP address. Number assigned to the media gateway. Display only. Type of Avaya Media Module in the slot.
Location
!
WARNING:
WARNING: If you change the Location field while the media gateway is registered. even if the Media Gateway becomes unregistered. Blank until the Media Gateway registers for the first time. Refers to a time-zone offset. that IP address always appears. The number of characters is dependent upon the type of primary server. Limits the number of simultaneous endpoint registrations for the media gateway in SLS mode.

Display only. See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509) and Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager. Use the help key to see the list of valid media gateway types. Slots V8-V9. Slot number for the identified Media Module. are listed after Slots V1-V4.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
change media-gateway
x
number assigned to the media gateway
See add media-gateway on page 397 for an example screen and an explanation of field descriptions.
display media-gateway
display media-gateway x [schedule]
400 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. Used for the controller to identify the gateway General site information Display only. none = no automatic fallback registrations are accepted. The recovery rule is set on the system-parameters mg-recovery-rule screen. 3 of 3
Registered
Serial No Site Data Slot Type
change media-gateway
change media-gateway x Use change media-gateway to change the administration of a Media Gateway. (555-233-504) y/n A media gateway is currently registered with the primary server pd = media gateway registration is pending. Type of media gateway.Maintenance SAT Commands
add media-gateway field descriptions 3 of 3 Field Recovery Rule Description Number of the auto-fallback recovery rule that applies to this Media Gateway. for virtual media modules. subject to the Recovery Rule as assigned on the set on the system-parameters mg-recovery-rule screen.

rd = The media gateway was denied registration to a server because the disable nr-registration [network region] command was entered. (555-233-504). Once the media gateway registers.Maintenance SAT Commands
list media-gateway field descriptions
list media-gateway field descriptions Field Number Name Serial No Description The number assigned to the media gateway by the primary server administration The name given to the media gateway by the user The serial number of the media gateway. The IP address field is blank until the media gateway registers for the first time. the IP address appears. That IP address changes when a media gateway with a different IP address is validly registered with the same administered identifier. Firmware version and hardware vintage IP address of the C-LAN or NIC Recovery Rule that applies to the media gateway.
IP Address
Type NetRgn Reg
FW Ver/ HW Vint Cntrl IP Addr RecRule
402 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. as set on the system-parameters mg-recovery-rule screen. The populated IP address is persistent over reboots. See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509) and Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager. The IP address of the media gateway. Media Gateways and Servers
. Use the show system media gateway CLI command or see the sticker on the back of the unit to locate the media gateway serial number. even if the media gateway becomes unregistered. Type of media gateway. subject to the Recovery Rule as assigned on the set on the system-parameters mg-recovery-rule screen. Use the help key to list the valid types of media gateways Network region number assigned to the media gateway y/n A media gateway is currently registered with the primary server pd = media gateway registration is pending.

0 Issue 4 January 2008
403
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
reset media-gateway
x all level 1
number of the media gateway to reset all registered media gateways reset media-gateway level 1 forces a reset of the entire platform and is destructive to user connections.248 link and does not tear-down calls. Use reset media-gateway level 2 to force a media gateway off of an LSP.List of SAT Commands
reset media-gateway
reset media-gateway [ x | all ] level [ 1 | 2 | 3] Use reset media-gateway from the primary server to add a media gateway to the system. reset media-gateway level 3 resets all media modules and tears down all calls. The media gateway attempts to register with the media gateway controllers on its MGC list. reset media-gateway level 2 resets the H.
level 2
level 3
Communication Manager Release 5. The media gateway attempts to register with the media gateway controllers on its MGC list.

248 link on each administered media gateways up = the link is up dn = the link is down pd = the media gateway has not yet returned to the primary call controller after having at least one registration request denied.List of SAT Commands
status media-gateways field descriptions 2 of 2 Field GATEWAY STATUS Alarms (Mj Mn Wn) GATEWAY STATUS Lk Description Number of major alarms.0 Issue 4 January 2008
405
. rd = the media gateway was denied registration to a server because the disable nr-registration [network region] command was entered 2 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. and warnings that exist on each administered media gateways. Status of the H. minor alarms.

an H.248 link audit. and the Link Loss Delay Timer period has expired test result pass fail with error code 257 fail with error code 769
main server
fail with error code 1
406 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Results of test media-gateway vary depending on configuration of the media gateway. If there is an interchange while a media gateway is registering or unregistering.248 context audit. and the Link Loss Delay Timer period has not expired (link bounce is occurring) unregistered.248 link audit when there is an alarm against a Media Gateway for being unregistered when it actually is registered. Media Gateways and Servers
. Use test media-gateway to run an H.Maintenance SAT Commands
test media-gateway
test media-gateway x
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
test media-gateway
x
number assigned to the media gateway
Use test media-gateway from the primary server to run a board audit.
l
test media-gateway results The media gateway is operating as main server local survivable processor main server and is registered registered unregistered. the alarm may appear and status media-gateway and list media-gateway may incorrectly show the media gateway to be unregistered. and an H.
l
The link (test 1527) and context audits run successfully and no error codes are associated with the tests.

List of SAT Commands
media-processor
See: set media-processor on page 407 status media-processor board on page 411
set media-processor
set media-processor location [ lock | unlock ] [ override ] Use set media-processor to request a demand interchange of TN2602AP IP Media Resource 320 circuit packs.
standby media-processor is not refreshed. Use set media-processor location override to ignore the warning and continue the interchange. use “override”
Communication Manager Release 5. an error message appears. set media-processor error messages SAT Error Message Command only supported by a TN2602 AP and greater board Duplication not administered for this media-processor Invalid duplication state for this media-processor pair Description The board location specified is not a TN2602 IP Media Resource. This pair of duplicated IP Media Resources has not transitioned to a state where one is active and one is standby. The standby IP Media Resource does not have the same set of calls up as the active board. Use list config to verify the TN code and identify the board in this location. Use display ip-interface to verify administration of the board. An interchange making the standby active would cause a loss of some or all of the calls. This IP Media Resource is not administered as a duplicated board. Use status media-processor to verify the duplication status of the IP Media Resources.0 Issue 4 January 2008
407
. Use set media-processor location lock to prevent an undesired interchange.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
set media-processor
location lock unlock override
location of the Media Resource to be active boards remain in their current state (active/ standby) clear the locked state force an interchange to a less-healthy board
craft
When set media-processor does not produce an interchange.

otherwise the boards will automatically interchange back. Use set media-processor lock within 20 seconds. the TEST RESULTS screen appears with a result of FAIL and an Error Code. To prevent interchanges when certain operations are being performed. Peer state of health worse. An internal error in the board prevented the interchange. Use set media-processor override to force the interchange if necessary. Use set media-processor unlock to unlock the boards. To prevent interchanges when certain operations are being performed. it is possible to disable interchanges with set media-processor lock. Internal error prevented interchange. For duplex configurations.Maintenance SAT Commands
If the set media-processor interchange fails. The board indicates that it has not been configured to be duplex mode. Specifically. Use set media-processor override to force the interchange if necessary. and they must be valid. Media Gateways and Servers
. If this information has not been configured or it is invalid. Interchange prevented by the damping timer. Incorrect network configuration. To prevent interchange oscillation. otherwise the boards will automatically interchange back. additional network configuration data values are required. If an interchange request is received during that period. The message to the board to go active or standby is corrupted (neither active nor standby). The process to make this board standby was denied because the health of the current active board is better. interchanges are disabled with set media-processor lock. Use set media-processor lock within 20 seconds. Board locked active. Peer state of health better. Table 37: set media-processor Test Results Error Codes 1 of 2 Error Code 1 2 3 Description Mode not configured. Error Code 3 appears when a demand interchange is requested and the board is locked in the active state. A request to make this board active was denied because the health of the current standby board is worse. both boards must be on the same subnet and they each must have their peer addresses. Use set media-processor override to bypass this operation. a damping timer of 20 seconds is started after each interchange. and to allow for locking of less health boards in the active state. Requested state not recognized. Use set media-processor unlock to unlock the boards. the interchange fails with this code 1 of 2
4
5
6
7
8 9
408 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Error Code 4 is returned when a demand interchange is requested and the board is locked in the standby state. it is prevented and this error code is returned. Board locked standby.

Dup=Duplicate Slot. This error is reported when no response is received from the standby-going-active board. unable to go either active or standby as a result of a previous interchange request. unable to go either active or standby as a result of a mode downlink from CM software Internal error.List of SAT Commands
Table 37: set media-processor Test Results Error Codes 2 of 2 Error Code 10 Description Interchange in progress. the interchange request is ignored and this error code is returned. Internal error. Internal error. Internal error.0 Issue 4 January 2008
409
. This error is reported if an interchange request is received and the duplication subsystem on the board is stuck in the arbitration state. If the states are not the same.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
status media-processor
location all
location of the media processor all media processor boards in a system
The following is an example of status media-processor all.
status media-processor all IP BEARER INTERFACE STATUS Alarms Links Code Mj Mn Wn Pr Cl El Dup St TN2602 0| 0| 0|up|up|up|B05|act TN2602 0| 0| 0|up|up|up|A05|sby Alarms Links Code Mj Mn Wn Pr Cl El Dup St TN2602 0| 0| 0|up|up|up|B08|act TN2602 0| 0| 0|up|up|up|A08|sby Page 1 of 1
Slot 1A05 1B05
Slot 8A08 8B08
Pr=Peer Link. This error is reported when no response is received from the active-going-standby board. Cl=Control Link. If a state transition is already in progress when an interchange request is received. El=Ethernet Link. 2 of 2
11
12
501 502
status media-processor
status media-processor [location | all] Use status media-processor to see the busyout status of the specified MedPro or IPMedPro media processor board. This error is reported if an interchange request is received and the duplication subsystem on the board is stuck in the arbitration state. St=state
Communication Manager Release 5. the state requested by the command is compared with the state currently being transitioned to.

one conversion resource is tested. 1-32. Specify modem pool group numbers to release members in a modem pool group. two conversion resources are tested. Therefore. when a member number is specified for a Combined modem-pool group. For more information see Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. A Combined modem-pool group consists of pairs of Analog and Digital Line ports. Specify group numbers and member numbers to release single group members. and when a member number is specified for an Integrated modem-pool group. An Integrated group consists of modem-pool circuit packs.Maintenance SAT Commands
modem-pool
See: release modem-pool on page 414 test modem-pool on page 414
release modem-pool
release modem-pool Use release modem-pool to deactivate specified modem pool groups or group members.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
release modem-pool
group member
1-5 pair of analog and digital line ports (or two pair for the Integrated modem-pool case). One pair of Analog and Digital Line ports used for modem-pooling is called a conversion resource. Media Gateways and Servers
.
414 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.
init inads craft
test modem-pool
Use test modem-pool to performs hardware diagnostic tests on the specified modem pool group or an individual member of a specified group (Combined or Integrated). each containing two conversion resources.

see Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509). For more information on the Music On Hold Groups screen.List of SAT Commands
Action/Object
Qualifier
Qualifier Description
Login
Default
test modem-pool
group number member number short long repeat n clear schedule
The administered group number (1-5) See Common Input Parameters on page 25.0 Issue 4 January 2008
415
. Examples: test modem-pool test modem-pool test modem-pool test modem-pool test modem-pool test modem-pool
init inads craft
short 1
1 1 schedule 1/3 l r 2 1/3 l r 2 schedule 2 r 2 2 l
moh-analog-group
list moh-analog-group
list moh-analog-group { [1-Max] ( number n | (to-number n) | count n)} [schedule] Use list moh-analog-group to list Music On Hold groups and see how many members (audio sources) are in each group.
Communication Manager Release 5.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
list moh-analog-group
1-Max number n to-number n count n schedule
Music On Hold number range of Music On Hold group numbers to list number of Music On Hold groups to see on the page See Common Input Parameters on page 25.

Each station can have a maximum of 4 domain-controlled associations.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following is an example of list moh-analog-group. Media Gateways and Servers
.
list moh-analog-group MUSIC-ON-HOLD GROUPS Group 8 10 11 Name Elevator Music Latin Renditions Polka Music Number or Sources 5 20 30 Page 1
At End of Member List
list moh-analog-group field descriptions
list moh-analog-group field descriptions Field Group Name Number of Sources Description Number of the Music On Hold group Name of the Music On Hold group Number of members (sources) in the Music On Hold group
monitored-station
list monitored-station
list monitored-station [start extension] [count xxxx] Use list monitored-station to see information on stations controlled by domain-controlled associations.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
list monitoredstation
start extension count xxxx
starting extension for the list number of stations on the list
init inads craft cust
416 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

the command inserts a GAP marker into the trace. If the trace was not already disabled.Maintenance SAT Commands
disable mst
The disable mst command stops the message trace facility. enter list mst. the trace continues to use CPU time until the time limit expires. Entering disable mst has no effect on the system if the trace is already disabled. Media Gateways and Servers
. If left enabled. The user should execute disable mst when the trace is complete.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
disable mst
init inads
418 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. To view the results of the trace.

Use with continuous to see messages arrive. Use this number to limit the trace Display updates as new messages enter the trace buffer (FIFO).
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default Feature Interaction
list mst
from message number
count number continuous
First message in the list. Show newest message first Show messages in the order received The screen will automatically page when full. the list begins with the oldest FIFO message. Examples: list mst continuous list mst continuous auto-page list mst LIFO list mst from 222 count 7
init inads
FIFO order
See Common Input Parameters on page 25
LIFO FIFO auto-page
Communication Manager Release 5. older messages may be sporadically omitted if wraparound is selected and the message rate is high.” The command terminates when canceled by the user. The number of messages in the list. and no additional messages appear. List indicates if the number is not in the buffer. The integrity of the buffer remains intact even when list mst is used repeatedly. If the trace is active. This option is most useful in conjunction with “auto-page.0 Issue 4 January 2008
419
. If no message number is entered.List of SAT Commands
list mst
list mst Use list mst to see the messages in the trace buffer while a trace is active or disabled.

0 Issue 4 January 2008
423
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
display node-names
schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25
init inads craft
Communication Manager Release 5.
MEDIA COMPLEX Ext Port Registered Extension of the endpoint. Shows the current registration status of the endpoint. Port information for the IP Softphone when an IP telephone and IP Softphone are in service on the same extension simultaneously. Shows the current registration status of the endpoint. 2 of 2
node-names
display node-names
display node-names [schedule] Use display node-names to see a list of the administered node names.List of SAT Commands
list multimedia ip-stations field descriptions page 1 2 of 2 Field Port Registered Description Port information for the IP Telephone when an IP telephone and IP Softphone are in service on the same extension simultaneously.

and an LSP.
Use disable nr-registration to deny media gateways and IP-phones within a specified IP Network Region from registering on the primary server or survivable processor.
init inads craft superuser customer login with server maintenance permissions
enable nr-registration
enable nr-registration [IP network region number]
426 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. disable nr-registration is automatically saved across system restarts even without save translation.Maintenance SAT Commands
disable nr-registration
disable nr-registration
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
disable nr-registration can cause momentary service disruption. Use disable nr-registration on a primary server. an ESS. The disabled network region registration state on the primary server is not file-synced to the LSP or associated ESS. It causes all gateways and IP phones in a network region to unregister from the server where the command is executed. This causes the media gateways and IP phones to register instead with an alternate server or Local Survivable Processor. This is useful when network outages cause media gateways and IP phones to disconnect and reregister with the primary server in an interval that is too short for the endpoints to fail over to an LSP. Note: When the Enable Detection and Alarms field is y on the IP-Options System Parameters screen (change system-parameters ip-options) the detection of the hyperactive link bounce is enabled which will cause associated gateway and network region alarms.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
Note:
disable nr-registration
x
IP network region number. A gateway must be assigned to the specified network region. A gateway must be assigned to the network region. disable nr-registration causes a disable network region warning alarm to appear in the alarm log.

and an LSP. an ESS.
init inads craft superuser customer login with server maintenance permissions
Communication Manager Release 5. A gateway must be assigned to the network region.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
enable nr-registration
x
IP network region number.0 Issue 4 January 2008
427
.List of SAT Commands
Use enable nr-registration to enable media gateway registration and IP-phone registration to the main server from a specified IP Network Region. The enabled network region registration state on the primary server is not file-synced to the LSP or associated ESS. no error message appears. When an unused IP network region number is entered for enable nr-registration. Use enable nr-registration on a primary server.

The connected ports of Extended Access calls. The type of Extended Access application. Description The order in which the Extension to Cellular. If there is no active outside call. the message appears: No trunks associated with this off-pbx telephone station The port connected to the physical station.
Type Trunk/ Member Group Port Connected Ports
off-pbx-telephone station-mapping
list off-pbx-telephone station-mapping
list off-pbx-telephone station-mapping x Use list off-pbx-telephone station-mapping x to see the association between an office phone and an off-PBX phone.List of SAT Commands
status off-pbx telephone station field descriptions
status off-pbx-telephone station field descriptions Field No. The number of the Trunk Group and Trunk Group member associated with the station. EC500 application was administered on the Stations with Off-PBX Telephone Integration (add off-pbx-telephone station-mapping) screen.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
list off-pbx-telephone station-mapping
x
complete office phone extension. This physical station is mapped to an Extended Access telephone such as a cellular phone.0 Issue 4 January 2008
429
. or partial phone number plus * (wildcard)
Communication Manager Release 5.

Upgrades to the set options form are tied to Avaya Service Offers.List of SAT Commands
options
set options
set options Use set options to administer whether certain alarms are reported to INADS or whether they are downgraded to a minor alarm. normal alarm levels are observed.
Note:
Communication Manager Release 5. Customers who wish to have Avaya monitor off-board network facilities must subscribe to an Offer to have these alarms accepted by Avaya. Note: Alarms cannot be upgraded. Every trunk group is associated with alarm severity group 1. Changing the default settings on the set options form may increase the number of alarms reported to the Global Services Delivery (GSD). or no alarm. All others are w.0 Issue 4 January 2008
431
.
A remote user with INADS permission uses set options to select:
l l
types of maintenance categories that report alarms automatically types of maintenance categories that require the customer to call in
If the default setting are used.
Action/Object Login Default
set options
inads init
Alarm reporting options for major and minor On-board Trunk Alarms (Alarm Group 1) are y. warning alarm.

an alarm severity option is assigned to each of the following categories:
l l l l
You can also administer the options on a system-wide basis for minor off-board DS1 Interface circuit pack alarms. the Maintenance circuit pack. the attendant console. Because resources are taken out-of-service without any record. this option is recommended only when other options do not provide the desired result. or adjunct in this category are dropped. Neither the trunk nor the station category applies to alarms raised on the common portion of the circuit pack. There is no LED activity and no call to INADS. station.
l
The alarm options can be administered only on a system-wide basis for the following alarm categories:
l l
Major on-board station alarms Minor on-board station alarms
Four alarm severity groups are provided for trunk alarms. There is no filtering of alarm data.Maintenance SAT Commands
l
Report Downgrade the alarm to a warning and report the warning to INADS. but there is no trace of an alarm. The alarm options can be administered for the categories listed below in each alarm severity group:
l l l l
Major on-board trunk alarms Minor on-board trunk alarms Major off-board trunk alarms Minor off-board trunk alarms Major on-board adjunct alarms Major off-board adjunct alarms Minor on-board adjunct alarms Minor off-board adjunct alarms
For Adjuncts.
434 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Alarm reporting options information in the Alarm Reporting Options screen is considered translation data and is preserved through every level of restart. No Alarms raised on a trunk. If the option associated with the alarm type is n. or alarm reporting station to indicate a problem. Error information is provided. the alarm report is dropped. Media Gateways and Servers
. All error information about the alarm is intact. but there is no record of an alarm and no LEDs light on the port circuit pack. This is not supported by Avaya.
l
Yes Alarms are raised in the normal manner.

Similarly. The default parameters are as follows:
l l
Downgrade every station. Adjunct-Related MOs
l l l l l l l l l
ASAI adjunct (ASAI-ADJ) ASAI adjunct IP (ADJ-IP/ASAI-IP) Avaya adjunct port (ATT-PORT) Ethernet ASAI port (LGATE-PT) Ethernet ASAI adjunct (LGATE-AJ) Ethernet Avaya port (ATTE-PT) Ethernet Avaya adjunct (ATTE-AJ) ISDN-BRI ports connected to adjuncts (ABRI-PORT) Control LAN Packet/Port (PPT-PT)
Although adjuncts are administered as stations. the administration of alarm severity for the adjunct alarm group does not affect the alarm severity levels for other types of stations. and minor DS1-BD alarm to a warning alarm. off-board trunk.0 Issue 4 January 2008
435
. port circuit pack LEDs and LEDs on the Maintenance circuit pack are affected the same as normal warning alarms. 1 of 3
Communication Manager Release 5.
MOs affected by set options 1 of 3 MO type MO
Investigate even warning alarms on these MOs when there are user-reported problems.List of SAT Commands
If the option is set to warning or report. the administration of alarm severity for the station alarm group does not affect the alarm severity levels of the adjuncts. Major and minor on-board trunk alarms should continue to raise alarms and report to INADS.

0 Issue 4 January 2008
437
. PCOLs) are downgraded according to the alarm severity of group one. 3 of 3 set options field help descriptions m(inor) n(o) r(eport) w(arning) y(es) Downgrade the major alarm to a minor alarm and report the alarm to INADS. Downgrade the alarm to a warning. (for example. Do not log the alarm or report it to INADS. Trunk MOs
l l l l
Auxiliary Trunks (AUX-TRK) Central Office Trunks (CO-TRK) Direct Inward Dialing Trunks (DID-TRK) Direct Inward and Outward Dial Trunks (DIOD-TRK)[G1. Downgrade the alarm to a warning and report the warning to INADS. This is not supported by Avaya.2SE only] DS1 Central Office Trunks (CO-DS1) DS1 Direct Inward Dialing Trunks (DID-DS1) DS1 Tie Trunks (TIE-DS1) ISDN Trunks (ISDN-TRK) Tie Trunks (TIE-TRK)
l l l l l
Trunks that are not members of Trunk Groups.List of SAT Commands
MOs affected by set options 3 of 3 MO type MO
Investigate even warning alarms on these MOs when there are user-reported problems.
Press HELP in any field of page 2 to see the help message: Enter alarm group number: 1 to 4 The alarm group number is a way of distinguishing four different groups of alarms. Log and report the alarm to INADS.
Communication Manager Release 5. log it but do not report the alarm to INADS. These alarm groups allow the user to specify that alarms in different groups are handled differently from those in other groups.

Specify the carrier you want to test. There is no busy-out command for the PKT-INT.
438 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Attempts to reset the PKT-INT on a busied-out IPSI are ignored because release ipserver-interface resets the PKT-INT. and the IPSI goes out of service. Media Gateways and Servers
. the IPSI has a bad PKT-INT state of health.Maintenance SAT Commands
packet-interface
See: reset packet-interface on page 438 status packet-interface on page 439 test packet-interface on page 441
reset packet-interface
reset packet-interface Uc Use reset packet-interface to reset and initialize the Packet Interface (PKT-INT) module on the IPSI (TN2312AP) circuit packs.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
reset packet-interface
U c
Specify the cabinet number that has the board to test. An active PKT-INT can be reset if it has been taken out of service by the software. When the PKT-INT goes out of service due to errors. A standby PKT-INT can always be reset. Taking an IPSI out of service also takes the PKT-INT out of service.

If there are no IPSIs in the requested cabinet. A cabinet number must be specified. new links are again assigned to it.
Communication Manager Release 5. The service state appears for both active and standby packet-interface circuit packs. When a packet-interface circuit pack is out-of-service or uninstalled. If there are no IPSIs in the cabinet. or if the standby is inaccessible (due to handshake failure or incomplete memory refresh) the standby packet-interface circuit packs will be in the uninstalled state. When the circuit pack returns to in-service status. Status packet-interface currently provides status for up to five packet interfaces. If there are no standby Packet Interface circuit packs.interface
init inads craft
On the status packet-interface screen. separate columns identify each Packet Interface circuit pack slot. an error displays. active and failed links are displayed for active packet-interface circuit packs only. Service state appears for both active and standby packet-interface circuit packs. Use status packet-interface to see the status of all packet-interface circuit packs in the system along with link information. it is not used to establish and maintain links. Locate the IPSI using list ipserver-interface. the No IPSI in cabinet specified message appears.List of SAT Commands
status packet-interface
status packet-interface [cabinet #] Use status packet-interface to see the status of the IPSIs in the servers. The command line takes a cabinet number as an argument and displays information about all packet interfaces for the cabinet.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
status packet. Link status information including total.0 Issue 4 January 2008
439
.

These links are in a recovery state and not active. One of the following states appears: “in-service”. “out-of-service” or “uninstalled”. The number of failed links is the number of total links minus the number of active links. The failures can arise from problems in the packet-interface. The “standby” state is used in place of “in-service” for standby packet-interface circuit packs. carrier and circuit pack position number. EI or center stage hardware.
status packet-interface PACKET INTERFACE STATUS Location: Service State: Total Links: Active Links: Failed Links: Location: Service State: Total Links: Active Links: Failed Links: 01A1 in-service 1 1 0 01B1 uninstalled 01A2 in-service 264 264 0 01B2 uninstalled -
status packet-interface field descriptions
status packet-interface field descriptions Field Location Service State Description The packet-interface cabinet.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following display shows a typical result for status packet-interface. The number of links that are in use. The total number of links. The number of links that failed to be established.
Total Links Active Links Failed Links
440 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
.

On Linux platforms. See also reset packet-interface on page 438 and status packet-interface on page 439. If the packet-interface circuit pack is in the “out-of-service” or “uninstalled” states. See Common Input Parameters on page 25. test packet-interface tests the IPSI circuit packs. The Maintenance Loop-Around test (#886) is included in the test sequences of active packet-interface circuit packs only.0 Issue 4 January 2008
441
.List of SAT Commands
test packet-interface
test packet-interface [Uc] [short | long] [repeat# | clear] [schedule] Use test packet-interface to perform hardware diagnostic tests on any or all of the Packet Interface circuit packs in a specified carrier. and checks of failure counters. no demand tests as well as scheduled. loop-around tests.
periodic-scheduled
Communication Manager Release 5. The Active-Standby Peer Link test (#888) is included in the test sequences of the standby packet-interface circuit packs only. and the carrier. periodic and error tests will run.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
test packet-interface
Uc short long repeat# clear schedule
Specify the cabinet number with the IPSI board you want to test. Tests performed include local memory checksum tests.
See Common Command Output Screens on page 28.

the ratio is for the current cycle. Total duration of previous periodic or scheduled maintenance cycle. System-critical resources are those whose health affects the entire system such as the processor. this time reflects when the pre-scheduled maintenance began. Reflects how long the system critical.0 Issue 4 January 2008
443
. Value is y if currently running or n if it is not. The data in this section reflects the status of scheduled maintenance which is performed daily. These are tested after system critical resources. Pre-scheduled maintenance can include interchanges of duplicated components and backup of translation data. or for the last completed cycle if not. For periodic tests. For scheduled tests. Reflects how often maintenance cycle is performed. or single user maintenance activities took for the previous cycle of maintenance. the ratio is for the last completed cycle. 2 of 2
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE section System Critical Shared Resource Single User Total
Current Cycle % Complete
Current Cycle Active Previous Cycle Duration Rate of Completed Cycles Start Time of Current or Previous Cycle
Communication Manager Release 5. Shared resources are those that are used by many users. if active. Note: Scheduled maintenance total does not include pre-scheduled maintenance duration. It is performed according to selections made on the change system-parameters maintenance screen. pre-scheduled or scheduled maintenance is currently running. such as trunks. These are always tested first. For scheduled maintenance. Reflects whether the current cycle of periodic.List of SAT Commands
status periodic-scheduled field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Pre-SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE section Description The data in this section reflects the status of pre-scheduled maintenance. The ratio of the number of maintenance objects tested to the total number of maintenance objects tested during a cycle. Single-user resources are those whose health affects only one user. shared resource. Scheduled maintenance is performed according to the selections made on the change system-parameters maintenance screen. Time at which maintenance cycle began in month/day/ hour:minute:second format. such as voice stations.

Other characters are prohibited. --the numbers 0-9 --the special character period (. Media Gateways and Servers
.) --the special character percent (%) --the special character star (*) --the special character question (?) --the special character minus (-) --the special character comma (.) --the special character colo (:) PINs must contain at least one numeral and one alphabetic character. The PIN should be a minimum of 7 characters and a maximum of 32 characters. The second craft login may change the PIN only for the second craft login. PINS are not displayed when entered or changed. plus numbers 0 .
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
change pin
dadmin second craft login name
dadmin login craft2 login
dadmin init
change pin CHANGE PIN New Pin: __________________________________ Re-enter Pin: __________________________________
PINS may be between 7 and 32 characters. The dadmin and init logins may change the PIN for dadmin or the second craft login.9.
444 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.Maintenance SAT Commands
pin
See: change pin on page 444 reset pin on page 445
change pin
change pin [ dadmin | second craft login name ] Use the change pin command to change the PIN for the dadmin login or for the second craft login. Upper and lower case. and must contain at least one letter and one number. and the special characters shown on the screen are allowed. PINs do not expire. PINs must conform to the minimum and maximum lengths. and may contain --upper and lower case letters.

When a PIN is reset.
l
Use this test to check the circuitry in the data path for a peer-to-peer IP layer connection. or INTUITY do not. a ping helps to indicate low-level connectivity. Note that the PIN of the second craft login may be changed. the first C-LAN in the same region as the IP address that is being pinged is used as the source. The ping command checks low-level connectivity between two IP-connected peers: a destination and a source. The command is accessible only to the init and dadmin logins.a C-LAN or IP Medpro board (board location) .an IP address (ip-address addr) . When the command is entered. no screen appears.a node (node-name name) The source can be: . and either login may reset either pin.0 Issue 4 January 2008
445
. The old PIN is not required.List of SAT Commands
reset pin
reset pin [ dadmin | second craft login name ] The reset pin command resets the PIN for the dadmin login or the second craft login.a Softphone. but it cannot be "reset" to an uninitialized value. If no source is specified.
Communication Manager Release 5. The message "Command completes successfully" is displayed. CMS. If an external ping works but higher-level applications such as DCS. it returns to the state where the PIN must be re-created on the next SAT access.
l
The destination can be: .
Action/Object
Qualifier
Qualifier Description
Login
reset pin
dadmin second craft login name
dadmin login craft2 login
dadmin init
ping
ping ip-address addr [board location | source port-id] [packet-length len] [repeat #] ping node-name name [board location | source port-id] [packet-length len] [repeat #] When debugging connectivity problems. IP phone or Remote Office (R300) phone (source port-id). there probably is connectivity to the board. Interrogate the switch for other clues as to why the higher-level application is not working. This test is nondestructive.

The recipient of a ping will reply with the same Quality of Service (QoS) value found in the received packet.zzz.xxx. This can be the virtual endpoint port ID of a softphone.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Repeated ping tests can consume a lot of bandwidth and can bog down a network as a result. Specify the board if there are multiple C-LAN or IP Medpro boards. If neither board nor source is given. Use display node-names ip to see what IP nodes are administered.
source port-id
446 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.
Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
Action/Object
ping ip-address ping node-name
addr board loc source port-id packet-length len repeat #
See descriptions below. The virtual endpoint port ID to use as the source of the ping.26 ping ip-address 192. Pings from a C-LAN board reflect control information transport performance.1p/Q parameters downloaded to that board are used in the execution of the ping. IP phone.68.3. the first C-LAN in the same region as the IP address that is being pinged will be the source of the ping.Maintenance SAT Commands
Note:
Note: Pings from an IP Medpro board reflect audio transport performance. If neither board nor source is given. the first C-LAN in the same region as the IP address that is being pinged will be the source of the ping. When an IP Medpro board is used as the source. Media Gateways and Servers
. the default DiffServ and 802. If the network is already heavily loaded.3. a ping test can fail even if there is connectivity between the source and destination.yyy. The name of the node to ping. Examples: ping ip-address 192. so the time measurements reported should reflect the behavior of the type of packets sent. or Remote Max (R300) phone.3.26 board 1C05 ping ip-address 168. Use status station ext to determine the virtual endpoint port ID of a phone. www.68.66 packet-length 1500 ping node-name gert_clan1 source S00015
init inads craft cust dadmin
ping parameters
ping parameters 1 of 2 ip-address addr node-name name board location The IP address of the device to ping.24. The location of the C-LAN or IP Medpro board (location) used as the source of the ping.

The source’s slot or port 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. from 64 to 1500.68.
ping ip-address 192.3. If packet-length is not given. See Caution above before using.26 packet-length 1500 PING RESULTS End-pt IP 192.
ping output
The following screens show examples of ping ip-address packet-length and ping node-name.68. the default packet length is 64 bytes.3.26 Port 01C0202 Port Type PPP-PT Result PASS Time(ms) 221 Error Code
ping node-name prowler10 PING RESULTS End-pt Node-name prowler10 Port 64A0817 Port Type ETH-PT Result PASS Time(ms) 16 Error Code
ping field descriptions
ping field descriptions 1 of 2 Field End-pt IP or End-pt Node-name Port Description The destination of the ping command.0 Issue 4 January 2008
447
.List of SAT Commands
ping parameters 2 of 2 packet-length len The packet length of the ping packet. Specifying a longer packet length in the command line can show:
l
if a router or host has a problem fragmenting or reassembling transferred packets a more complete indication of the link status
l
repeat rpt
The number of times to repeat the ping test.

could not complete request Interpretation The system cannot find the IP address. Must be in www. The C-LAN board does not support ping of a local PPP IP address. please press HELP Board not inserted Error encountered. Invalid board location (when using board). specify board “xxxx” Invalid IP address “CCcss” is an invalid identifier. Valid board location. Ping command error messages 1 of 2 Message www. see the Port Type’s maintenance object description in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. Invalid IP address parameter.zzz IP address not assigned IP address not reachable from this board Local IP address not supported More than one route exists. 1 of 2
448 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.Maintenance SAT Commands
ping field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Port Type Result Time (ms) Error Code Description The source port’s maintenance object name PASS. An internal error. The IP address is not in the route table of the specified board. FAIL or ABORT The round-trip time (in milliseconds) of the ping.yyy.zzz format. For the meaning of the error code and troubleshooting procedures.yyy. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). Identifies problems associated with the circuitry in the data path for a peer-to-peer IP layer connection.xxx. The IP address is not in the route table. Media Gateways and Servers
. and more than one C-LAN circuit pack has a default route. 2 of 2
Error messages
Error messages for ping are listed in Ping command error messages. but there is no board in that slot.xxx. The MO description indicates the type of ping test used and the meaning of that ping test’s error codes. the port through which the IP address is reached could not be found.

450 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls may be routed over defective equipment.Maintenance SAT Commands
!
WARNING:
WARNING: Since clear long clears every counter if the test passes. room status codes entered by hotel housekeeping staff during a PMS outage appear in this report. The time in 24-hour notation up to which events are to be listed.
Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
Action/Object
test pkt port-network
pn short long repeat n clear
The Packet bus to be tested: nn (1)
init inads craft
short 1
Examples: test pkt test pkt test pkt test pkt test pkt
port-network port-network port-network port-network port-network
1 1 1 1 1
l sh r 2 l r 25 c
pms-down
list pms-down
list pms-down [start-time] [stop-time] Use list pms-down to see every event that has meaning to the Property Management System (PMS) that has occurred while the link between the switch and the PMS was down. it is possible for firmware counters to be cleared even though a problem exists. For example.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
list pms-down
start-time stop-time
The starting time in 24-hour notation from which events are to be listed.

complete PBX enabled MWL from room. No periodic or scheduled maintenance is performed on the busied out maintenance objects until they are released. The PMS event that was reported to the switch. code 1 from stn. The time at which the event was reported.
list pms-down PROPERTY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ACTIVITY Extension 402 405 411 411 450 Event PMS PMS PMS PMS PMS Reason link out link out link out link out reject of of of of service service service service Time 7:00am 9:00am 9:30am 12:00am 12:05am
from room.List of SAT Commands
The following example shows a typical result of list pms-down. code 1
list pms-down field descriptions
list pms-down field descriptions Field Extension Event Reason Time Description The extension associated with the reported event. The reason that the event could not be reported by the switch to the PMS. but which could not be sent to the PMS.0 Issue 4 January 2008
451
. When the object is
Communication Manager Release 5. code 1 check in.
pms-link
See: busyout pms-link on page 451 release pms-link on page 452 status pms-link on page 453 test pms-link on page 454
busyout pms-link
busyout pms-link Use busyout pms-link to place every maintenance object associated with a property management system link in the maintenance busy state.

These links provide asynchronous data connections from switches to peripherals. they are composed of a:
l l l
Far end data module Simulated data channel on a NETCON board Manager that initiates and maintains the link
452 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. See status link on page 358 for more details on links. because busied-out objects create link setup failure. see Common Input Parameters on page 25. See status link on page 358 for more details on links. These links provide asynchronous data connections from switches to peripherals. Warning alarms (error type 18) are generated on each busied out maintenance object.
Note:
For more information. Frequent link re-setup attempts may delay component recovery. periodic and scheduled maintenance can be performed on the maintenance objects.
release pms-link
release pms-link Use release pms-link to reactivate the busied out maintenance objects on the property management system (PMS) link. see status pms-link on page 453. Common Command Output Screens on page 28. Use release pms-link to deactivate MOs that are associated with a property management system link. Use release pms link to reactivate the busied out objects on the link. Note: Specific component maintenance performed on a link sometimes conflicts with link maintenance. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. The busyout pms-link command places all maintenance objects associated with a PMS link in the maintenance busy state. See Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. and they are composed of the following:
l l l l
Far-end data module Simulated data channel Manager that initiates and maintains the link Controller/protocol that services the link
For information about what a property management system (PMS) is and what it does. so that the Initialization and Administration System (INADS) can determine the state of the objects.Maintenance SAT Commands
maintenance busy the object is deactivated (no call processing activity may include the busied object) and the link is dropped. busyout the link to disable attempted link re-setup. For best results. Once released. Media Gateways and Servers
.

List of SAT Commands
l
Controller/protocol that services the link
Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default Feature Interaction
Action/Object
release pms-link
init inads craft
See note below. the number of attempts made to set up the link appears. because busied-out objects create link setup failure. busyout the link to disable attempted link re-setup. The following display shows a typical result for status pms-link. For best results.0 Issue 4 January 2008
453
. see busyout pms-link on page 451.
Note:
Note: Specific component maintenance performed on a link sometimes conflicts with link maintenance.
status pms-link
status pms-link Use status pms-link to see the status of the property management system interface link. Frequent link re-setup attempts may delay component recovery. whether or not a data base swap is taking place between the switch and PMS. See status link on page 358 for more details on links.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
status pms-link
init inads craft cust browse
Status of the property management link will be up. If the link is down. A property management system (PMS) is a stand alone computer system that can be integrated with the switch to enhance the service capability for a hotel/motel.
status pms-link PMS LINK STATUS Physical Link State: down Protocol State: down Number of Retries: 3 Maintenance Busy? no
Communication Manager Release 5. For general information on PMS links.

See status link on page 358 for more details on links. Number of times the switch has tried to set up the link. Appears when the link is down. up/down The state of the C-LAN protocol. See busyout pms-link on page 451 for information on PMS links. extension not administered. busyout the link to disable attempted link re-setup. Media Gateways and Servers
. Frequent link re-setup attempts may delay component recovery. For best results.
test pms-link
test pms-link [long | short] [repeat n | clear] [schedule] Use test pms-link to verify that the link to the Property Management System (PMS) is administered and performs a series of tests on the link. y/n If y.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default Feature Interaction
test pms-link
short long repeat n clear schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25.Maintenance SAT Commands
status pms-link field description
status pms-link field description Field Physical Link State Protocol State Number of Retries Maintenance Busy Description up. The PMS link is considered administered only if an extension is given in the System Hospitality form. Examples: test pms-link test pms-link test pms-link test pms-link test pms-link sh r 5 l c c sch
init inads craft
short 1
See note below
Note:
Note: Specific component maintenance performed on a link sometimes conflicts with link maintenance. Blank if not administered. down. maintenance testing is being performed on the link. because busied-out objects create link setup failure. See status pms-link on page 453 for information about the PMS and interpreting its status.
454 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

If the PNC is not duplicated.
status pnc
status pnc Use status pnc to see a summary of conditions on the active and standby Port Network Connectivities (PNC). though the standby is not available for service. unlocking the active port network connectivity can cause an immediate PNC interchange This condition can be foreseen by use of status pnc. System restarts remove a PNC lock. Releases the PNC lock.
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
If the active PNC experiences problems while in the locked state. Set pnc unlock releases the lock and enables subsequent interchanges to take place. Use the Software Locked field on the status pnc screen to see if the PNC is locked. the B-PNC column and other duplication-related fields are blank. and the active PNC remains active regardless of its state of health.List of SAT Commands
pnc
See: set pnc on page 455 status pnc on page 455
set pnc
set pnc lock | unlock On critical-reliability systems (duplicated PNC). Duplicate call setup takes place. service disruptions may occur that would ordinarily be avoided by PNC interchange. The Interchange Disabled field refers to the antithrashing mechanism.
Qualifier Qualifier Description
Action/ Object
set pnc
lock unlock
PNC interchanges are prevented. and the active port network connectivity is locked on-line.0 Issue 4 January 2008
455
. This condition can also be initiated with reset pnc interchange override-and-lock. PNC interchanges are prevented. If the health of the active PNC has degraded to worse than that of the standby pnc. set pnc lock locks the active port network connectivity in the active state.
Communication Manager Release 5.

spontaneous or demand PNC interchanges are not possible.00. When this field is y.00.00. use set pnc unlock.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following screen shows an example of status pnc on a system with a single switch node CSS and duplicated PNC.00.00 0 0 0 yes no no no yes no B-PNC Mode: State of Health: Inter PN Index: Inter SN Index: Major Alarms: Minor Alarms: Warning Alarms: SN Locations: 03E standby functional 00.
status pnc PORT NETWORK CONNECTIVITY Duplicated? Software Locked? Standby Busied? Direct Connect? Standby Refreshed? Interchange Disabled? A-PNC Mode: State of Health: Inter PN Index: Inter SN Index: Major Alarms: Minor Alarms: Warning Alarms: SN Locations: active functional 00. To enable interchanges. On a system with duplicated PNC. On a system with duplicated PNC.00.00.00 0 0 0
status pnc field descriptions
Many fields on this screen are blank when the PNC is not duplicated status pnc field descriptions 1 of 3 Field Duplicated Software Locked Description Whether or not the system has a duplicated PNC (critical-reliability option). whether or not the standby PNC is busied out with busy pnc.00 00. 1 of 3
Standby Busied
Direct Connect
456 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.00. whether the PNCs are locked by means of the set pnc lock or reset pnc override-and-lock.00 00.00. Media Gateways and Servers
. Whether the system uses direct-connect connectivity or a center stage switch. Interchanges are prevented when the standby is busied out.

This field does not indicate if a partial unrefresh has taken place in response to a problem on the standby. Only a “functional” state of health on the standby (all zeros in the State of Health vector) guarantees that the standby’s call setup matches completely that of the active. this field indicates whether the standby PNC has completed a global refresh of duplicated call setup after being released from a busyout. by insufficient state of health of the standby. or by busyout of the standby. The source and severity of the problem is indicated by the state-of-health vector (Inter-PN and Inter-SN Indexes). Partially functional: the health of the PNC is less than perfect. and call setup on the standby PNC matches that of the active. Not functional: Expansion Archangel Links to all PNs are down on this PNC. The state-of-health vector is all zeros. For the standby PNC. This field does not indicate whether a PNC interchange is currently prevented by a software lock. Whenever the standby’s state of health is partially functional. The reset pnc interchange override-and-lock command overrides antithrashing. 2 of 3
Interchange Disabled
Mode State of Health
Communication Manager Release 5. duplicated call setup on the standby probably does not match that on the active. or after a system reset. No service is possible to any PNs via this PNC. This is the case for 5 minutes after a spontaneous PNC interchange. and for 30 seconds after a demand interchange. This field displays “active” or “standby”. Functional: the indicated PNC has no service disrupting alarms against it. service effects mentioned below are those that would occur if that PNC were to become active via an interchange. This field is y when the anti-thrashing mechanism is in effect.List of SAT Commands
status pnc field descriptions 2 of 3 Field Standby Refreshed Description On a duplicated system. depending on whether or not that PNC controls active call processing. the state of health of each PNC. preventing PNC interchanges. On a system with duplicated PNC.0 Issue 4 January 2008
457
.

Unless the PNCs are locked. each field in the index supersedes the following fields in determining which PNC is healthiest.dd.Maintenance SAT Commands
status pnc field descriptions 3 of 3 Field Inter PN Index. or warning alarms logged against DS1C-BD. SNC-LINK. or EI-SNI neighbor link faults
EXP-PN EXP-PN SN-CONF 1 of 2
458 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.bb. The corresponding fault class field is not updated to reflect the improved state of health until the refresh is done. The Inter-PN Index reports faults in connectivity between port networks and supersedes the Inter-SN Index. The locations of all switch nodes comprising the indicated PNC.cc. Media Gateways and Servers
. The meaning of each fault class field is given in Table 38: Fault Class Field Descriptions on page 458. Higher numbers indicate increasing number of faults. SNI-BD.) After a PNC-related alarm is cleared. The Inter-PN Index contains six fields (aa. minor.ee. The state-of-health indexes will not agree with the current alarm status during this period.). which is used to track and compare the states of health of both PNCs.bb. FIBER-LK. the system performs a partial refresh of the standby PNC. the system would perform a spontaneous interchange. SNC-REF.dd. RINL. DS1C-FAC.ff). A zero entry indicates that there are no such faults reported. EXP-INTF. The fields making up the indexes are 2-digit numbers separated by periods (. each of which is duplicated). SNC-BD. which reports faults in connectivity between switch nodes. and the Inter-SN Index has two (gg. SN-CONF. Warning Alarms SN Locations
aa bb
FC_EAL FC_INL
1 2
Number of PNs with EALs down Number of PNs with LINL.hh). with each field representing a different class of faults. The fault class fields are arranged in order of decreasing importance from left to right. SYNCH.ee. and SNI-PEER on the indicated PNC. the active PNC’s state of health should always be equal to or better than the standby’s. Inter SN Index Description The Inter-PN and Inter-SN Indexes screen the state-of-health vector. Minor Alarms. In other words. 3 of 3 Table 38: Fault Class Field Descriptions 1 of 2 Inter PN Index Fields (aa.ff)
Position Fault Class Priority Description MOs
Major Alarms. The number of major. (Otherwise. All zeros indicates a perfect state of health.cc. (The Inter-SN Index is only meaningful for systems with a center stage switch having 2 switch nodes.

dd. Number of PNs affected by hardware faults in a link having an EI as an endpoint (Endpoints can be determined with list fiber-link.ff)
Position Fault Class Priority Description MOs
cc dd
FC_BFDL FC_HW
3 4
Number of PNs with Bearer Fault Detection Link (BFDL) faults. a PNC interchange is executed. Instead of resetting or initializing hardware. Some unstable calls may drop. If the standby PNC’s health is equal to or better than the active PNC’s.0 Issue 4 January 2008
459
. use status pnc to check the states of health of the two PNCs. Before entering reset pnc interchange. all stable calls and links are preserved. no service disruption takes place.List of SAT Commands
Table 38: Fault Class Field Descriptions 2 of 2 Inter PN Index Fields (aa.cc.hh) gg hh FC_SNIL FC_SNIHW 7 8 Number of inter-switch-node fibers affected by peer or neighbor link faults Number of inter-switch-node fibers affected by hardware faults SNI-PEER SN-CONF SNI-BD FIBER-LK 2 of 2
pnc interchange
reset pnc interchange
reset pnc interchange [override-and-lock] Note: Reset pnc interchange does not work like other reset commands.
Note:
Use reset pnc interchange to execute a PNC interchange on a critical-reliability system (duplicated PNC). and the active goes to standby. The standby PNC becomes active and assumes control of active call processing.bb.) Number of PNs affected by SNI peer link faults for SNIs connected to EIs Number of PNs affected by DS1C facility faults
EXP-INTF SYS-LINK EXP-INTF SN-CONF FIBER-LK SNI-BD DS1C-BD SNI-PEER DS1FAC
ee ff
FC_PER FC_DS1
5 6
Inter SN Index Fields (gg.ee.
Communication Manager Release 5.

! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
This option forces execution of the interchange regardless of the standby’s state of health. For a more complete explanation of PNC duplication and interchanges. an anti-thrashing mechanism prevents subsequent interchanges unless the override-and-lock option is used. try again using the “override-and-lock” identifier If reset pnc interchange is unsuccessful due to a busyout of the standby PNC. For 5 minutes after a spontaneous PNC interchange. possibly disrupting service. the reset aborts unless the override-and-lock option is used. If the standby PNC has not completed a global refresh since it was last initialized or released. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). use set pnc unlock.
l
l
l
Note the following caution regarding the use of the override-and-lock option.
port
See: busyout port on page 461 clear port on page 461 display port on page 461 mark port on page 463
460 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. each call is set up on both PNCs.Maintenance SAT Commands
Both demand and spontaneous PNC interchanges cannot take place when:
l l
The standby PNC is busied out. The PNCs are locked by means of the set pnc lock or reset pnc interchange override-and-lock commands. To unlock the PNCs. the Must release port network connectivity first message appears.
If reset pnc interchange is unsuccessful due to the standby PNC’s state of health (operation of anti-thrashing). the command aborts unless the override-and-lock option is used. the following message appears: Interchange of pnc failed. See status pnc for details of how to obtain and interpret the states of health and other current information about the PNCs. When the standby PNC’s state of health is lower than the active PNC’s. Subsequent PNC interchanges are prevented. or for 30 seconds after a demand interchange. Media Gateways and Servers
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
reset pnc interchange
override-a nd-lock
Override the anti-thrashing mechanism. see PNC-DUP (PNC Duplication) of the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. Double call setup still takes place. regardless of changes in the states health of the PNCs.

Depending on the equipment type. slot 5 and port 2).
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
display port
location
address of the port Example: display port 1a0502 display port 01a05002 (both specify cabinet 1. carrier A. No new extensions can be assigned to this port location. identifies:
l l l l
Identification
extension trunk group number and member number modem pool group number IP address of an IP telephone that is in TTI state
462 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use display port to see a port’s equipment type and identification number. Use list registered-ip-stations for more information on the IP Softphone extension assigned to this port. or TTI port for a phone in a TTI state Softphone Restore Port = softphone registration originated from this port. Media Gateways and Servers
.
init inads craft cust browse
The following example shows the output from display port.
display port 1c0801 PORT INFORMATION Port: 01C08001 Equipment Type: Station Identification: 71026
display port field descriptions
display port field descriptions Field Port Equipment type Description Port address location Type of hardware that is physically connected to the specified port.

List of SAT Commands
mark port
mark port port-location Use mark port to make a port unusable by normal call processing. Use clear port to restore the port to service. but calls are not attempted through the port. A marked port is saved as part of translation. see Common Input Parameters on page 25 and Common Command Output Screens on page 28. For more information.0 Issue 4 January 2008
463
.. The port can be tested. etc.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
mark port
port-location
Location of the port to be marked Examples: mark port 1c0208 mark port 2a1001
init inads craft
Communication Manager Release 5.

This does not cause an interchange on a system with duplicated PNC. Level 2 restarts should take less than 2 minutes. to recover a PN that has been taken out of service. If two level 2 resets within an hour fail to return the PN to service.
status port-network
status port-network
Communication Manager Release 5. and full service is restored within 35 seconds.
For more information. see Common Command Output Screens on page 28 and Common Error Codes for maintenance commands on page 34. and reinsert all PN circuit packs. Use reset level 1 (WARM restart) to restart a PN that is still fully or partially in service.0 Issue 4 January 2008
465
. A reset will not work on a port network whose fiber link to the PN or CSS is down. Use reset level 2 (COLD restart) to reset. All stable calls are preserved. PN Emergency Transfer is already in effect if the link to the PN has been down for more than 1 minute. PN resets are described in EXP-PN (Expansion Port Network) on page 823 in Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. Use list cabinet to find the PN number(s) associated with a given cabinet. PN Emergency Transfer is invoked.
Use reset port-network to reset a specified port network to a specified level.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
reset port-network PN# level 1 level 2
Example: reset port-network 10 level 2 Port network number. causing all calls and application links on the specified PN to drop. All calls and application links with an endpoint in the PN are dropped. remove. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190).List of SAT Commands
port-network
See: reset port-network on page 465 status port-network on page 465
reset port-network
reset port-network PN# level [1 | 2]
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
A reset of level 2 is destructive.

and the total alarms. In port networks where PKT-INTs are moved to the IPSIs. faults. The following example shows the output for the status port-network for an S8700 IP-PNC port network. whether active or failed.
status port-network 2 PORT NETWORK STATUS Major Minor Warning Carrier PN Control PN Alarms Alarms Alarms Locs Active Standby 2 0 4 6 02A 02B 02C 02D Dedicated Tones n y Major Alarms n Minor Alarms y up up Internet Protocol (IP) Connected Port Network
TDM Service Bus State A B in in
Control Channel y n
TONE/ CLOCK 02B 02A
Service State in in
System Clock standby active
System Tones standby active
PKT 2
Service State in
Bus Open Bus Faults Leads
466 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. status port-network shows the location and state of the links. The fields on the screen vary depending on the PNC configuration on the system. Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use status port-network to see information about the status of a specified port network. and open bus links.

but the archangel is not functioning and is not available. Tone-Clock. The number of minor alarms logged against the Port Network that is being displayed. CSS.. The control is up.Maintenance SAT Commands
status port-network field descriptions
status port-network field descriptions 1 of 3 Field PN Major Alarms Minor Alarms Warning Alarms Carrier Locs PN Control Active/Standby Description The Port Network number associated with the Port Network for which status is being displayed. or ATM fiber connected port networks. up = the link between the TN2312 IPSI circuit pack and the server is up down = the link between the TN2312 IPSI circuit pack and the server is down For direct connect. When the far-end EAL is unavailable. it means the endpoints could not be retrieved by software. and packet-bus information are blank. “A-PNC” or “B-PNC”). The number of warning alarms logged against the Port Network that is being displayed. The physical position of each Expansion Interface board that is an endpoint for a fiber link in the specified Port Network. Media Gateways and Servers
. while a critical-reliability system will display two Expansion Interface pairs separated by a hyphen (-). The number of major alarms logged against the Port Network that is being displayed. 1 of 3
Endpoints
468 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. aa = there is a problem with the archangel. up = the EAL and INL are both available down = the EAL and INL are both unavailable near-end = the EAL is available but the INL is unavailable far-end = the INL is available but the EAL is unavailable. TDM-bus. If blanks are displayed. The cabinet and carrier locations of each carrier in the Port Network. A high-reliability system will display only one Expansion Interface pair. the PNC status of a port network is determined by the availability of the EAL (Expansion Archangel Link) and the INL (Indirect Neighbor Link) to the port network. FIBER-LINK This field displays the fiber-link number associated with all fiber links having an Expansion Interface circuit pack endpoint residing in the specified Port Network. Active and standby (if control network is duplicated) control network status status for the specified port network.e. The fiber connectivity side will also be displayed (i.

g. Only one TDM bus of a TDM bus pair can have system tones on it at a given time. and when Control Links are down. containing the Tone-Clock circuit in the specified Port Network. Only one TDM bus of a TDM bus pair on each Port Network can have the control channel on it at a given time. standby = the Tone-Clock is part of a duplicated clock system and is ready to supply the system clock. y/n Shows whether the TDM bus has the control channel on it. this field is blank. If blanks are displayed it means that PNC is not duplicated. When Control Links are down.0 Issue 4 January 2008
469
. or the maintenance object has been demand busied out. The operational state of the TDM bus.). 1b. Blank if the system does not contain a PN. but is not currently active down = the Tone-Clock is not operational Blank = Control Links are down. The location of the IPSI or Tone-Clock circuit pack. active = the Tone-Clock supplies the system clock. The location is represented using the cabinet and carrier where the Tone-Clock resides (e. The TDM bus (“a” or “b”) specifies which half of the TDM bus is being displayed. out means that the Tone-Clock is out of service and has failed certain maintenance tests. A mode of “active” means the link is providing normal circuit and control functions for the Port Network. When Control Links are down. 2 of 3
TDM Bus
Service State
Control Channel
Dedicated Tones TONE/CLOCK
Service State
System Clock
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
status port-network field descriptions 2 of 3 Field Mode Description The mode is the current role of the link. The TDM bus identifier associated with the Port Network appears. A TDM bus service state of “out” means the bus has failed certain maintenance tests and has been taken out of service. 2a. 1a. 2b. y/n Shows whether the TDM bus has the system tones on it.. in means the Tone-Clock has been installed and is in normal operation. Shows which IPSI or Tone-Clock circuit pack supplies the system clock for that port network by displaying the mode of the Tone-Clock. Blank = Control Links are down. Only one Tone-Clock in each Port Network can be active at any given time. Blank if the system does not contain a PN. and when Control Links are down. A mode of “standby” means the link is part of a duplicated system and is ready to perform its functions but is not active. The operational state of the Tone-Clock circuit. A TDM bus service state of “in” means the bus is in normal operation. Blank = Control Links are down. etc. or the mode could not be retrieved from software. this field is blank.

The field contains a blank if the Maintenance/Test circuit pack is not present or has been taken out of service. and open bus leads were found.Maintenance SAT Commands
status port-network field descriptions 3 of 3 Field System Tones Description Shows which IPSI or Tone-Clock circuit pack supplies the system tones for that port network by displaying the mode of the Tone-Clock. where a fault is defined as either shorted to another lead or stuck at some value. When Control Links are down. When Control Links are down. bus leads test open as a result of physical damage to the backplane or the backplane’s connectors. Whether minor alarms are logged against the packet bus that is being displayed y/n. this field is blank. When Control Links are down. this field is blank. This field indicates the number of bus leads that have an open circuit between the Maintenance/Test circuit pack and bus terminator. A service state of “out” means either that the:
l l
PKT Service State
Packet bus is out of service and has failed certain maintenance tests Maintenance object has been demand busied out. A service state of blanks in this field means the system does not have the Packet Bus feature optioned. but is not currently active down means the Tone-Clock is not operational. A service state of “open lds” means the Maintenance/Test circuit pack query was run. this field is blank. Packet Bus identifier. active means that the Tone-Clock supplies the system tones. This field represents the operational state of the packet bus. When Control Links are down.
A service state of “reconfig” means that the Maintenance/Test circuit pack has swapped one or more signal leads because of lead faults detected during testing (high. This field indicates the number of faulty bus leads. Major Alarms Whether major alarms are logged against the packet bus that is being displayed y/n.and critical-reliability systems). This field may take on any integer value between 0 and 24. or because a bus terminator is missing. A service state of “in” means the packet bus has been installed and is in normal operation. Blank when Control Links are down. When Control Links are down. Media Gateways and Servers
. 3 of 3
Minor Alarms
Bus Faults
Open Bus Leads
470 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. this field is blank. standby means the Tone-Clock is part of a duplicated clock system and is ready to supply system tones. the same as the Port Network number. This information is determined by testing performed on the bus leads. This field may contain integer values between 0 and 24. Only one Tone-Clock in each Port Network can be active at any given time. This field contains a blank if the Maintenance/Test circuit pack is not present or has been taken out of service. service state information is unavailable.

Otherwise. Use get power-shutdown on carriers or a stack (cabinet) equipped with a TN2312BP IPSI or later IPSI circuit pack.
get power-shutdown 01 655A POWER SUPPLY SHUTDOWN CAUSE SLOT 01A00 01A15 01B00 01B15 01C00 01C15 01D00 01E00 CAUSE PS removed and reinserted PS removed and reinserted PS removed and reinserted PS removed and reinserted Commanded shutdown Commanded shutdown PS removed and reinserted AC input removed
Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008
471
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
Note:
get power-shutdown
cabinet carrier
cabinet location location of a G650 carrier within a G650 stack
init super-user inads craft dadmin Switch Circuit Pack Maintenance permissions
The following display shows a typical result of get power-shutdown. Note: When you reset a 655A power supply by unplugging it. keep it unplugged for 30 seconds to allow it to discharge. Use display error to see the time of the last shutdown. it retains the information it stored before it was unplugged.List of SAT Commands
power-shutdown
get power-shutdown
get power-shutdown [cabinet | carrier] Use get power-shutdown to see the cause of the last shutdown of a power supply in an individual media gateway or a stack.

carrier B. The ports 1 to 3 of the specified PRI endpoint are connected on an active call to ports 13 to 15 of board in location 1B19 (cabinet 1.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
release pri-endpoint
extension
extension number associated with desired PRI endpoint. circuit 1 to 6. Maintenance does background initialization testing on released ports. refer to [3]. Port 6 of the specified PRI endpoint is out of service.0 Issue 4 January 2008
473
. slot 19).
init inads craft nms
status pri-endpoint
This command displays internal software state information for diagnosis and can help locate facilities with which a PRI endpoint is communicating. Periodic and scheduled tests resume on released ports. Examples: status pri-endpoint 25012 status pri-endpoint 77868
init inads craft nms browse
The following example shows the output for status pri-endpoint 22501 and assumes the following:
l l
PRI endpoint ports for extension 22501 are in cabinet 1.
l l
Note:
Communication Manager Release 5. Note: A PRI endpoint can initiate and receive a call on any one or more of the B-channels making up the PRI endpoint.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
status pri-endpoint
extension
PRI endpoint extension to be displayed (see dial-plan). The switch attempts to negotiate with the far-end PRI terminal adapter activating PRI endpoint port (B-channel). and background maintenance testing is being performed on the port. Status information for each of the B-channels making up the PRI endpoint display in addition to some overall PRI endpoint information. For details of the test sequence.List of SAT Commands
release pri-endpoint
Use release pri-endpoint to remove PRI endpoint ports (B-channels) associated with specified PRI endpoint from maintenance busy states. carrier B. Ports 4 and 5 of the specified PRI endpoint are idle. slot 20.

status pri-endpoint field descriptions
status pri-endpoint field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Extension Width Signaling Group ID Originating Auto Restoration Description PRI endpoint extension Administered number of B-channels associated with the specified PRI endpoint ID number of the signaling group that handles the signaling for the ports in the specified PRI endpoint Administered option for the auto restore feature (restores calls originated from this PRI endpoint in the case of network failure): y restoration option enabled n restoration option disabled The number of B-channels active on a call The number of B-channels in the in-service/idle state Port locations (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) for each of the B-channels making up the PRI endpoint. The user is prompted to press the NxtPg key to continue the display. Media Gateways and Servers
. 1 of 2
B-Channels Active B-Channels Idle Port
474 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.Maintenance SAT Commands
status pri-endpoint 22501
page 1 of 1
PRI-ENDPOINT STATUS Extension: 22501 Signaling Group ID: 3 Originating Auto Restoration? n Width: 6 B-Channels Active: 3 B-Channels Idle: 2
Port 01B2001 01B2002 01B2003 01B2004 01B2005 01B2006
Service State in-service/active in-service/active in-service/active in-service/idle in-service/idle out-of-service-NE
Test In Progress n n n n n y
Connected Port 01B1913 01B1914 01B1915
Note that the line listing of each B-channel’s status may continue onto the next page.

For more information see Busyout and Release Commands on page 33.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
display profile-base
display profile-base screen display
display profile-base User Profile Base Profile Base: 10000 This screen is used to display the Linux Group number that corresponds to CommunicationManager user profile 0.
Communication Manager Release 5. The screen name is User Profile Base. and IP calls that were administered active prior to busying out the link.List of SAT Commands
Use release processor-ip-interface to release the processor ethernet interface link and to bring up the processor channel applications.
display profile-base screen field descriptions
display profile-base field descriptions Field Profile Base Description Linux Group number that corresponds to Communication Manager user profile 0.
profile-base
display profile-base
display profile-base Use display profile-base to see the Linux Group number that corresponds to Communication Manager user profile 0. ip-services.0 Issue 4 January 2008
477
. Profile Base default number is 10000.

0 Issue 4 January 2008
479
. Enter 0 for attendant.
display public-unknown-numbering
display public-unknown-numbering n [ext-digits] Use display public-unknown-numbering to see the administration for name and number display on display-equipped stations in an ISDN network. the first extension on the screen Example: display public-unknown-numbering 5 display public-unknown-numbering 5 ext-digits 10010
ext-digits
See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509) for a screen example and field descriptions.
list public-unknown-numbering
list public-unknown-numbering start n [ext digits | count]
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
See Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509) for a screen example and field descriptions. and for more information on ISDN Call Identification Display and Numbering-Public/Unknown. Ex -Len) in the extension being administered.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
display publicunknownnumbering
n
Number of digits (extension length. and for more information on ISDN Call Identification Display and Numbering-Public/Unknown.

Can be up to 7 digits. Number of the ISDN trunk group carrying the call. Total number of digits to send. the entry is not allowed l If the Total CPN Len is 0. but cannot be greater than the Ext Len field.
Ext Code
Ext Len Total CPN Len Trk Grp(s)
registered-ip-stations
list registered-ip-stations
list registered-ip-stations
Communication Manager Release 5. l blank = the extension is sent unchanged. l If the CPN Prefix length plus the extension length exceeds the Total CPN Len. no calling party number information is provided to the called party and no connected party number information is provided to the calling party. excess leading digits of the extension are deleted when formulating the CPN. no calling party number information is provided to the called party and no connected party number information is provided to the calling party. attd = attendant 0 = the Ext Len field must be 1 and the DDD number must be 10 digits. If code 123 is also listed. l If the CPN Prefix length plus the extension length is less than the Total CPN Len. as entered on the command line (list public-unknown-numbering n). If 0. Ext Code of 12 represents all extensions of the screen 12xx. excluding any explicitly listed longer codes. Use in countries where the public network is able to insert the appropriate CPN Prefix to form an external DID number l If the CPN Prefix length matches the Total CPN Len. 0 to 9 or blank Example: When Ext Len is 4.0 Issue 4 January 2008
481
. the Ext Code 12 represents all extensions of the screen 12xx except extensions of the screen 123x. blank = IEs are not dependent on which trunk group carries the call.List of SAT Commands
list public-unknown-numbering field descriptions Field CPN Prefix Description The number that is added to the beginning of the extension to form a Calling or Connected Number. the extension number is not used to formulate the PN number. or the range of trunk groups that use the same CPN Prefix. Number of digits for the extension.

23.2
12 12
172. this is the port of the shared-control’s DCP set. for example. this is the circuit-switched port that was assigned to this extension number before the IP endpoint registered to the extension.200 172.134 172. Location of the registered station. Network region number assigned to the endpoint. Station Ext/ Orig Port First line: Station extension number Second line: Port number assigned to the extension that is now under the control of the specified endpoint. 1 of 2
Set Type Product ID
Prod Rel Station IP address Net Rgn
Communication Manager Release 5.20. this can be the product ID of a softphone that is registered to a hardphone extension. as the C-LAN or processor IP address or port location.20. no second line appears. Administered set type for the extension. The records for each endpoint appear vertically adjacent to each other. a softphone. For an IP endpoint.1 2.23. For example.80. and the release information. provided from the endpoint during registration.
list registered-ip-stations REGISTERED IP STATIONS Station Ext/ Orig Port 1234567890123 1234567 20000 20001 Set Product Prod Station Net Gatekeeper TCP Type ID Rel IP Address Rgn IP Address Skt 1234567 1234567890 12345 123456789012345 123 123456789012345 1 Page 1 of 1
4620 4620
IP_Phone IP_Phone
2. For a shared-control extension where the Telephone is a DCP set. provided from the endpoint to the gatekeeper during registration.200 172.134
y y
list registered-ip-stations field descriptions
list registered-ip-stations 1 of 2 Field Description
For shared-control endpoints (an IP telephone and IP Softphone are in service on the same extension simultaneously).List of SAT Commands
The following example shows a typical result of list registered-ip-stations. If a softphone is not taking over a DCP set. Product ID of the registered endpoint.23.0 Issue 4 January 2008
483
.23. both endpoints register. Release number of the endpoint.80.

Hardware tests specific to the maintenance object are performed to verify that it is functioning. a softphone. y/n Indicates whether or not the TCP signaling socket is established for the IP station. See the description of the related busyout command for details of command execution and interactions.
484 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. For an IP endpoint.Maintenance SAT Commands
list registered-ip-stations 2 of 2 Field Orig Port Description Port number assigned to the extension that is now under the control of the specified endpoint. Some release commands trigger recovery actions by the system. server. the command aborts. except that the word release is entered instead of busyout. For each maintenance object. this is the circuit-switched port that was assigned to this extension number before the IP endpoint registered to the extension. assuming the health of the component(s) permits. or other device that is performing the role of the H. See the description of the related busyout command for details of command syntax. release is entered in the same fashion as the associated busyout command.323 gatekeeper for this endpoint. for example. such as the refresh of a standby PNC. Media Gateways and Servers
. this is the port of the shared-control’s DCP set. For a shared-control extension where the Telephone is a DCP set. The IP address of the C-LAN. 2 of 2
Gatekeeper IP Address TCP Skt
release
Release commands release specified maintenance objects from the maintenance busyout state and puts them back into service. If a release command is entered for an object that is not busied out.

When a release aborts or fails.List of SAT Commands
For more information see Busyout and Release Commands on page 33.0 Issue 4 January 2008
485
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
release xxxx
location maintenancename [address]
Location of the given maintenance object.
remote-access
status remote-access
status remote-access
Communication Manager Release 5. See Common Error Codes for maintenance commands on page 34. Examples: release board 01c11 release data-module 310 release Tone-Clock 2a release ds1-fac 02e01a release fiber-link 13 release port 03a1012 release station extension
The identity of the maintenance object and the result of executing release appears on an output screen similar to the related busyout screen. Use the same format as that used for the related busyout command. an error code indicating the reason appears.

Media Gateways and Servers
. Canceling does not log off the terminal.Maintenance SAT Commands
security violations
monitor security-violations
monitor security-violations Use monitor security-violations to see the following information about failed attempts to access the system:
l l l
the time of the violation the login entered the port accessed during the failed login attempt trunk-group number member number extension
For remote access violations additional information appears:
l l l
A total of 16 entries are maintained for each type of access. The monitor security-violations report is automatically updated every 30 seconds until the command is canceled by pressing CANCEL.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
Note:
monitor security-violations
init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse
security violations output
monitor security-violations output field descriptions Date Time Login The date of the security violation (MM/DD) The time of the logged security violation (HH:MM) The login ID that was entered as part of the violation attempt. Note: monitor security-violations is not available in ASA.
492 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

The extension used to access the RAP (remote access violations only). Mbr Ext The trunk group that carried the incoming remote access attempt (remote access violations only).List of SAT Commands
System Management Violations
System management violations field descriptions Port Type The type of port through which the login violation was attempted: SYS-PORT .0 Issue 4 January 2008
493
. The trunk-group member number associated with the trunk from which the remote access attempt terminated (remote access violations only). Extension assigned to the data module that was used to attempt the failed login.
session
enable session
enable session enables a telnet session on the TN2302 and TN2602 media-processor circuit packs.
Ext
Remote Access Violations
Remote access violations field descriptions TG No. If a data module was not used (as in the case of dedicated EIA connections) the field is blank. MAINT .a physical connection to the G3-MT terminal connector on a PN’s Maintenance circuit pack.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
enable session
init craft inads
Communication Manager Release 5.a dial-in connection to a system port.

list set-data SET DATA Building Floor Room -------Cable Color/ Jack Cord Len Set Type ----.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
list set-data
schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25.0 Issue 4 January 2008
495
.323 4001 793 Analog 1 0 2500+ n n Speaker Headset Mounting -------n n Page 1 of 1
Extension --------4000
Name ---sdfsd
list set-data field descriptions
list set-data field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Ext Name Building.List of SAT Commands
Use list set-data to see phone information administered from the Site Data and Station screens.
The following example shows the screen from list set-data. Floor. Room Cable Jack Color Cord Len Speaker Headset Description station extension number.-------0 H. administered on the Station screen name used in the system directory physical location of the station identifies the cable that connects the phone jack to the system identifies the jack where the phone is plugged in color of phone length of the cord attached to the receiver y/n y/n 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5.

and for signaling group types ATM.323. The ISDN-PRI trunk group number whose incoming call-handling table handles incoming NCA-TSCs through this signaling group If more than one trunk group is assigned to this signaling group. The number of seconds the system waits for a response from the far end before invoking Look Ahead Routing. and Used for DCS on the trunk group screen is y. this trunk group is the one that can accept incoming calls This field appears when trunk Group Type is ISDN. H. Maximum number of Call Associated (CA) TSCs. Use to support ETSI-ISDN Completion of Calls (Auto Callback) functionality.323. H. f = Feature Plus g = ANSI. The number of NCA TSCs that are administered.virtual connections established within a D-Channel in the facility so that users can transport non-call control user-user information. a = AT&T Customer Supplementary Services when Country Code is 1A on the DS1 screen. Appears when the Group Type field is isdn-pri on the DS1 Circuit Pack screen or h.Maintenance SAT Commands
display signaling-group field descriptions
display signaling-group field descriptions 1 of 3 Field Grp No Group Type Max NCA TSCs Max CA TSCs Remote Office Trunk Group for NCA TSC Trunk Group for Channel Selection TSC Supplementary Service Protocol Description The signaling group number The type of signal format (ISDN-PRI. b = ISO Q SIT c = ETSI. and ISDN-PRI. ATM. d = ECMA QSIG e allows DCS with rerouting. Media Gateways and Servers
. 1 of 3
T303 Timer (sec)
498 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.323 on the Signaling Group screen. a = Bellcore Supplementary Services when Country Code is 1B on the DS1 screen a = Nortel Proprietary Supplementary Services when Country Code is 1C on the DS1 screen. SIP) Maximum number of Non-Call Associated (NCA) Temporary Signaling Connections (TSCs) . when DCS with Rerouting is y.

It appears only for H. when IP transport performance falls below limits administered on the Maintenance-Related System-Parameters screen. and saves on bandwidth resources and improves sound quality of VoIP transmissions. y = the system automatically removes from service trunks assigned to this signaling group. administered on the Node Names screen.0 Issue 4 January 2008
499
. administered on the Node Names screen and the IP Interfaces screen. The network region number that is assigned to the far-end of the trunk group.323 signaling groups. and requires a location request to obtain a signaling address in its signaling protocol y when the signaling group serves a remote office (gateway) n when the signaling group serves a gatekeeper y = inter-Communication Manager server connections n = the local and/or remote PBX uses a non-Avaya server. The node name for the far-end C-LAN IP interface used for trunks assigned to this signaling group. A port number assigned to both near-end and far-end systems for signaling. The same port number assigned to the near-end listen port. A blank indicates the region of the near-end node n when the far-end PBX uses a Communication Manager server y when the far-end PBX uses a server that is not a Communication Manager server.List of SAT Commands
display signaling-group field descriptions 2 of 3 Field Near-end Node Name Far-end Node Name Near-end Listen Port Far-end Listen Port Far-end Network Region LRQ Required Description The node name for the C-LAN IP interface on this switch. y allows direct audio connections between IP endpoints. 2 of 3
RRQ Required Calls Share IP Signaling Connection Bypass if IP Threshold Exceeded? Direct IP-IP Audio Connection
Communication Manager Release 5. 1719 is used when LRQ is y.

such as ringback or busy tone. ALERTing causes the public network in many countries to play ringback tone to the caller. 22666 Page 2 of 5
Enabled Y n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n
Established permanent
Digits
Appl.Maintenance SAT Commands
display signaling-group field descriptions 3 of 3 Field IP Audio Hairpinning Interworking Message Description y allows IP endpoints to be connected through the IP circuit pack on the switch in IP format. dcs
ID 24
500 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. 3 of 3 The following is an example of the output of display signaling-group page 2
display signaling-group 4 ADMINISTERED NCA TSC ASSIGNMENT Service/Feature: TSC Index 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: 9: 10: 11: 12: 13: 14: 15: 16: Local Ext. Select this value only if the DS1 is connected to the public network. PROGress causes the public network to cut through the B-channel and allow the caller to hear tones. 64666 As-needed Inactivity Time-out (min): Mach. Determines what message the switch sends when an incoming ISDN trunk call interworks (is routed over a non-ISDN trunk group). without going through the TDM bus. Dest. Media Gateways and Servers
. over the non-ISDN trunk. and it is determined that callers hear silence (rather than ringback or busy tone) when a call incoming over the DS1 interworks to a non-ISDN trunk.

2 of 2
No.Maintenance SAT Commands
list signaling-group field descriptions 2 of 2 Field FAS Description Facility Associated Signaling (FAS).
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
set signaling-group
group#
The number assigned to the signaling group. This D-Channel is administered to be the secondary D-Channel. during the backup procedure. during the backup procedure. Maximum number of Call Associated (CA) TSCs. If the parameter is “n”. This is identical to a DS1 interface. switches at opposite ends of the PRI select the primary D-Channel to be put into service. If. Media Gateways and Servers
. The number of trunk boards having members belonging to this signaling group The D-Channel administered to be the primary channel. this is referred to as Non-Facility Associated Signaling (NFAS). A signaling group is a collection of B-channels signaled for by a designated single D-channel or set of D-channels over an ISDN-PRI link. If.virtual connections established within a D-Channel in the facility so that users can transport non-call control user-user information. Trunk Brds Primary D-Channel
Secondary D-Channel
Max NCA TSCs
Max CA TSCs No.
502 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. This channel will only appear if the signaling group is an NFAS signaling group. The primary D-channel becomes the secondary D-channel. The number of NCA TSCs that are administered. both channels are in the same state. in which a D-Channel carries signaling information for only those B-Channels on the same facility as the D-Channel. switches at opposite ends of the PRI select the primary D-Channel to be put into service. Maximum number of Non-Call Associated (NCA) Temporary Signaling Connections (TSCs) . both channels are in the same state. in which a B-Channel can belong to any signaling group as long as the maximum number of DS1’s for a signaling group is not exceeded. Adm’d NCA TSCs
set signaling-group
set signaling-group group# Use set signaling-group to set the secondary D-channel in the specified signaling group to be the primary D-channel.

Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
status signaling-group
group#
The administered number associated with each signaling group. or combination of D-channels over an ISDN-BRI.
The following information is given for status signaling-group for both primary and secondary D-channels.0 Issue 4 January 2008
503
. if any. type.List of SAT Commands
status signaling-group
status signaling-group group# Use status signaling-group to see the service state. and port location of the primary and secondary D-channels within an ISDN-PRI signaling group. A signaling group is a set of B-channels signaled for by a designated single D-channel.
status signaling-group 1 STATUS SIGNALING-GROUP Group ID: 1 Type: facility associated signaling Group State: in-service Primary D-Channel 01C1924 Level 3 State: Secondary D-Channel Level 3 State: Page 1 of 1
Link:
1
Port:
in-service
Link:
Port:
Communication Manager Release 5.

See ISDN-SGR (ISDN-PRI Signaling Group) on page 920 in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. An explicit identifier specifies members of the DS1 trunk group across its ISDN-PRI link.Maintenance SAT Commands
status signaling-group field descriptions
status signaling-group field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Group ID Type Description An administered number that identifies the signaling group.
l
l
Group State
in-service: one of the D-channels signaling for the group is in service out-of-service: neither D-channel in the group is in service If there is no D-channel backup and the primary D-channel is out-of-service. A single D-channel on one facility provides signaling for every member. Media Gateways and Servers
. With D-channel backup.
l
facility associated signaling: Every member is carried on a single DS1-associated facility. a second D-channel is assigned to assume control of signaling if the primary D-channel fails. the signaling group is in an out-of-service state. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190) for more information about group types. Link transporting the D-channel 1 of 2
Link
504 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. non-facility associated signaling: Members can include trunks on several different associated DS1 facilities. Facility-associated signaling groups support only simplex D-channel configurations.

An ISDN-PRI signaling group is a set of B-channels whose signaling messages are carried together on a designated D-channel or set of D-channels. which is transitional in nature. and not carrying any layer 3 call-control messages on logical link 0.0. standby: the D-channel is in the multiple-frame-established state at layer 2. Only when the ISDN SERVICE message is sent over the interface. no-link: no link is administered for the D-channel 2 of 2
test signaling-group
test signaling-group group# [short | long] [repeat repeat# | clear] [schedule] Use test signaling-group to validate the administration of a signaling group. and run a series of diagnostic tests on it.List of SAT Commands
status signaling-group field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Port Level 3 State Description Address of the port transporting either the primary or secondary D-channel State of the primary or secondary D-channels: in-service: the D-channel is in the multiple-frame-established state at layer 2 carrying normal call-control signaling at layer 3. and the far end of the interface responds with a SERVICE ACKnowledge message is the D-channel placed in the “in-service” state. System Technician intervention is required to retrieve a D-channel from this state. maintenance-busy: the D-channel is not in the multiple-frame-established state at layer 2. but is periodically requested by layer 3 to attempt to establish the link. This state is entered automatically when an active D-channel is declared failed.0 Issue 4 January 2008
505
. out-of-service: the D-channel is in the TEI-assigned state at layer 2. wait: an attempt has been made by one side of the interface to establish layer 3 peer communications as part of the process of going to the “in-service” state.
Communication Manager Release 5. manual-out-of-service: system technician intervention has caused the D-channel to be placed in the TEI-assigned state at layer 2. A D-channel that has been placed in the “maintenance-busy” state may be placed in the “out-of-service” state without system technician intervention.

Second wait time threshold. calls queued to group of reserve agents. when exceeded. calls routed to contingency reserve agents Estimated wait time for calls queuing to hunt group/skill group Oldest call waiting time in queue for the hunt group/skill group 2 of 2 This table shows data for each skilled hunt group.Maintenance SAT Commands
list skill-status field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Extension Service Level Level 1 Threshold Level 2 Threshold EWT OCW Description Extension number of the hunt group/skill group and the assigned service level targets (represents percentage of calls answered in a specific number of seconds) First wait time threshold. when value is exceeded. Skilled hunt group details Group Number Service Level Supervisor Dynamic Percent Adjustment Service Level Target (percentage and time) Adjusted Level 2 Threshold (status) Group Name Call Selection Override Dynamic Queue Position Level 1 Threshold SLS State (status) Group Extension Activate on Oldest Call Waiting Service Objective Adjusted Level 1 Threshold (status) Expected Wait Time (status) Group Type Dynamic Threshold Adjustment Weighted Service Level (status) Level 2 Threshold Time in Queue of Call at Head of Queue (status)
socket-usage
See: monitor socket-usage on page 508 status socket-usage on page 509
monitor socket-usage
monitor socket-usage
508 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
.

0 Issue 4 January 2008
509
.
monitor socket-usage SOCKET USAGE Total Registered IP Endpoints: 20 Registered IP Endpoints with TCP Signaling Socket Established: 10
status socket-usage
status socket-usage Use status socket-usage to show a snapshot of the individual socket usage for each C-LAN or Processor Ethernet information.List of SAT Commands
Use monitor socket-usage to show how many IP endpoints are registered and how many of those registered IP endpoints have their TCP signaling channels established (connected). and to list the system’s:
l l l l
number of registered IP endpoints number of registered IP endpoints with TCP signaling sockets established number of sockets used number of sockets on the system
Status socket-usage replaces status clan-usage.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
monitor socket-usage The following example shows the output for monitor socket-usage. The monitor socket-usage screen is periodically updated until the user cancels out of the command.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
status socket-usage
schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25
Communication Manager Release 5.

Loc Board/Suffix Socket Usage
Net Rgn
510 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Network Region assigned to the circuit pack on the add ip-interfces screen. Type of interface: C-LAN = TN799 circuit pack procr = Processor Ethernet circuit pack The cabinet/carrier/slot location of the C-LAN or Processor Ethernet circuit pack The circuit pack designation suffix. Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following example shows the output for status socket-usage. The first number = number of sockets in use on the circuit pack when the command was entered. The second number = value administered in the Number of C-LAN Sockets Before Warning field using the add/change ip-interfaces command. The number of TCP signaling sockets currently in use by C-LANs and Processor Ethernet circuit packs. The number of registered IP endpoints that have their TCP signaling channels established. The socket number does not include sockets used by adjuncts.
status socket-usage SOCKET USAGE Total Registered IP Endpoints: 6883 Registered IP Endpoints With TCP Signaling Socket Established: 6705 Total Socket Usage: 08262/24576 Intf Type Board Socket Sfx Usage 003/2500 000/400 Net Rgn 6 2 Intf Type CLAN CLAN Board Sfx Socket Usage 007/400 000/400 Net Rgn 1 2 Page 1 of 4
Loc
Loc
procr CLAN 03A04
D
02A09 D 03A05 D
status socket-usage field descriptions
status socket-usage field descriptions Field Total Registered IP Endpoints Registered IP Endpoints with TCP Signaling Socket Established Total Socket Usage Intf Type Description The number of IP endpoints registered with the server.

Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
sp-link
See: busyout sp-link on page 511 release sp-link on page 512 status sp-link on page 512 test sp-link on page 513
busyout sp-link
busyout sp-link Use busyout sp-link to put the system printer link into a maintenance busy state and prevent access to the system printer. The system printer link is a link from the switch to an external printer. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. see Common Input Parameters on page 25. Common Command Output Screens on page 28.0 Issue 4 January 2008
511
. See status link on page 358 for more details on links. For more information. This link is created by administering the system printer extension and setting up a call to the system printer.

See status link on page 358 for more details on links. Media Gateways and Servers
. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33.Maintenance SAT Commands
release sp-link
release sp-link Use release sp-link to release the system printer link from a maintenance busy state and enable access to the system printer. See busyout sp-link for more information.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
release sp-link
init inads craft
status sp-link
status sp-link Use status sp-link to see a summary of the operational state of the system printer link. See status link on page 358 for more details on links. The following display shows a typical result of status sp-link.
status sp-link SYSTEM PRINTER LINK STATUS Link State: down Number of Retries: 0 Maintenance Busy? no
512 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

or if an extension was not administered.List of SAT Commands
status sp-link field descriptions
status sp-link field descriptions Field Link State Description The operational state of the link:
l l
up — A call is currently set up to the system printer. extension not administered — An extension is not administered on the features-related system parameters screen for the system printer. Whether maintenance testing is being performed on the system printer link.
l
Number of Retries Maintenance Busy
The number of times the switch tried to establish the link since a request to set it up was received. The system printer link is a link from the switch to an external printer. down — The link is administered but a call is not currently set up to the printer.0 Issue 4 January 2008
513
. This field appears only when the link is down.
test sp-link
test sp-link [long | short] [schedule] Use test sp-link to perform tests on the system printer link to determine if the link is up. Examples: test sp-link test sp-link test sp-link test sp-link test sp-link
init inads craft
short
sh l schedule sh sch
Communication Manager Release 5. See status pms-link on page 453 for more information. down. See status link on page 358 for more details on links.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
test sp-link
short long schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25. Blank if the system printer link is not administered.

Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
reset ssh-keys board
location
location of the board on which to reset the dynamic host keys
craft dadmin (and higher)
Dynamic host keys
Dynamic keys are inherently more secure than static keys because:
l l l
If static keys for one circuit pack are compromised.Host name . imply a rogue server. when the server generates a new public/private key pair (which happens the first time the board initializes or when the user decides). Before you reset the dynamic host keys with reset ssh-keys board. .
514 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. the client prompts the user to accept the key when logging into the server. Users can change dynamic keys at any time.Maintenance SAT Commands
ssh-keys
reset ssh-keys
reset ssh-keys board location Use reset ssh-keys board (SAT command) to generate new SSH dynamic host keys on C-LAN and VAL circuit packs for craft/dadmin logins and higher. Because clients have the server’s public key information stored on them.IP address . The probability of compromise is reduced when each circuit pack has its own dynamic key. but not necessarily. Media Gateways and Servers
. This is to make the client user aware that the server’s public key is not what it used to be and this may. the technician should continue login. all circuit packs are compromised. A technician encountering a situation where the server’s public key is not what it used to be should determine if the server’s keys were changed since the last servicing.use busyout board to busyout the C-LAN and VAL circuit packs.
l
If they were.Firmware
Dynamic host keys include:
Public key exchange
TN circuit packs support dynamic host keys.

there is a security issue. see Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509).List of SAT Commands
l
If not. For field descriptions.
Communication Manager Release 5. and the technician should notify the appropriate personnel.0 Issue 4 January 2008
515
.
station
See: add station on page 515 busyout station on page 517 change station on page 518 list station on page 518 list trace station on page 611 release station on page 520 status station on page 521 test station on page 539
add station
add station extension | next Use add station to administer a new station.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
add station
extension next
Extension number of the new station Assigns the next available extension number to the new station
The following screens show examples of the Station screen.

list station
list station [ext x] [to-ext x] | | [count n] | [schedule]
l l
[port x] |
[type x] |
[movable x]
list station movable always – shows extensions available for moves anytime list station movable done – shows extensions that had the Automatic Moves field set to once. Media Gateways and Servers
. see Administrator Guide for Avaya Communication Manager (03-300509). For field descriptions. and have moved list station movable error – shows mis-administered. Common Command Output Screens on page 28.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use busyout station to busyout an installed or uninstalled station extension. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33.
change station
change station extension See add station on page 515 for examples of the Station screen.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
busyout station
extension
Extension number per dial plan Example: busyout station 12345
init inads craft
For more information. non-serialized extensions list station movable no – shows extensions not available to be moved list station movable once – shows extensions available to be moved once
l l l
518 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. see Common Input Parameters on page 25.

enabled = Extension to Cellular is enabled disabled = Extension to Cellular is disabled Station or attendant extension One or two of the following
l l l l l
Description
none total stat-stat outward terminate
Limit Incoming Calls Message Waiting
State of the Limit Number of Concurrent Call (LNNC). Whether there is a message waiting for the station. 1 of 4
Off-PBX Service State
l l l
522 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.
l l l
AUDIX PMS blank if no messages are waiting inservice/idle = there is no OPTIM call at the station inservice/active = there is an OPTIM call at the station out-of-service = the station is busied out. Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
status station field descriptions
status station field descriptions. GENERAL STATUS and HOSPITALITY STATUS 1 of 4 Field GENERAL STATUS Active Coverage Option Administered Type Call Parked Connected Ports Connected Type Download Status EC 500 Status Extension Group Cntrl Restr Specifies the active coverage pa Administered station type Whether the station has a call parked (y/n) Port locations of the facilities to which the telephone/softphone is connected: cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit The type of phone connected to this port Status of soft key download.

GENERAL STATUS and HOSPITALITY STATUS 2 of 4 Field Parameter Download Description Current status of downloading terminal parameter information
l
complete = the information was successfully downloaded sometime in the past pending = the system is waiting to download the information. has OPTIM calls and is not physically off-hook) in-service/in-tsa (Terminal Self Administration) out of service (the station is busied-out) 2 of 4
l
l l
Communication Manager Release 5. not applicable = this is not a programmable station. if applicable) in-service/idle (the station is AWOH or hardware is otherwise not present.
l
l
Port Ring Cut Off Activated SAC Activated Service Link Extension Service Link Port Service State
Port location of the endpoint: cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit. The download will complete through a background periodic test or demand test.List of SAT Commands
status station field descriptions. if applicable) in-service/off-hook in-service/disconnected (no OPTIM calls.0 Issue 4 January 2008
523
. with no OPTIM calls if applicable) in-service/active (with OPTIM. Whether ring cut-off is activated (y/n) Whether Send All Calls is activated on this extension (y/n) Extension for the softphone off-premise destination on a telecommuter configuration Shows the port used to establish a connection to the softphone off-premise destination on a telecommuter configuration State of the telephone endpoint
l l l l
in-service/on-hook (with no OPTIM calls.

status station triggers TCP socket establishment. status station triggers TCP socket establishment. Indicates whether a TCP signaling channel is established for the endpoint. Appears only for IP Telephones and Softphones. GENERAL STATUS and HOSPITALITY STATUS 3 of 4 Field Shd TCP Signal Status: Description Indicates whether a TCP signaling channel is established for the endpoint on a shared control connection.
l
l l
Softphone Signaling Softphone Port TCP Signal Status The port for the softphone controlling an IP telephone.
l
connected = Endpoint is registered and TCP signaling link is established connecting = Endpoint is registered and TCP signaling l0000000ink is in the process of being connected not connected = Endpoint is not registered on-demand = Endpoint is registered and TCP signaling link is not established. For IP endpoints with on-demand status. test station triggers TCP socket establishment.
l
connected = Endpoint is registered and TCP signaling link is established connecting = Endpoint is registered and TCP signaling link is in the process of being connected not connected = Endpoint is not registered on-demand = Endpoint is registered and TCP signaling link is not established. For all IP endpoints except "soft" IP endpoints such as IP Softphone and IP Agent. 3 of 4
l
l l
524 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. test station triggers TCP socket establishment. Appears only for IP Telephones and Softphones. For IP endpoints with on-demand status. Media Gateways and Servers
. For all IP endpoints except "soft" IP endpoints such as IP Softphone and IP Agent.Maintenance SAT Commands
status station field descriptions.

0 Issue 4 January 2008
525
. GENERAL STATUS and HOSPITALITY STATUS 4 of 4 Field User Cntrl Restr Description One or two of the following
l l l l l
none total stat-stat outward terminate
HOSPITALITY STATUS Awaken at User DND Group DND Room Status Time that Automatic Wakeup Call is scheduled activated/not activated Status of Do Not Disturb activated/not activated Status of group Do Not Disturb Whether a room is occupied or not
l l l
non-guest room vacant occupied 4 of 4
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
status station field descriptions.

page 2
Page 2 status station displays the part ID of the station for status station. page 2
status station field descriptions.Grek.Lat1.. if available.Cyrl. If this field shows Unavailable. the software was unable to determine the Part ID Number..
status station 30001 GENERAL STATUS CONNECTED STATION INFORMATION Part ID Number: unavailable Serial Number: unavailable Station Lock Active? TOD Station Lock? page 2 of 7
UNICODE DISPLAY INFORMATION Native Name Scripts:N/A Display Message Scripts:0x08000001:latn.Arab.Maintenance SAT Commands
status station.LatA. CONNECTED STATION INFORMATION and UNICODE DISPLAY INFORMATION 1 of 2 Field GENERAL STATUS CONNECTED STATION INFORMATION Part ID Number Part ID Number (comcode) of the telephone.Hebr. 1 of 2 Description
526 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.ChiS Station Supported Scripts:0x000801b7:Latn. CF Destination Ext: Enhanced Call Forwarding Destinations Internal Extarnal Unconditional: Busy: No Reply: Team Button Monitoring Stations
status station field descriptions. Media Gateways and Servers
.

N/A. and up to 7 language acronyms. the script used for the native name of the station: 0x plus the hex value of the script tag. and up to 7 language acronyms. or on a Unicode-enabled station. N/A.
l
Unavailable = the software is unable to determine the Serial Number. or No Rely ECF types. Busy. Shows all monitoring extensions that supervise the monitored station 2 of 2 The following example shows the output for status station with Active IP Phone Conference call on an S8700 IP-PNC. Call forwarding destination extension.
UNICODE DISPLAY INFORMATION Native Name Scripts Display Message Scripts Station Supported Scripts N/A. if any. This data is dependent on the connected ports (page 1 of the Status Station screen). Indicates whether the station is within a Time of Day lock interval.
CF Destination Ext
Enhanced Call Forwarding Destinations Team Button Monitoring Stations
Communication Manager Release 5. and up to 7 language acronyms. and the internal or external destination for each. the script supported by the telephone: 0x plus the hex value of the script tag based on the scripts supported by Unicode capable endpoints. Errored = the serial number received is not in the correct format. This example shows IP audio parameters used for each IP hop. l blank when Extension to Cellular is enabled l appears for mapped extensions when Extension to Cellular is disabled Up to six Enhanced Call Forwarding destination numbers for Unconditional.0 Issue 4 January 2008
527
. the script used for the display language of the station: 0x plus the hex value of the script tag. or on a Unicode-enabled station. or on a Unicode-enabled station.List of SAT Commands
status station field descriptions.
l
Station Lock Active TOD Station Lock
Indicates whether the station has been locked using Station Lock. CONNECTED STATION INFORMATION and UNICODE DISPLAY INFORMATION 2 of 2 Field Serial Number Description Serial number of the telephone.

and unregistered or inactive H. Media Gateways and Servers
.323 station) or CCMS (IP SoftPhone) IP signaling address and IP port. Label administered for an IP address. This field is blank for an unregistered H. endpoints using Q. The C-LAN port serving the H. This field is blank for IP SoftPhone endpoints.245: Switch Port H. IP Port is 0-65535. or when H.245 signaling link. This field is blank for IP SoftPhone endpoints.323 station.931 is used.323 station.323 station.245 IP signaling address and IP Port. The port number is always 17 for the “ethernet” port of the C-LAN. This field is blank for an unregistered H.245.323 station. Set-end Q. Set-end H.245 IP signaling address and TCP/IP port. A number given to a set of IP addresses to indicate they have a common set of characteristics. This field is blank for an unregistered H.931 (H.245: Set-end IP Addr and Port Node Name (for Call Control) Network Region (for Call Control) The C-LAN board location serving the switch end of the IP signaling link. This field is blank for an unregistered H.931 IP signaling address and IP port.245.931 tunneling of H.245: Switch-end IP Addr and Port H. Switch-end H. Switch-end Q. CALL CONTROL SIGNALING Field Description
CALL CONTROL SIGNALING Call Control Signaling fields show information for both endpoints when an IP telephone and IP Softphone are in service on the same extension simultaneously (shared-control). IP Port has a decimal value 0-65535.931 tunneling of H. IP Port is 0-65535.323 stations.245 tunneling in Q. CALL CONTROL SIGNALING
status station field descriptions. endpoints using Q. a VPhone. The port number is 17 for the “ethernet” port. IP port is a decimal value 0-65535.323 stations.Maintenance SAT Commands
status station field descriptions. IP Signaling: Switch Port IP Signaling: Switch-end IP Addr and Port IP Signaling: Set-end IP Addr and Port H.
530 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. and unregistered or inactive H.

stations with no established audio path. xxxxxxx Audio The type of audio active for the station. Blank .audio is carried directly to service link port 1 of 3
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
status station field descriptions AUDIO CHANNEL
status station field descriptions.3. 711-A. or for a telecommuter IP SoftPhone with circuit-switched audio link. This field is blank for an idle station with no audio link. xxxxxxxx is one of these values: G. Label administered for an IP address. Audio codec selected.0 Issue 4 January 2008
531
.711-MU. Set-end IP audio address and IP port.1-6. An idle IP SoftPhone or H. Port is a decimal value 0-65535. G. or for telecommuter stations. Product Information fields show the information for both endpoints for Softphone and Telephone Shared Control.
l l l l l
Other-end IP Addr and Port Set-end IP Addr and Port Node Name Network Region Audio Connection Type
ip-tdm ip hairpin ip direct ip-idle blank .3/6.323 stations.3. Port is a decimal value 0-65535. 729B.323 endpoint for audio. or for a telecommuter IP SoftPhone with circuit-switched audio link. 729. PCM.1-5.
l
PCM .723.729A.323 station with an as-needed service link shows no audio port.3. 729A.1-5. or for stations using a H.no audio path is present
l
Port / Shared Port
The physical port used to provide audio path for the endpoint. AUDIO CHANNEL 1 of 3 Field Description
AUDIO CHANNEL Audio Channel fields show information for only the IP Telephone when an IP telephone and IP Softphone are in service on the same extension simultaneously.723. G. or 723. 711-MU. 729-AB.the station is a telecommuter IP SoftPhone configuration with call-back audio blank . G711-A. A number given to a set of IP addresses to indicate they have a common set of characteristics. This field is blank for an idle station with no audio link. Other-end IP audio address and IP port. The port represents a MedPro port for H. G.

This field appears in the second column of the screen when the Shared Port field is populated. AUDIO CHANNEL 2 of 3 Field Product ID and Release Description Identifier submitted by the endpoint during registration.Maintenance SAT Commands
status station field descriptions. and the release number of the endpoint that is provided to the gatekeeper upon registration. Media Gateways and Servers
. and H.323 station only) — the endpoint is unregistered registered-not-authenticated (H.323 station only) — the endpoint has been authorized (by the associated IP SoftPhone). including:
l l l l l
IP_Tel . but is not yet registered registered-authenticated — the endpoint is registered and authenticated (for example.An IP soft agent phone IP_ROMax . but has not been authenticated (the station is disallowed from making or receiving calls).931.931
y = H.323 station only) — the endpoint is registered. but critical internal data structures have not yet been updated 2 of 3
l
l
l
532 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Does not apply to IP SoftPhone endpoints.
l l
Registration Status
unregistered (H. Value is one of the 30 allowed product IDs administered on the system-parameters customer-options screen. an IP station that is able to make calls) pending-unregistration — the endpoint is unregistered. Identifies the registration and authentication status of the IP endpoint. authenticated-not-registered (H.A remote office phone
H.245 is contained within Q.IP Softphone IP_eCons .An IP soft console IP_Agent .245 fields do not appear.IP Telephone IP_Soft . This field appears only for Avaya or Lucent products.245 Tunneled in Q. This field appears in the second column of the screen when the Shared Port field is populated. An unregistered IP SoftPhone cannot be identified as an IP endpoint. This field appears in the second column of the screen when the Shared Port field is populated.

the standard used by U. aes indicates Advanced Encryption Standard encryption. aea indicates Avaya Encryption Algorithm. none indicates an unencrypted media stream. government to protect sensitive (unclassified) information. The field is blank if the NAT address is not known.
l
Native NAT Address
Specifies the network address translation (NAT) IP address of the endpoint when a network device provides the network address translation function for the endpoint.
l
not available .List of SAT Commands
status station field descriptions. AUDIO CHANNEL 3 of 3 Field MAC Address Description The Media Access Control (MAC) address received from the phone when the phone registers.the phone is not registered. 3 of 3
ALG . The network device provides the NAT address of the endpoint at the time of registration. Not as secure as AES.NAT WAN IP address Media Encryption
Communication Manager Release 5. This field is populated only when a special application turned on.the phone registers but is unable to send a MAC address blank . Reduces circuit-switched to IP call capacity by 25%. This field appears in the second column of the screen when the Shared Port field is populated.S. This field appears in the second column of the screen when the Shared Port field is populated.0 Issue 4 January 2008
533
.

Maintenance SAT Commands
status station.more than 255 ms Packet Loss per Second Last Ten Seconds * .
This screen is available only to IP endpoints. * = maximum (100%) packet loss per second during the one-second interval. NETWORK STATUS and SUMMARY
status station field descriptions. # = maximum (100%) packet loss per second during the one-second interval.more than 255ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SUMMARY Worst Case this Call (ms): 1 Average this Call (ms): 0 Current Buffer Size (ms): 8 Page x of x Packet Loss per Second Last Ten Seconds * . NETWORK STATUS and SUMMARY 1 of 2 Field Description
NETWORK STATUS Network Status fields show information for only the IP Telephone when an IP telephone and IP Softphone are in service on the same extension simultaneously. or when packet loss = 100%.
status station 70103 NETWORK STATUS Average Jitter (ms) Last Ten Seconds # .100% loss Out of Order Counter The average jitter in received packets from the last ten one-second intervals. Media Gateways and Servers
. Average Jitter Last Ten Seconds # . NETWORK STATUS and SUMMARY. The ten most recent one-second samples of the lost packet information for the requested endpoint. A count of the number of out-of-order packets detected during the current connection. for an IP call. 1 of 2
534 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. * appears when silence suppression is y on the ip-codec-set screen.100% loss 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Per Call Info Out of Order Counter: SSRC Change for Call: Last Rx Sequence #: Last Tx Sequence #: Echo Return Loss (db): Bulk Delay (ms): ERL Enhancement (dB): 0 0 5450 22932 0 8 25
Worst Case this Call: 0 Average this Call: 0
status station field descriptions.

1-second packet loss experienced during the current connection. NETWORK STATUS and SUMMARY 2 of 2 Field SSRC Change for Call Last Rx Sequence No.0 Issue 4 January 2008
535
.
Average this Call
Current Buffer Size
Communication Manager Release 5. The current jitter buffer size.List of SAT Commands
status station field descriptions. due to the PSTN network including the hybrid. Packet Loss: the worst-case. This is the measure of the effectiveness of the echo canceller. Loss introduced by the echo canceller. relative to the transmitted signal. Echo Return Loss Bulk Delay ERL Enhancement SUMMARY Worst Case this Call Jitter: the worst-case. Last Tx Sequence No. Last transmitted data packet sequence number. Loss of the echo signal. Delay offset of the echo relative to the original signal. Jitter: the average jitter for the current connection (the running average of all the 1-second intervals during the connection. Packet Loss: the average packet loss number for the current connection (running average of all the 1-second intervals experienced during the connection. 2 of 2 Description The number of SSRC changes occurring during the current connection. 1-second jitter (ms) experienced during the current connection. Last received data packet sequence number.

CONNECTED PORTS
status station field descriptions. 22.Maintenance SAT Commands
status station.711MU encryption:none ip-start: 172. 22. 22. 8:2854 ip-end: 172. 22. The IP address of one end of a direct connection.
status station 70103 CONNECTED PORTS src port: S00588 ip-start: 172. 22. CONNECTED PORTS 1 of 2 Field Description
CONNECTED PORTS Connected Ports fields show information for only the IP telephone when an IP telephone and IP Softphone are in service on the same extension simultaneously.182:2712 ip-end: 172.233:2960 01B0905 audio: G. The physical port location of the media processing circuit pack. and does not use TDM bus resources. some codec conversion). 22. src port MP The port address of the statused station. Media Gateways and Servers
. 22.711MU encryption:aes ip-start: ip-end: audio: ip-start: ip-end: audio: dst port: 01B0824 Page x of x
ss:off
pkt:20ms
ss:off
pkt:20ms
status station field descriptions. CONNECTED PORTS.234:2224 02A0107 audio: G. 1 of 2
HP
ip-start
536 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. y appears when the audio stream is handled entirely on the media processing circuit pack. The audio connection does not require more extensive processing (for example. the call requires a codec conversion). for an IP call
This screen shows the IP media processor resources used during a conference call. The audio stream passes through a media processing circuit pack (either a Medpro or a VoIP module on a media gateway) when direct IP-IP audio connections are disabled or the connection cannot be direct for other reasons (for example. 22. Hairpinning.

Examples: test station test station test station test station test station
init inads craft cust nms
short 1
81709 85136 85036 84297 81709
l s r 2 l r 25 r 4 c
!
WARNING:
WARNING: Since the “clear long” options clear all counters if tests pass. SRC PORT TO DEST PORT TALKPATH Field src port Description port number
test station
test station Use test station to perform hardware diagnostic tests on an individual port circuit assigned to that extension.0 Issue 4 January 2008
539
.List of SAT Commands
status station field descriptions. In some cases customer service might degrade since calls might be routed over defective equipment. SRC PORT TO DEST PORT TALKPATH
status station field descriptions. it is possible to clear firmware counters even when a problem exists.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
test station
extension short long repeat n clear
The station extension (per dial-plan) See Common Input Parameters on page 25. The technician must specify the extension and a translation is automatically done to the physical port location.
Communication Manager Release 5.

22 .processor ethernet form (add survivable-processor node-name).111 172.20 .
Type
ID IP Address Reg LSP Act Service State Translations Updated Net Rgn
in-service/idle: the LSP is registered out-of-service Time and date of the translation update to the LSP or ESS Network region in which the PE interface of the LSP or ESS resides. as listed on the Survivable Processor ethernet screen.
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
The following display shows a typical result for list survivable-processor
list survivable-processor SURVIVABLE PROCESSORS IP Address Service State? 172.148. IP address of the node name as it appears in the IP Node Name screen and on the Survivable Processor ethernet screen.0 Issue 4 January 2008
541
.2 in-service/idle out-of-service
Name
Type
ID
Translations Updated 1:00 5/29/2007 1:00 5/29/2007
sv-st12-lspa st12SIMlsp002
LSP LSP
04 05
list survivable-processor field descriptions
list survivable-processor field descriptions Field Name Description Name of the LSP or ESS as administered on the Survivable Processors screen (add survivable-processor) or the System Parameters-ESS screen (add system-parameters ess) LSP. ESS Survivable processor type as listed on the Survivable processor. Server ID number (cluster ID) of the ESS or LSP.21 .

Media Gateways and Servers
. This command disables all board entries that match a specific physical board location. use enable suspend-alm-orig to temporarily suspend off-board DS1 alarms for customers who periodically disconnect DS1 trunks for testing or other business purposes. Note: disable suspend-alm-orig does not disable port entries. enable suspend-alm-orig does not support circuit packs without a board location. For example.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
Note:
disable suspend-alm-orig
board location
Physical location of the replaced or corrected board (does not support port location)
init inads craft cust rcust
Examples: disable suspend-alm-orig 1C03 disable suspend-alm-orig 1E07
enable suspend-alm-orig
enable suspend-alm-orig [location] [off-board-only] expires-in-hrs hrs Use enable suspend-alm-orig to suspend alarm origination for alarms generated by the specified board (location) or port (location) for a the specified amount of time (hrs). the most recent suspension request replaces the previous request. Enter enable suspend-alm-orig multiple times to suspend alarms on different boards or ports. If a physical location is specified for which there is already a suspension in effect.
542 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Improving control over customer requests. Use enable suspend-alm-orig to improve control over situations such as:
l l
Quieting a hyperactive port board during installation or troubleshooting.Maintenance SAT Commands
suspend-alm-orig
See: disable suspend-alm-orig on page 542 enable suspend-alm-orig on page 542 list suspend-alm-orig on page 543
disable suspend-alm-orig
Use disable suspend-alm-orig to stop entries from the active Suspend Alarm Origination table.

l
To see a list of active alarm origination suspensions. such as working with the vendor of a T1 trunk that has developed an off-board condition.0 Issue 4 January 2008
543
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
list suspend-alm-orig
init inads craft
list suspend-alm-orig Suspend Alarm Origination Entries Physical 01C03 01E0407 01E0406 Board off-only on-and-off on-and-off Expires At 06/11/15:06 06/11/17:26 06/12/45:34
Communication Manager Release 5. Even though this command only lists active entries. use disable suspend-alm-orig. To disable a suspension.and offboard alarms
enable suspend-alm-orig 1B03 expires-in-hrs 3 enable suspend-alm-orig 1B0701 expires-in-hrs 72 enable suspend-alm-orig 1B07 off-board-only expires-in-hrs 24
list suspend-alm-orig
Use list suspend-alm-orig to see active entries in the Suspend Alarm Origination table. an entry that expires during the list process still appears in the output. use list suspend-alm-orig. For example. both on-and off-board alarms suspended Number of hours (1-72) Examples:
init inads craft cust rcust
on.List of SAT Commands
l
Improving control over external (non-Avaya) problems. use enable suspend-alm-orig to suspend off-board DS1 alarms before a customer resolves facility problems. the output contain only the title and field headings. Improving control over internal (Avaya) problems that cannot be immediately resolved. if not specified.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
enable suspendalm-orig
board/port location off-board-only expires-in-hrs
Physical location of the hardware optional. If the Suspend Alarm Origination table is empty. For example. use enable suspend-alm-orig to suspend alarm origination for a bad circuit pack detected late Friday night if personnel cannot be dispatched until Monday.

0 Issue 4 January 2008
545
. Number of warning alarms logged against the switch node carrier. The physical location of the standby switch node Clock circuit pack no board if an SNC is administered but not inserted The physical location of the standby switch node Clock circuit pack no board if an SNC is administered but not inserted Blanks if there is no standby switch node Clock for a given switch node 2 of 2
Major Alarms Minor Alarms Warning Alarms Active SNC Location Standby SNC Location
Communication Manager Release 5. but is currently not active blanks = PNC is not duplicated Number of major alarms logged against the switch node carrier Number of minor alarms logged against the switch node carrier.List of SAT Commands
status switch-node field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Mode Description Current role of the switch node carrier. active = SN is providing normal circuit and control functions for PNC standby = SN is ready to become active.

Set switch-node-clock is valid only for a simplex PNC with a Center State Switch (CSS). Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
switch-node clock
set switch-node-clock
set switch-node-clock location [override] Use set switch-node-clock to set the active switch node clock (SNC) circuit pack in a given switch node carrier.
synchronization
See: change synchronization on page 547 display synchronization on page 550 list synchronization on page 553 set synchronization on page 5544 status synchronization on page 554 test synchronization on page 557
546 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
set switch-node-clock
override
Set the active switch node clock regardless of the health of the standby SNC circuit pack.

The circuit pack remains the synchronization reference until set synchronization specifies another circuit pack. an IPSI’s Tone-Clock circuit. or a Tone-Clock circuit pack provides the port network’s timing source. Any administered circuit pack that is synchronization-capable may be specified with set synchronization. After enable synchronization. Media Gateways and Servers
.
Use set synchronization only after automatic synchronization has been disabled with disable synchronization-switch.
l l
On S8700 MC. Synchronization-capable circuit packs include:
l l l l l
DS1 Trunks BRI Trunks IPSIs ATM CES Tone-Clocks
S8700 IP-PNC: specify a synchronization source location for each port network.Maintenance SAT Commands
set synchronization
set synchronization location Use set synchronization to set a specific synchronization-capable circuit pack as the reference source for system synchronization signals. set per system. Set synchronization is not supported when ATM-PNC is enabled. On gateways. The default
Specify the synchronization source location according to your system configuration:
l
is the Tone-Clock in that port network. set per gateway. If no primary or secondary source is administered. the administered primary or secondary synchronization source becomes the synchronization reference. or enable synchronization is entered.
status synchronization
status synchronization [ atm | css | port network <n> | all ]
554 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
set synchronization
location
Specifies the physical position of the synchronization-capable circuit pack that supplies a reference for synchronization.

Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190):
l l l l l l l l l l
BFDL .Remote Socket Control Link (C-LAN/VAL) RSL .List of SAT Commands
list sys-link field descriptions
list sys-link field descriptions Field Location Type/dlci Description The physical location of the far endpoint associated with the system link (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit). The type of system-link and the dlci of the link (if there is one).Port-Network Connectivity ATM Control Link PRI .Expansion Archangel Link INL .” This field specifies the status of the current path. “Default” appears if the default faulted path is being used.Bearer Fault Detection Link EAL . “None” appears if the link has not gone down.Trunk ATM Control Link
State Current Path Faulted Path
Whether the system link is “up” or “down. The date and time that the most recent fault on the link took place.
Last Fault Recorded
status sys-link
status sys-link port-location [dlci #]
Communication Manager Release 5.ISDN-PRI signaling link RSCL .Indirect Neighbor Link (center stage switch) MBL .Medpro Control Link PACL . System links include the following (see SYNC (Port Network Synchronization) on page 1253 in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. This field shows whether the link has experienced a fault and been switched to another path. This field displays “none” if the link is down or “present” if the current path is functional.0 Issue 4 January 2008
561
. “Present” indicates that the link has been faulted at least once.Remote Socket Link TACL .Maintenance Board Link MPCL .

the components making up the faulted path are displayed on page 2 of the report. See status link on page 358 for more details on links. The dlci number associated with an RSL link. The report includes the type and operational state of the link. The information shown is similar to other link types. Examples: status sys-link 1e0201 status sys-link 1a1001 dlci 030
The following display shows a typical result for status sys-link 8a02.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use status sys-link to see status data for a specified system link. a faulted path exists. active alarms and path status. the associated processor dlci. and a list of all hardware components making up the link’s path. If. status sys-link also provides status for a BFD link. in addition to the current path. if any. For port networks with IPSI.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
status sys-link
port-lo cation dlci #
The location of the port associated with the link. Media Gateways and Servers
.
status sys-link 8a02 Location: 08A0201 Current Path: present Faulted Path: none Type/dlci: EAL State: up Page 1 of 2
Alarms: none Time Up: 10/20/2007 15:49 Last Fault:
Location 08A PN 08 08A
Current Hardware Path Maintenance Name Alarms Location PKT-INT PKT-BUS IP-SVR none none none
Maintenance Name Alarms
562 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

” The date and time that the link came up The status of the faulted path. if any:
l l l
present: The path of the link has been faulted at least once.
Last Fault
The date and time at which the most recent fault occurred.List of SAT Commands
The following display shows a typical result for status sys-link 1a1001 dlci 030. present: The current path displayed below is valid. The highest level of alarm currently logged against the components making up the link. The operational status of the current path:
l l
none: The link is down. none: There is no record of the link having gone down.0 Issue 4 January 2008
565
. default: The default faulted path is being used. See Type/dlci under list sys-link for the link types.
State Time Up Faulted Path
Whether the system link is “up” or “down. 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5.
status sys-link 1a1001 Location: 01A1001 Current Path: present Faulted Path: none Type/dlci: RSL/030 State: up Page 1 of 2
Alarms: none Time Up: 03/20/2007 15:49 Last Fault:
Location 01A PN 01 01A10
Current Hardware Path Maintenance Name Alarms Location PKT-INT PKT-BUS CLAN-BD none none none
Maintenance Name Alarms
status sys-link field descriptions
status sys-link field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Location Type/dlci Alarms Current Path Description The location of the port associated with the system link (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit). The type of system link and dlci number (RSL link).

and alarm information for each hardware component making up the current path of the link. 2 of 2
test sys-link
test sys-link location [dlci # ] [current | faulted] [short | long] [repeat# | clear] [schedule] Use test sys-link to validate the existence of the specified link and runs diagnostic tests on the hardware path that comprises the system link. See status link on page 358 for more details on links. See Common Input Parameters on page 25. Current hardware path tested dlci number Tests the hardware path of the system link as it was constituted when a fault last caused the link to go down. If the link encounters a fault. and PRI (PRI signaling link). and alarm information for each hardware component making up the most recent faulted path is shown. The number of components of a given system link hardware path depends on the system configuration and type of system link. Examples: test sys-link 2e0201 current test sys-link 2e0201 faulted r 10
init inads craft
566 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
test sys-link
location dlci # current faulted short long repeat n clear
Port location associated with the system link. The path begins at the Packet Interface on the IPSI and terminates at the circuit path that terminates the other end of the link. maintenance name. INL (Indirect Neighbor Link). the system will reroute it if possible over an alternate route. the faulted path appears on page 2 of the report. Use current or faulted to run tests on every hardware object that comprises the specified link. The hardware path that comprises a system link consists of up to 21 hardware components that affect the behavior of the link.Maintenance SAT Commands
status sys-link field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Current Hardware Path Faulted Hardware Path Description The location. The location. only the end-to-end sys-link connection is tested. The following links are examples of system links: EAL (Expansion Archangel Link). If this has taken place. If current or faulted is not specified. Media Gateways and Servers
. maintenance name.

Attendant and maintenance status are updated every minute and traffic status is updated on an hourly basis. Pressing CANCEL forces a logout of the current login ID. 1 of 2
568 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Use monitor system conn pnn to specify PNNs for the report.
l
view1 shows attendant. and traffic status. Pressing CANCEL forces a logout of the current login ID. view2 shows the view1 screen except the hunt group measurements
l
Use monitor system connection to see the status of connections. This on-line status report is automatically updated every minute or by pressing the UPDATE key. compiled by the connection manager. of the system. The number of existing minor and major alarms on stations.
monitor system view1 MAINTENANCE STATUS # of alarms for trunks: # of alarms for stations: # of alarms for other res: First OSS number has been informed? 4 2 1 n
TRAFFIC STATUS Measurement Hour: 18 Trunk Group Measurement Hunt groups Measurement (4 grps with highest %time ATB) (4 grps with highest # of qued calls) Grp no: 78 Grp no: 16 Grp dir: Calls qued: 2 Calls qued: 1 Calls aban: 1 %Out blkg: Attendant Group Measurement %Time ATB: Calls qued: 1 Calls aban: 0 16:06 TUE MAR 6 2007
monitor system view1 and monitor system view2 field descriptions
monitor system view1 and monitor system view2 field descriptions 1 of 2 Field # of alarms for trunks # of alarms for stations Description The number of existing minor and major alarms on trunk ports. Media Gateways and Servers
. or health. maintenance.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use monitor system view1 and monitor system view2 to see the condition. The following is an example of monitor system view1.

outgoing. The starting time of the period for which the measurement was taken. Total calls that were abandoned by the caller. due to overload conditions. The ratio of outgoing calls that are not carried. Group direction: incoming.0 Issue 4 January 2008
569
. on a trunk group to the outgoing calls offered. Total calls that arrived and were placed in the queue for trunk groups. 2 of 2
Grp no Grp dir Calls qued Calls aban %Out blkg % Time ATB Time of day
Communication Manager Release 5. or two way. For example. The percentage of time within the polling interval that every trunk in the trunk group was unavailable for use. The trunk-group or hunt-group number. The measurement is taken on an hourly basis). The current time of day acquired from the system. the traffic status data is for the time period from 6 PM to 7 PM.List of SAT Commands
monitor system view1 and monitor system view2 field descriptions 2 of 2 Field # of alarms for other resources First OSS number has been informed Measurement Hour Description The number of existing minor and major alarms on every maintainable object in the system except trunks and stations. this is n. Has every alarm been reported and acknowledged by the first OSS telephone number? If “Alarm Origination” is not enabled or there are no active alarms. if the measurement hour is shown as 18.

0 or 1. It is related to the previous field in that the maximum call rate is reflected for this hour. When this flag is set. Shortly thereafter. Media Gateways and Servers
. this shows the maximum call rate obtained during the past 20 minutes. Number of time slots requests that were denied during the time period elapsed since the top of the last hour. depending upon if the measurements being taken are for this hour or the next. 1 of 2
Next_hour
tot_ts_req
ts_denied
570 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. One number appears for each PNN requested. if monitor system conn is executed at 20 minutes past 12:00. Data is collected every 100 seconds. For example. All Other Figures are in Base 16
TTRs :0014 CPTRs:0041 CPTRs:0082 TTRs :0082
monitor system conn field descriptions
monitor system conn field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Max_callrate Description The maximum call rate hit during the time since the last hour has passed. Number of time slots in use during the time period elapsed since the top of the last hour. One number appears for each PNN requested.
Time Slot Status Bus Status Pnn Bus State *Idle Count Pnn Bus State 10 0 Maint 0 10 0 Avail 10 1 Normal 233 10 1 Avail 10 0 Maint 0 22 0 Avail 10 1 Normal 233 22 1 Avail 22 0 Maint 0 1 0 Avail 22 1 Normal 233 1 1 Avail 22 0 Maint 0 22 1 Normal 233 *Callrate: 20 1 0 Maint 0 *Interval: 60 1 1 Normal 233 *Max_callrate:45 1 0 Maint 0 *Next_hour: 70 1 1 Normal 233 tot_ts_req :0F24 0000 3CE2 ts_count :0010 0920 0200 Requests-TN748 ts_denied :0E46 3CE2 0000 ts_total :0000 0090 0028 Requests-TN748 tot_fts_req:0000 53D2 2231 fts_count:02E0 0910 0784 Requests-TN744 fts_total:0320 0192 7048 Requests-TN744 Requests-TN744 MFCs :0082 Note: * Denotes Base 10. the maximum call rate becomes zero and new accumulations begin. statistics begin to accumulate for the next hour. Data is collected every 100 seconds.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following display shows the output for monitor system conn. a check is made as to how many time slots are currently in use. When the timer fires and the data collection occurs.

2 of 2
reset system
reset system [level#]
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
All system resets are service affecting.
Use reset system to reload Communication Manager software. Number of currently active call progress tone receivers requested on theTN748 circuit pack. Certain conditions may result in a higher reset level than the one requested. Number of fiber time slots requested since the top of the last hour. with higher levels being increasingly destructive.
Communication Manager Release 5. The number of time slots in use during the last 100-second poling period. Number of currently active call progress tone receivers requested on the TN744 circuit pack. Number of currently active touch-tone receivers requested on the TN748 circuit pack. One number appears for each PNN requested.0 Issue 4 January 2008
571
. Some resets may take up to one-half hour to complete. Number of fiber time slots in use during the last 100-second polling period. Number of time slots requested since the top of the last hour. One number appears for each PNN requested. Number of currently active touch-tone receivers requested on the TN744 circuit pack. Number of currently active multifrequency receivers requested on the TN744 circuit pack. One number appears for each PNN requested. All system resets are disruptive and terminate the SAT login. Unless you are experienced with resetting a system.List of SAT Commands
monitor system conn field descriptions 2 of 2 Field tot_fts_req ts_count ts_total fts_count fts_total RequestsTN748 TTRs RequestsTN748 CPTRs RequestsTN744 CPTRs RequestsTN744 TTRs RequestsTN744 MFC Description Number of fiber time slots that have been requested. follow normal escalation procedures.

and H. Every administrative session except those over the TN799 C-LAN are dropped. New calls are not processed during the reset.List of SAT Commands
Reset system cannot be canceled. CMS. If the reset resulted from a spontaneous server interchange. Application links such as those to AUDIX and CDR are dropped and re-established in under 2½ minutes. queued ACD calls. Stable features are preserved.
Reset system specifications
Reset Level 1 (warm restart) duration. and AUDIX links could lose buffered messages. System links such as ISDN-PRI D-channel signaling links. 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. AUDIX.323 calls. If reset system is successful.0 Issue 4 January 2008
573
. DCS links over C-LAN are preserved. memory shadowing is turned off. The screen shows the results of various initialization tests. See also display initcauses on page 315. Encrypted system links may be dropped and reestablished. H. DCS.320 (multimedia) calls stay up. Several conditions may prevent a requested reset. Effects (cont. and the standby server will not be available for service until memory is refreshed (several minutes). the user is logged off.) Transient calls (not yet connected) and some user stimuli are dropped. causes. The CMS. typically 4 seconds reset system 1 command from Communication Manager (SAT/ASA) command line Spontaneous server interchange (those caused by hardware faults) Software faults that are not service affecting Demand server interchange Software escalation Effects Stable calls are preserved. and effects 1 of 2 Duration Causes Up to 10 seconds. Error and alarm logs are preserved. but every alarm is resolved except busyouts.

Media Gateways and Servers
. If save translation is in progress. A software-requested warm restart would result in an unsuccessful save translation and possibly corrupt translations. and effects 2 of 2 Translation data is preserved in memory. 2 of 2
574 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. an SAT-requested warm restart would be aborted.Maintenance SAT Commands
Reset Level 1 (warm restart) duration. causes.

are lost and must be re-entered. is dropped. and effects 1 of 2 Duration Causes Up to 3. Every hardware component is reset except
l l l l l
Active TN2312 IPSI in any PN. 1 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5. causes. Initialization firmware runs diagnostics and displays results on the screen. Every application link is dropped and re-established.75 minutes reset system 2 command from Communication Manager (SAT/ASA) command line Escalation from SAT’s reset level 1 An attempted SAT’s reset level 1 during a PNC interchange Spontaneous interchange into an unrefreshed standby server Effects Every system and application link is dropped.0 Issue 4 January 2008
575
. Every login. Active EI in a non-IPSI connected PN. leaving the standby server unavailable for service for up to several minutes. Every administrative session is dropped. SNIs. Server memory shadowing is turned off. a SAT-requested cold-2 restart would be aborted. such as Automatic Wakeup calls. DS1 clocks. SNCs. Every call is dropped. Gateways are not reset. Every system link is dropped and re-established. Translation data is preserved in memory.List of SAT Commands
Reset Level 2 (cold restart) duration. If save translation is in progress. Non-translation feature data. A software-requested cold-2 restart would result in an unsuccessful save translation and possibly corrupt translations. including remote access and system port logins.

The reboot is delayed until the core dump is finished. Circuit packs are reinitialized. Other effects are the same as those in reset level 2. Communication Manager administration (translations) are reloaded from the hard disk. causes. and effects 2 of 2 Effects (cont.) For a critical-reliability system (duplicated PNC). (Translations are verified by comparison to physical boards’ locations.
576 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. After reboot. except that more extensive diagnostics are performed.) Error and alarm logs are preserved. A core dump is automatically enabled for this reset level and is saved to the /var/ log/defty/dumps/ directory. causes. error and alarm logs are restored. and every Communication Manager alarm is resolved. a global refresh of the standby PNC is performed after the reset. the system attempts to save the alarm and error logs.Maintenance SAT Commands
Reset Level 2 (cold restart) duration. Before reboot. and effects Duration Causes Typically 11 to 14 minutes reset system 4 command from Communication Manager (SAT/ASA) command line Escalation from SAT’s reset level 2 Power up Recovery attempt from server-down mode Effects System software (boot image) is reloaded and every process is re-initialized. 2 of 2 Reset Level 4 (reload) duration. Every busied-out MO is released and can be rebusied. Some error and alarm information may be lost if the last save before the reboot save does not succeed. Media Gateways and Servers
.

display system-parameters duplication DUPLICATION RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS Enable Operation of PNC Duplication? y Enable Operation of IPSI Duplication? y
Communication Manager Release 5. including circuit pack administration and then duplication administration. and be sure PNC Duplication is y on the Duplication Related System Parameters screen before you administer duplication. You must obtain a license file to enable this option. Cabinets must be administered. The following must be duplicated:
l
Each switch node record and every switch node with its duplicate. or a DS1-C.List of SAT Commands
display system-parameters duplication
display system-parameters duplication Use display system-parameters duplication to see if IPSI (processing element) and PNC (port network connectivity) duplication is enabled.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
Note:
display system-parameters duplication
init inads craft
The following shows an example from display system-parameters duplication. Fiber links must be administered.
l
Every unduplicated SNI (switch node interface) to an SNI fiber link is automatically duplicated.0 Issue 4 January 2008
579
. Every fiber link containing either an EI circuit pack as an endpoint. Note: Release every PNC-A and -B board from the “busyout” state before PNC duplication.

254.255. OPTIONS Switch Identifier: IPSI Control of Port Networks: Preference switching to A-side IPSI: IPSI Socket Sanity Timeout: A enabled enabled 15 0 * Page 1 of 1
NOTE: * indicates data changed on the Server
change system-parameters ipserver-interface.0 Issue 4 January 2008
581
. Default is A. field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Description
SERVER INFORMATION Primary Control Subnet Address Secondary Control Subnet Address The control subnetwork addresses typically match the first three groups of digits in the IP address of the server. An asterisk (*) to the right of the Control Subnet Address fields means that Communication Manager does not have the subnetwork information and the subnetwork address displayed is incorrect. [a-j] The ID letter of the switch. OPTIONS Switch Identifier IPSI Control of Port Networks [A-J]. Secondary Control Subnet Address: 198.152.152. enabled disabled
Communication Manager Release 5.List of SAT Commands
Note:
Note: Run change system parameters ipserver-interface before running add ipserver-interface.
change system-parameters ipserver-interface IP SERVER INTERFACE (IPSI) SYSTEM PARAMETERS SERVER INFORMATION Primary Control Subnet Address: 198. Select the configure server command on the Maintenance Web Interface to see the IP address of the server.

Default is 3. Actual network outages of longer than 7 seconds may still result in IPSI socket sanity timeouts. the IPSI media gateway is less prone to warm restarts and is more resilient to short network outages. Media Gateways and Servers
.
IPSI Socket Sanity Timeout
display system-parameters ipserver-interface
display system-parameters ipserver-interface [schedule] Use display system-parameters ipserver-interface to display the information for the primary and secondary servers.Maintenance SAT Commands
change system-parameters ipserver-interface. Number of seconds between 3-15 for IPSI connections to recover from a network outage before closing the IPSI signaling connections that result in data loss and port network warm restarts. enable .
init inads craft dadmin customer super-user
582 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. When the field is set to a value higher than 3 seconds.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
display system-parameters ipserver-interface
schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25. IPSI Socket Sanity Timeout accommodates only short control network outages of up to approximately 7 seconds. Changing this field to disable stops the automatic return. Resynchronization of the TCP connections between the media server and the IPSI once the network recovers requires additional time. field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Preference switching to A-side IPSI Description The automatic preference to the A-side IPSI (duplicated IPSIs).If a fault causes an interchange away from IPSI-A to IPSI-B. the system will automatically return to IPSI-A when the fault heals. Even when set at 15 seconds.

Then an interchange is made back to the originally-active circuit pack. or no.List of SAT Commands
change system-parameters maintenance field descriptions page 1 OPERATIONS SUPPPORT PARAMETERS Command Time-out (minutes) Control Channel Interchange 10-360 Enter the number of inactive minutes after which an active SAT screen reverts to a Linux screen or the user is logged off of the system. For high-reliability configurations. a system clock or IPSI interchange is automatically initiated on each port network possessing duplicated Tone-Clock circuit packs or IPSIs.0 Issue 4 January 2008
585
. 2 of 2 This is an example of page 2 of change system-parameters maintenance. or no). days of the week. there are duplicate IPSIs on IPSI-controlled port networks.
change system-parameters maintenance MAINTENANCE-RELATED SYSTEM PARAMETERS MINIMUM MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS ( Before Notification ) TTRs: 4 CPTRs: 1 Call Classifier Ports: 0 MMIs: 0 VCs: 0 TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST ( Extension ) Test Type 100: Test Type 102: Test Type 105: ISDN MAINTENANCE ISDN-PRI Test Call Extension: ISDN-BRI Service SPID: 68888 DS1 & MF MAINTENANCE DS0 Loop-Around Test Call Extension: 44003 MF Test Call Extension: Page 2 of 3
System Clocks/ IPSI Interchange
Communication Manager Release 5. or n prevents interchanges. Does not apply to duplex-reliability configurations since the IPSIs are not duplicated in the port networks. During this time the newly-active circuit pack is tested and system health is monitored. This field indicates the days that interchanges occur: daily. Each has a set of time slots dedicated to the control channel. Each port network has a pair of TDM busses (A and B). For critical-reliability configurations. Default is 120. No prevents interchanges. “Daily”. days of the week. there are both duplicate Tone-Clock circuit packs on non-IPSI controlled port networks and duplicate IPSIs on IPSI-controlled port networks. n prevents interchanges. days of the week. One bus at a time carries the control channel in each PN. Each port network interchanges in the standby system clock or IPSI for 20 seconds. When this is turned on. The days that interchanges occur (daily.

set this field to the total number of MMI ports. These are also known as dual-tone multifrequency receivers (DTMRs). a warning alarm is raised against TTR-LEV. change system-parameters maintenance field descriptions page 2: 1 of 3 MINIMUM MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS ( Before Notification ) TTRs When the number of touch-tone receivers (TTRs) in service falls below this number (4 to 200). If this outage continues for 15 minutes. Media Gateways and Servers
. Each MMI circuit pack contains a maximum of 32 ports. set this field to the total number of CPTRs in the switch. a warning alarm is raised against TTR-LEV. The MMCH feature must be enabled on the system-parameters customer-options screen before the VCs field can be changed to a number greater than 0. If this outage continues for 15 minutes a major alarm is raised. or TN756. TN718. leave this field blank. or TN756. There are eight ports on each TN744 or TN2182 circuit pack. set this field to the total number of TTRs in the switch. When the number of call classifier ports (CLSFY-PTs) in service falls below this number. To alarm the first occurrence of a CPTR being taken out of service. set this field to the total number of CLSFY-PTs. one VC circuit pack is required for every eight ports of MMCH port capacity. Thus. The minimum number of MMI ports needed for the Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) feature to run efficiently. set this field to the total number of VC ports. These are also known as general purpose Tone Detectors (GPTDs). If the number of in-service VC ports falls below the MMCH port capacity (valid entries between 0 and 128). The eight DSP ports are made up of four encoder and four decoder resources that encode and decode audio formats. 1 of 3
CPTRs
Call Classifier Ports
MMIs
VCs
586 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Valid entries are 1 to 200. a warning alarm is raised against TTR-LEV. Each VC circuit pack contains 16 physical ports: eight ports are reserved for VC-DSPPT ports. TN2182 and TN744 (suffix C or later) each have 8 CPTRs. There are 4 TTRs on each TN748. a major alarm is raised. There are 2 CPTRs on each TN748. The MMCH feature must be enabled on the system-parameters customer-options screen before the MMIs field can be changed to a number greater than zero. If there are no TN744 or TN2182 circuit packs in the system. If the number of in-service Multimedia Interface (MMI) ports falls below the minimum port capacity (valid entries between 0-128). TN420. To alarm the first occurrence of a TTR being taken out of service.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following table describes the fields on page 2 of the change system-parameters maintenance screen. To alarm the first occurrence of a CLSFY-PT being taken out of service. TN2182 and TN744 (suffix C or later) each have 8 TTRs. To alarm the first occurrence of an MMI being taken out of service. The minimum number of VC ports needed for the Multimedia Call Handling (MMCH) feature. To alarm the first occurrence of a VC port being taken out of service. and the remaining eight ports are designated as VC-SUMPT ports. a VEC-LEV error is logged. When the number of call progress tone receivers in service falls below this number (2 to 100). TN420. TN718. a MMI-LEV error is logged.

Test Type 102
Test Type 102 tests far-end to near-end loss by sending:
l l l
Test Type 105
Test Type 105 tests 2-way loss. and C-message and C-notch noise by sending:
l l l l l l l l l
9 seconds of 1004-Hz tone at -16 dB 1 second of quiet 9 seconds of 404-Hz tone at -16 dB 1 second of quiet 9 seconds of 2804-Hz tone at -16 dB 30 seconds of quiet ½ second of 2225-Hz test progress tone approximately 5 seconds of quiet forced disconnect
ISDN MAINTENANCE ISDN-PRI Test Call Extension ISDN-BRI Service SPID Indicates the extension used by far-end ISDN nodes to place calls to the system. If the link is associated with the Service SPID. Otherwise. gain slope. 2 of 3
Communication Manager Release 5. The system responds by sending a sequence of test tones. disconnect is forced after 1 minute 9 seconds of 1004-Hz tone at 0 dB 1 second of quiet This cycle is repeated until disconnect. This number is the test SPID (0 – 99999) (under BRI-SET MO).5 seconds of 1004-Hz tone at 0 dB Quiet until disconnect. Shows if the link associates with the Service SPID. this field is blank. for testing ISDN-PRI trunks between the far end and the system.List of SAT Commands
change system-parameters maintenance field descriptions page 2: 2 of 3 MINIMUM MAINTENANCE THRESHOLDS ( Before Notification ) TERMINATING TRUNK TRANSMISSION TEST ( Extension ) Test Type 100 Specifies extensions assigned to receive tie-trunk calls from other switches that have test line origination capability.0 Issue 4 January 2008
587
. Test type 100 tests far-end to near-end loss and C-message by sending:
l l
5. disconnect is forced after 24 hours. Service SPID is a feature used by the system technician to check building wiring between the switch and the BRI endpoint.

Appears when Enable Translation Audit is y. Write the event to the command history log. n is recommended. y/n Block save translation if corruption is detected. n is recommended. Set to y when translation corruption is actively being diagnosed.List of SAT Commands
change system-parameters maintenance field descriptions page 3: MAINTENANCE SAVE TRANSLATION CORRUPTION AUDIT Enable Translation Audit y/n Set to y to have a translation audit performed prior to every scheduled save translation operation. y applies when Save Translation on the first page of this screen is y. Set to y when translation corruption is actively being diagnosed.0 Issue 4 January 2008
589
.
craft inads init super-user logins with Maintain Switch Circuit Packs permissions
A series of maintenance tests and operations runs automatically every day according to the schedule and settings specified in the following fields. A translation audit detects corruption in the translation data. Appears when Enable Translation Audit is y. Appears when Enable Translation Audit is y. y/n Display a warning on the SAT at login if translation corruption is detected by a translation audit. Set to y when translation corruption is actively being diagnosed. y/n Issue an alarm if translation corruption is detected by a translation audit. See change system-parameters maintenance on page 583 for examples of screens and field descriptions.
Display Warning When Detected
Alarm When Detected
Block Save Translation When Detected
display system-parameters maintenance
display system-parameters maintenance [schedule] Use display system-parameters maintenance to display translation data for maintenance-related system parameters.
Communication Manager Release 5. n is recommended.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
display system-parameters maintenance
schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25.

Execution of set tdm port-network puts both the control channel and the tone time slots on the specified bus. Use of override under these conditions causes calls to be dropped. See TDM-BUS (TDM Bus) on page 1311 in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. One of the paired TDM buses. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190) for details. Sets a bus which is out of service. Media Gateways and Servers
.
See set tdm feature interactions on page 592
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Use of override option disrupts service. a or b. On power-up. Each port network has a 512 time-slot TDM bus configured as two separate 256 time-slot buses. or a bus whose dedicated tone time slots are in use by call processing.
592 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Under extremely heavy traffic load. This division allows for duplication of control channels and time slots dedicated for use by system tones.
Example: set tdm port-network 2 bus a
set tdm feature interactions
New calls go to time slots reserved for tones on the bus that have not other time slots when:
l l
Time slots on a specified bus are in use Dedicated tone time slots are on the other half of the bus
A set command to buses that have calls on dedicated tone time slots drops these calls.Maintenance SAT Commands
set tdm
set tdm port-network PN# bus a | b [override] Use set tdm port-network to specify which of the paired TDM buses (A or B) on a port network carries the control channel and dedicated tone time slots. tone time slots on the bus that is not currently carrying the tones may be used for call processing.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Feature Interaction
set tdm port-network
PN# bus override
Port Network number of the TDM bus to be set. the control channel is carried on the A bus. and the tone time slots are carried on the B bus. Use list cabinet to see port network numbers for a given cabinet.

This system performs transmission tests on system trunks to determine whether trunks are performing satisfactorily. Before enabling a test. While disabled. See Common Input Parameters on page 25. a test cannot be run by background or demand maintenance. and inform INADS that it has been turned back on.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
enable test-number
test#
The number of the test to be re-enabled Descriptions of each test appear under the relevant MO in Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. ascertain why it was disabled.
594 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use enable test-number to re-enable a specified test that was previously turned off with disable test. Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190) Example: enable test-number 102
test-schedule
display test-schedule
display test-schedule Use display test-schedule to see the test schedule for an ATMS trunk. Use display disabled-tests to list all disabled tests. Automatic Transmission Measurement System (ATMS) provides advanced maintenance procedures for monitoring system trunk facilities.

but skips any return-loss sequences. but skips every self-test and return-loss sequence. The trunk-group numbers to be tested when this schedule runs. No measurements are taken for this test. Schedules continue to run until every trunk group/member for that particular schedule is tested or until the scheduled duration elapses. no-st/rl runs the “full” test. default is 1. This saves about 20 seconds on the type 105 test and does not have any effect on type 100 or 102 tests. supv performs a supervision test and only confirms the presence of the test set at the far end.
l
l
l
l
Duration
The maximum number of hours (1 to 24) a schedule can remain active. Media Gateways and Servers
. Default is blank.Maintenance SAT Commands
display test schedule field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Test Type Description One of the following types of test to be performed on the trunk group/ members in this schedule:
l
full runs the most comprehensive test and collects every associated measurement for each TTL type. no-rl runs the “full” test. but skips any self-test sequences. the schedule stops. There is no limit to the number of times that a trunk group can appear on any particular schedule. If the duration elapses before every trunk group/member can be tested. 2 of 2
Trk Trp
Bgn Mbr End Mbr
596 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. The ending member number of the trunk group to be tested. no-st runs the “full” test. This saves about 40 seconds on the type 105 test and does not have any effect on type 100 or 102 tests. The beginning member number of the trunk group to be tested. This value must be greater than or equal to the value of the beginning member field. or to the number of different schedules in which a trunk group can appear. This saves about 20 seconds on the type 105 test and does not have any effect on type 100 or 102 tests.

The largest portion of these measurements are generated through scheduled testing during system quiet hours (hours where the traffic volume is low).List of SAT Commands
testcalls
list testcalls
Use list testcalls to generate an Automatic Transmission Measurement System (ATMS) report. When used with the to-grp option. The purpose of the report is to provide measurement data to help determine the quality of trunk lines. The performance of the trunks is evaluated according to measurements produced by a series of analog tests (test analog-testcall)and are compared against user-defined threshold values. The ATMS allows the voice and data trunk facilities to be measured for satisfactory transmission performance. When used with the grp option.0 Issue 4 January 2008
597
. and echo return loss. When used with the to-mem option. this option is the starting trunk group member in a range of user-specified trunk group members. The test analog-testcall test aborts when attempting a test call on these trunk groups:
l
ISDN-PRI: The ATMS Summary Report (list testcalls command) shows a 0 in the in the Busied Out Trunks field when test analog-testcall is run on an ISDN-PRI trunk. singing return loss. noise. The measurement report contains data on trunk signal loss. The measurements are produced by a set of analog trunk tests (test analog-testcall). 1 of 2
mem member number
Communication Manager Release 5. this option is the ending trunk group in a range of user-specified trunk groups. Measurements for all trunk groups from 1 to the specified “to-grp” trunk group are displayed. The tests are initiated by a maintenance demand test or by a set of scheduled tests. The trunk measurements in this database reflect the state of each trunk at the time of its last test. this option is the starting trunk group in a range of user-specified trunk groups. Each trunk test performed by the system stores the results in a database. Measurements for a specific trunk group member displayed. SIP DID Any incoming trunk group (transmission tests can only be run on outgoing trunks)
Qualifiers/Options Qualifier/Option description
l l l
Action/Object
list testcalls
detail summary grp group number to-grp group number
Detailed measurement report displayed Summary measurement report displayed Measurements for a specific trunk group displayed.

SRL-LO occurs most often in the frequency range of 200 to 500 Hz. Singing return loss from 0 to 40 dB between the sum of the circuit (repeater) gains on a circuit and the sum of the circuit losses. These tests measure a maximum positive and negative deviation of +9 and -9 dB from the 1004-Hz loss measurements. 2 of 2
C-ntch Noise SRL-LO
SRL-HI
ERL
600 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. SRL-HI occurs most often in the frequency range of 2500 to 3200 Hz. ERL occurs most often in the frequency range of 500 to 2500 Hz. which is B(EQ)10 sup -12E(EQ) watts) terminating on a voice terminal within the voice-band frequency range (500 to 2500 Hz) between 15 and 55 dBrnC. Far-to-near and near-to-far measurements of 1004-Hz loss at 0 dBm. Echo return loss from 0 to 40 dB between the level of signal strength transmitted and the level of signal strength reflected. Maximum noise interference (in dBrnC: decibels above reference noise. This field describes the results of the trunk transmission test. Media Gateways and Servers
. These tests measure a maximum positive and negative deviation of +9 and -9 dB from the 1004-Hz loss measurements. Transmission tests at high frequency.Maintenance SAT Commands
list testcalls detail report field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Test Time Tst Rslt 1004Hz-loss Min 1004Hz-loss Max Loss dev at 404Hz Loss dev at 2804Hz C-msg Noise Description The time of day this trunk was tested. Singing return loss from 0 to 40 dB between the sum of the circuit (repeater) gains and the sum of the circuit losses. Far-to-near and near-to-far measurements of 1004-Hz loss from low-level tone. Maximum signal-dependent noise interference on a line between 34 and 74 dBrnC. Transmission tests at low frequency.

list testcalls summary grp 80 ATMS MEASUREMENT SUMMARY REPORT Trunks Passed Transm Test 0 Trunks Failed Marginal Threshld 0 Trunks Failed Unaccept Threshld 0
Trk Grp Num 80
Num Of Trks 19
Last Test Date
Last Test Time
Trks Trks In. Unacceptable threshold administered on the Trunk group form. incorrect threshold values. Number of trunks that were busied out at the time. but not an unacceptable threshold according to the threshold values defined on the trunk group form. This could be due to hardware problems. Number of trunks that have passed the trunk transmission tests.List of SAT Commands
The following example is the output from list testcalls summary grp 80. Total number of members per trunk group. Number of trunks that were not tested due to error conditions. Date of the oldest measurement in the trunk group.Not Use Test 0 0
Busied Out Trunks 0
list testcalls summary report field descriptions
list testcalls summary report field descriptions Field Trk Grp Num Num Of Trks Last Test Date Last Test Time Trunks Passed Transm Test Trunks Failed Marginal Threshld Trunks Failed Unaccept Threshld Trks In-Use Trks Not Test Busied Out Trunks Description The trunk group number which is being summarized. Number of trunks that were in-use at the time of testing.
Communication Manager Release 5. Only outgoing or two-way analog trunks will be listed.0 Issue 4 January 2008
601
. Time of the oldest measurement in the trunk group. etc. Number of trunks that failed a marginal threshold.

CDR and MEASUREMENTS
display time field descriptions
display time field descriptions Field Day of the Week Day of the Month Month Year Hour Minute Second Description The day of the week that the system has stored. The numerical day of the month. The number of seconds into the minute stored by the system. The month of the year stored by the system.
display time DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week: Tuesday Day of the Month: 16 TIME Hour: 8 Month: October Year: 2007
Minute: 5
Second: 51
WARNING: Changing the date or time will impact BCMS.
Communication Manager Release 5.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
display time
schedule
See Common Input Parameters on page 25. The hour of the current day.0 Issue 4 January 2008
603
.List of SAT Commands
display time
display time [schedule] Use display time to display the system date and time that is used by software processes for scheduling and so on. The number of minutes into the hour. The current year stored by the system.
The following example shows the output for display time.

set time field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Day of the Week Day of the Month Month Description Valid entries are Monday through Sunday. 1-31 are valid entries. the daylight savings time rule on the set time screen defaults to 0 (no rule). or default time appears in the fields. SCHEDULED EVENTS. When you change the daylight savings time rule.Maintenance SAT Commands
set time
set time Use set time to show and edit the current day. The second field is set to zero when the time on the clock is altered. CDR. A check for leap year is also made. year and time kept by the system clock. the system clock automatically adjusts during the next transition of the rule. and MEASUREMENTS
Note:
Note: When the system clock is upgraded from an earlier release. January through December. The current time. date.
set time field descriptions
These are the fields on the set time input screen.
set time input screen
set time DATE AND TIME DATE Day of the Week: Thursday Day of the Month: 11 TIME Hour: 8 Minute: 16 Second: 31 Type: Standard Month: October Year: 2007 Page 1 of 1
Daylight Savings Rule: 0 WARNING: Changing the date or time may impact BCMS. Media Gateways and Servers
. 1 of 2
604 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. month.

If you use set tone-clock during a maintenance session. maintenance testing. 2 of 2
Hour Minute Second Type Daylight Savings Rule
tone-clock
See: set tone-clock on page 605 test tone-clock on page 606
set tone-clock
set tone-clock cabinetc [carrier] [override] On port networks not controlled by an IPSI. Rule 0 is no daylight savings time. 0-23 are valid entries.List of SAT Commands
set time field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Year Description The year must be saved as translation data and passed to the kernel whenever kernel memory is corrupted (system reboot or cold I restart). use set tone-clock to select which of the two Tone-Clock circuit packs is to be active. use set tone-clock to force a Tone-Clock interchange. set tone-clock is blocked. or set tone-clock caused an interchange to the B-carrier Tone-Clock. daylight savings time rule. and rule 1 defaults to U. 0-59 are valid entries. or the data is changed. Daylight-savings = daylight savings time Standard = standard time The daylight savings time rule number (0 to 15). On port networks with an IPSI for a Tone-Clock. the A-carrier Tone-Clock is the preferred Tone-Clock.S.
Communication Manager Release 5. This field is reset automatically and cannot be altered. set the PN Tone-Clock back to the A carrier when you are finished. It is always active unless a failure.0 Issue 4 January 2008
605
. assuming it is healthy. In PNs. On port networks with duplicated Tone-Clocks.

See the MO information for TONE-BD (Tone-Clock Circuit Pack). Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190).Maintenance SAT Commands
Tone-clock interchanges executed by scheduled daily maintenance cause the standby to become active for 20 seconds and then interchange back to whichever Tone-Clock was originally active. TDM-CLK. Executes the set command regardless of the health of the Tone-Clock circuit pack. TONE-PT. Media Gateways and Servers
.
init inads craft
1
! CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Use of this option is destructive to an entire port network for PNs.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
set tone-clock
cabinet carrier override
Cabinet number of the Tone-Clock to be activated. Carrier of the Tone-Clock to be activated. TONE-PT (Tone Generator).
Examples: set tone-clock 01c override set tone-clock a
test tone-clock
test tone-clock UUC [short | long] [repeat# | clear] [schedule] Use test tone-clock to perform hardware diagnostic tests on the three maintenance objects on a specified IPSI. or Tone-Clock circuit pack on S8700 MC: TONE-BD. and TDM-CLK (TDM Bus Clock) in Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager.
606 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

SAT passed port 0). IP Media Processor-sourced pings should reflect audio transport performance and C-LAN-sourced pings should reflect control information transport performance. The 0 node is the address from which traceroute is issued. and the measurements reported should reflect the behavior of the type of packets sent. traceroute defaults to the ethernet port (port 17.05 11.03 22.
The following shows an example output for a C-LAN trace-route.1.100 100.10.200 100.20 130.25 22.9.01. the clan-port qualifier (1-17) does not appear.9.22 board 1C14 clan-port 2 TRACE ROUTE RESULTS Hop 0 1 2 3 4 Time(ms) from address 03.245.245.20.5.27.200
trace-route field descriptions
trace-route field descriptions 1 of 2 Field clan-port Description Port on the C-LAN board from which trace-route is issued.List of SAT Commands
Note:
Note: The default DiffServ and 802.
trace-route ip-address 135.9. This field appears only if the board is a C-LAN board.25 !N IP Address 130.20 130.0 Issue 4 January 2008
621
.14. The recipient of a ping replies with the same QoS value found in the received packet.20.9. Note: If no C-LAN port is specified for trace-route on a ppp link.01.1p/Q parameters downloaded to a IP Media Processor board are used for ping and trace-route commands which are sourced from that IP Media Processor. The node number (in sequence).1. 1 of 2
Hop
Communication Manager Release 5. For Medpro boards.

Error codes and their meanings are:
l l l l l l l l
! . the entry is repeated with an error code immediately following the time.Need fragmentation of data packet !S .Source return failure !X .Failure between endpoints !F .Unable to reach port !N .Unable to reach network !H .no data available
IP Address
The 32-bit network address. 2 of 2
trace-route error messages
trace-route command error messages Message Port not up Out of service Try later Ethernet port not translated Interpretation Port or link is down RSCL is down No socket is available Ethernet port is not administered
traffic
monitor traffic
monitor traffic trunk-groups [starting-group#] monitor traffic hunt-groups [starting-group#]
622 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.Timeout . If an error occurs at a node.Maintenance SAT Commands
trace-route field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Time (ms) Description Time from the board to each intermediate destination and back in milliseconds. Media Gateways and Servers
.Unable to reach host !P .Packet blocked by filter “ .

0 Issue 4 January 2008
623
. Only administered trunk groups up to a maximum of 60 appear. Unadministered hunt groups are blank. Use # to specify the starting trunk group. the number of trunk group and hunt group calls waiting to be serviced. and the length of time that the oldest call in the group has been waiting.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default
monitor traffic trunk-groups
starting -group#
monitor traffic hunt-groups
starting -group#
Number of calls in the queue waiting to be serviced for each trunk group.List of SAT Commands
Use monitor traffic to see the current load on specified trunk and hunt groups. 22:49 THU OCT 25 2007 A Q W LCIQ
1 1 0 n 0 0 2 0 0 y 0 0 3 0 0 y 0 0 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 #: Group. (LCIQ: Longest Call In Queue in seconds)
0
0
10
W: Calls Waiting)
Communication Manager Release 5. enter 5 to see trunk groups from group 5 and up. Shows trunk-group report information plus how long the oldest call in each group’s queue has been waiting.
monitor traffic hunt-groups # S A Q W HUNT GROUP STATUS LCIQ # S 17 18 20 21 22 23 24 16 5 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Q: Queue?. S: Grp Size. The number of members in the group and the number of members active on calls appear for comparative analysis.
The following display shows a typical result for monitor traffic hunt-groups. For example. A: Active Members. Updated every minute.

Q:
Q Length. This does not include busied out members.Maintenance SAT Commands
The following display shows a typical result for monitor traffic trunk-groups. Media Gateways and Servers
. The number of calls waiting in the group queue to be serviced. The number of members administered for each trunk or hunt group. The length of the queue administered for a group. The time. The number of members in a group that are active on a call.
monitor traffic trunk-groups TRUNK GROUP STATUS Q W # S A Q 22:49 Thu OCT 25.
W:
Calls Waiting)
monitor traffic field descriptions
monitor traffic hunt-groups and monitor traffic trunk-groups field descriptions Field # S A Q W LCIQ Description Group number for the trunk group or hunt group.
A:
Active Members. the oldest call in the hunt group queue has been waiting to be serviced.
translation
save translation
save translation [ all | ess | lsp ]
624 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. 2007 # S A Q W
#
S
A
Q
W
#
S
A
W
1 2 9 65 99
15 22 31 5 12
10 21 12 5 0
0 10 20 10 0
0 10 0 8 0
(#:
Group.
S:
Grp Size. in seconds.

translations are saved on both the active and standby servers. and to the ESS by a filesync process. the translation file is copied to the standby server by a filesync process.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
save translation
Commit the active server translations (volatile) in memory to a file (non-volatile).
Use save translation to commit the active server translations (volatile) in memory to a file (non-volatile).
lsp
All translation data is kept in volatile system memory or on the hard drive during normal operation. For S8700 series servers. If an update of the standby server is already in progress. and to the LSP by a filesync process. or result messages will be lost. In the event of a power outage or certain system failures. saves translation changes only on the main server pair. send changed translations to the active server and to the standby for S8700 series servers. From the Server. the translation file is copied to the standby server by a filesync process.
l
On ESS. subsequent save translation commands fail with the message “save translations has a command conflict”. It either completes or fails.List of SAT Commands
Note:
Note: save translation can take up to 5 minutes to complete. It either completes or fails. When a SAT user issues save translation on a duplicated system. For Linux platforms.
Run save translation as part of scheduled background maintenance or on demand. send changed translations to the active server and to the standby for S8700 series servers. data in memory is lost. From the Server.
all ess
Save translations to all ESSs. Save translation stores on disk the translation data currently in memory. Save translation will not run and an error message appears when:
l l
translation data is being changed by an administration command translations are locked by use of the Communication Manager web interface Pre-Upgrade Step.0 Issue 4 January 2008
625
. See change system-parameters maintenance on page 583 for more information
Communication Manager Release 5. Avoid pressing the ENTER key on the keyboard during this time. Local Survivable Processors (LSPs) and the main server pair.

Entering only the group number busies out every member in the group. list. see Common Input Parameters on page 25. and Busyout and Release Commands on page 33. This is not recommended. whether it is installed or uninstalled. Note: Entering a group number and a slash (/) without a member number busies-out the member with the lowest-numbered port location.
monitor trunk
monitor trunk group# / member#
Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008
627
.List of SAT Commands
trunk
See: busyout trunk on page 627 monitor trunk on page 627 release trunk on page 629 status trunk on page 629 test trunk on page 634
busyout trunk
busyout trunk group# [/member#] Use busyout trunk to put an entire trunk group or a single trunk-group member in a maintenance busy state.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
Note:
busyout trunk
group# member#
Trunk group number Number of particular trunk in a group Examples: busyout trunk 78 busyout trunk 78/1
init inads craft
For more information.

out-of-service. 1 of 2
628 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. this field contains the number of the ISDN Signaling Group. The terminal login is not dropped when you press CANCEL to cancel monitor trunk. The port location (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) for trunks. pending-in-service. In-service/active. or manually with the UPDATE key. in-service/idle. NE (Near End) and FE (Far End) refer to the “end” of the trunk that has placed the facility in its current state. Otherwise. out-of-service-NE (Near End). Media Gateways and Servers
.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use monitor trunk to see same information as status trunk on page 629. (1-99/1-99). out-of-service-FE (Far End). or disconnected. maint-NE/idle. pending-maint. maint-NE/active. maint-FE/active. maint-FE/idle. Port locations (cabinet-carrier-slot-circuit) connected to the trunk. this field is blank.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
monitor trunk
trunk-groups hunt-groups
init inads craft cust rcust bcms browse
The following example shows the output from monitor trunk 78/1. Monitor trunk updates the data automatically every minute. If the trunk is ISDN.
monitor trunk 78/1 TRUNK STATUS Trunk Group/Member: 078/001 Port: 01C1505 Signaling Group ID: Connected Ports: Service State: in-service/idle Maintenance Busy? no CA-TSC State:
monitor trunk field descriptions
monitor trunk field descriptions 1 of 2 Field Trunk Group/ Member Port Signaling Group ID Connected Ports Service State Description Trunk group and group member number.

Specifying the group number releases a single group member and the member number. you receive different information with status trunk on the near end of the trunk from status trunk on the far end of the trunk.List of SAT Commands
monitor trunk field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Maintenance Busy CA-TSC State Description Identifies maintenance testing that occurs on the trunk. For more information see Busyout and Release Commands on page 33.
l
Note:
If you execute status trunk on the near end of the trunk. This is because the near end is unable to inform the far end of its maintenance state status. specifying the trunk group number releases members in a trunk group. 2 of 2
release trunk
release trunk Use release trunk to remove specified trunk groups or trunk group members from a maintenance busy state. If you execute status trunk on the far end of the trunk. it correctly indicates whether or not the trunk is in a maintenance state. The state of temporary signaling connections. it never indicates that the trunk is in a maintenance state.0 Issue 4 January 2008
629
.
l
Communication Manager Release 5. (connection set up to pass call information over PRI signaling links). You can also use status trunk to locate facilities with which the trunk is communicating. Note: If you use status trunk for a trunk that uses a 1d interface.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
release trunk
group member
trunk group number trunk group member number
init inads craft
status trunk
status trunk group# [/ member#] Use status trunk to see information about the current status of a single trunk or of all members of a trunk group.

Media Gateways and Servers (03-300430) (formerly 03-300190). The status of the call-associated temporary signaling connection. 2 of 2
Maintenance Busy CA-TSC State
Audio Connection Type Audio Switch Port Media Encryption
Communication Manager Release 5. or ip idle. pending-in-service. ip hairpin. Whether maintenance testing is currently being performed upon the trunk. out-of-service-FE (Far End). Not as secure as AES. maint-FE/idle. maint-FE/active. maint-NE/idle. pending-maint. standard used by U. out-of-service-NE (Near End). ip direct. maint-NE/active.List of SAT Commands
status trunk on S8700 IP-PNC field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Service State Description One of the following states appears: in-service/active. or disconnected.. Enter none for an unencrypted media stream. Reduces circuit-switched to IP call capacity by 25%. If a trunk is in ip-idle state. A TSC is a temporary connection set up to pass call information over ISDN-PRI signaling links. out-of-service. Shows a virtual port number (i. one starting with T). Explanations of these service states for each type of trunk appear in the maintenance object descriptions in the Maintenance Alarms for Avaya Communication Manager. government to protect sensitive (unclassified) information. NE (Near End) and FE (Far End) refer to which end of the trunk has placed the facility in its current state. Shows ip-tdm. Enter aes for Advanced Encryption Standard encryption. Enter aea for Avaya Encryption Algorithm. if any.S.e. the Audio Switch Port field is blank. in-service/idle.0 Issue 4 January 2008
631
.

In this instance. (555-233-504) for more information. If you issue status trunk for a non-IP station or the connection is hairpinned or shuffled.
status trunk 11/3 TRUNK STATUS NETWORK STATUS Average Jitter (ms) Last Ten Seconds # .List of SAT Commands
The following display shows a typical result when status trunk is entered for a trunk group with two members. making speech unintelligible.more than 255ms 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SUMMARY Worst Case this Call (ms): Average this Call (ms): Current Buffer Size (ms): 0 0 30 Packet Loss per Second Last Ten Seconds * .0 Issue 4 January 2008
633
. and a general loss of quality. When jitter increases. then the packet loss and jitter size information (page 2) does not appear. delays.
status trunk 1 TRUNK GROUP STATUS Member 01/01 01/02 Port 01A0101 04A0702 Service State in-service/idle in-service/idle Mtce Busy no no Connected Ports 01A0501 02B0607 04C0604
Use status trunk to generate a snapshot jitter and packet loss report for a particular trunk-group member. Refer to Administration for Network Connectivity for Avaya Communication Manager.100% loss 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Per Call Info Out of Order Counter: SSRC Change for Call: Last Rx Sequence #: Last Tx Sequence #: 0 0 0x1D64 0x1D1B Page 2 of 2
Worst Case this Call: Average this Call:
0 0
Communication Manager Release 5. jitter is the variability in the amount of time (in milliseconds) that packets are received over the network. the user experiences a noisy connection.

100% loss Description The average jitter in received packets from the last ten one-second intervals. # = more than 255 ms The ten most recent one-second samples of the lost packet information for the requested endpoint.Maintenance SAT Commands
status trunk field descriptions
status trunk Field Average Jitter Last Ten Seconds # . Worst Case this Call
Average this Call
Current Buffer Size
test trunk
test trunk group# [/ member#] [short | long] [repeat# | clear] [schedule]
634 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Last Tx Sequence No. Packet Loss: the worst-case.
Out of Order Counter SSRC Change for Call Last Rx Sequence No. The number of SSRC changes occurring during the current connection. * = maximum (100%) packet loss per second during the one-second interval. 1-second packet loss experienced during the current connection.more than 255 ms Packet Loss per Second Last Ten Seconds * . 1-second jitter (ms) experienced during the current connection. Jitter: the average jitter for the current connection (the running average of all the 1-second intervals during the connection. Packet Loss: the average packet loss number for the current connection (running average of all the 1-second intervals experienced during the connection. * appears when silence suppression is y on the ip-codec-set screen. Last transmitted data packet sequence number. The current jitter buffer size. Jitter: the worst-case. Last received data packet sequence number. A count of the number of out-of-order packets detected during the current connection. or when packet loss = 100%. Media Gateways and Servers
.

pending-inactive: the TSC is being released. as-needed: the TSC is established on an as needed basis. disabled.Maintenance SAT Commands
Use status tsc-administered to see the operational status of temporary signaling connections (TSCs) administered for a specified signaling group. pending-active: the TSC is about to come up. 1 of 2
Establish
636 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. permanent: the TSC is permanently established. This field pertains to the switch responsible for the origination of the administered TSC. TSC number in the signaling group Examples: status tsc-administered 1 status tsc-administered 1/2
init inads craft
The following display shows a typical result for status tsc-administered 1/1. etc. active: the administered TSC is up and user information can be exchanged end-to-end. Media Gateways and Servers
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login
status tsc-administered
signaling-group# tsc-index
Administered signaling group number.
status tsc-administered 1/1 ADMINISTERED NON-CALL-ASSOCIATED TSC STATUS TSC TSC Index State Establish Enabled Congested 1 inactive as-needed yes no
status tsc-administered field descriptions
status tsc-administered field descriptions 1 of 2 Field TSC Index TSC State Description The administered TSC index (1-759). inactive: the administered TSC is not functioning (D-channel out-of-service.).

clear: the TSC was congested during its active period and the congestion has been cleared. n: the administered TSC is not congested. y: the administered TSC is congested.0 Issue 4 January 2008
637
. A congested state indicates that the network cannot handle the receipt of USER INFORMATION messages for the administered TSC.List of SAT Commands
status tsc-administered field descriptions 2 of 2 Field Enabled Congested Description y: indicates that the administered TSCs have been enabled. 2 of 2
Communication Manager Release 5.

Media Gateways and Servers
. the screen shows whether TTI ports are being generated or removed.
tti
status tti
status tti Use status tti to see the TTI/PSA status screen and see if the TTI background maintenance task is active. If the TTI background maintenance task is active. See status tsc-administered for how to access additional data. The number of times each test in sequence is repeated.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description Login Default Feature Interaction
test tsc-administered
signaling group number/ tsc index repeat n
Signaling group number The number associated with each TSC in a signaling group. enter y in the TTI field on the Feature-Related System-Parameters screen.
638 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. To activate the TTI background maintenance task. A switched services request to run the TSC heartbeat test is also performed. the number of TTI-supported boards that have processed. and the number of TTI-supported boards that have not yet been processed.Maintenance SAT Commands
test tsc-administered
test tsc-administered signaling-group# / tsc-index [repeat#] [schedule] Use test tsc-administered to run diagnostic tests on any type of administered TSCs (Temporary Signaling Connections) on a signaling group.
init inads craft 1
Additional data available after running the test. The screen also shows the elapsed time since the background maintenance task started.

Maintenance SAT Commands
status tti and status psa field descriptions 2 of 2 Field TTI State # of Boards Completed Description off means that TTI is disabled voice. The ports on a “completed” circuit pack:
l l
if unadministered. If the task is completed or suspended. the administration was removed
# of Boards Left to Process Percent Complete Elapsed Time Since Task Started
The number of TTI-supported circuit packs that were not processed by the background maintenance task. This field is blank if the task is not active. Media Gateways and Servers
. Elapsed time in hours:minutes:seconds since the TTI background task was started. this field shows the elapsed time up to when the job finished or was suspended. were translated as TTI ports if administered. data shows the type of TTI ports that are being generated or removed Number of TTI-supported circuit packs that were processed by the background maintenance task. A ratio of the of number of circuit packs completed to the total number of circuit packs. 2 of 2
usage
list usage
list usage [ button-type | cti-link | digit-string | extension | holiday-table | hunt-group| integ-annc-board | ip-address | node-name | variables | vector ]
640 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.

announcements. vector steps. hunt groups. See list usage ip-address node-name on page 643.List of SAT Commands
Use list usage to see where an extension or object is used. List all the uses of the extension in stations administered with an off-PBX telephone application. List vectors and vector steps that refer to the specified Holiday Table. List extension and button number for buttons administered as: crisis alert night service night service hunt group night service trunk group See list usage button-type night-serve screen on page 642. bridged appearance buttons. List hunt group number and member number. and Best Service Routing Plans that use the specified digit string. List the extension (as Station Extension) for a shared-control IP Telephone address or a shared-control IP Softphone’s IP address. List vectors that use variables. See list usage cti-link on page 218.0 Issue 4 January 2008
641
. and which administered variable is used in each vector. intercom groups. List the forms on which the specified address is used. data module extensions. coverage paths. List information on the announcements and audio groups on an announcement circuit pack. List vectors and ip-services that use the specified CTI link. and/or through an event notification or domain control association. See list usage hunt group screen on page 642.
Action/ Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
list usage
schedule button-type crss-alert night-serv hunt-ns trunk-ns cti-link n
See Common Input Parameters on page 25. Example: list vector extension 300
digit-string extension x x vector
holiday-table hunt-group x integ-anncboard location ip-address
node-name variables x vector x
Communication Manager Release 5. and indicate whether the link is currently used to monitor a hunt-group as a controlling link. See list usage integ-annc-board on page 317. See list usage ip-address screen on page 643 List the forms on which the specified node-name is used. List the vectors. List all the vector numbers and step where the extension is used in a vector step. or anywhere that the extension can be used that might interfere with removal of the extension. vector routing tables.

This includes the IP Telephone or IP Softphone’s IP address when an IP telephone and IP Softphone are in service on the same extension simultaneously.
Communication Manager Release 5. along with their assigned category and the type of access granted to or denied this profile.
user-profile
See add user-profile on page 645 change user-profile on page 654 display user-profile on page 655 duplicate user-profile on page 655 export user-profile on page 655 import user-profile on page 657 list user-profiles on page 658 remove user-profile on page 659 See also user-profile-by-category on page 660 to display SAT forms in order by category and alphabetical within category. Consider permission entries as read/write for administration and yes/no for maintenance. A given object (SAT form) appears in one category.
add user-profile
add user-profile [n |next] Use add user-profile n to add a new SAT profile and administer permissions. where n is the profile number 20-69.List of SAT Commands
list usage ip-address field descriptions
list usage ip-address field descriptions Field Used By Description The forms on which the specified address is used. Each category is associated with a unique set of SAT forms.0 Issue 4 January 2008
645
. SAT command objects are listed in alphabetical order beginning on page 2. Station_Extension appears when a station using the ip-address is registered.

l If the field is changed from n to y. y/n y = If this profile has write access to the user-profile form. the profile has additional access restrictions to the station and vector forms. n = users may not grant permissions they themselves do not have. default is n y = extended profile is enabled.-" . Category displays n only when all objects in the category have permissions ". permissions for all objects assigned to the category are set to w--. y/n. This field also reflects the settings on pages 2-X of this form. l A login via CLAN receives access denied. but any new attempted session using this profile fails. y/n y = enable the category for this user-profile.List of SAT Commands
add user-profile field descriptions page 1 2 of 2 Field Acknowledgement Required This profile is disabled Description y/n y = users assigned this profile must acknowledge that they want to logoff while Facility Test if Notification is still administered. 2 of 2
Grant un-owned permissions
Extended profile
Name Cat Enbl
Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008
647
. users with this profile can grant any permission allowed for profile 18 (customer super user) to other profiles even when this profile does not itself have those permissions. Category displays y when any object in a category has permissions other than ". n = disable the category for this user-profile.-". Category name. l A login via Linux receives an error return code with the message access denied displayed via stderr. If y. permissions for all objects assigned to the category are set to --. A given object (SAT form) appears in one category. l If the field is changed from y to n. an existing active login using this profile is unaffected. y/n n = the profile is active y = the profile is disabled If changed to y. Each category is associated with a unique set of SAT forms. Category.

Display only. all affected objects are set to deny maintenance access but the current access for administration for each object in this category remains unchanged. l A blank character indicates no-change. if the permissions field is set to blank"-". 2. as opposed to alphabetically by SAT form command object. For example. Enter the permission.0 Issue 4 January 2008
649
. l Consider permission entries as read/write for administration and yes/no for maintenance. 1 of 2
Set All Permissions to Cat (category)
Communication Manager Release 5. Enter a letter to specify the category to set. 1. Letter that corresponds to the category. Set permissions for all objects in all categories. See the field description for Perm (permissions) on page 650 for more details.List of SAT Commands
add user-profile screen field descriptions page 2-X
add user-profile field descriptions page 2-x 1 of 2 Field Set Permissions for Category_ to _ Description Set permissions for only the objects assigned to this specific category. used for sorting alphabetically by category.

No access to maintenance commands. All permission fields on the User Profile page 2-x accept the full range of values (r.Maintenance SAT Commands
add user-profile field descriptions page 2-x 2 of 2 Field Perm (permissions) Description Enter a 2-character value.(dash) = deny.m) Independent of whether all values apply to the field or not. and list for the object assigned the r.(dash) = deny. Media Gateways and Servers
. all affected objects are set to deny maintenance access but the current access for administration for each object in this category remains unchanged. including blank. For example. No access. read/write for administration and deny. w. d) or (w. Name Name of the SAT form by command object. if the permissions field is set to blank-(dash). status. Settings on these pages are reflected on the Enbl field on page 1 of this form. Display only. yes/no for maintenance.
l
l
The second character specifies access for maintenance. display.
l l
For example: l r. Setting this field to m requires at least read access for administration. Consider permission entries as deny. w = change via commands shown inTable 40: SAT Command Object Access and Permissions on page 651. m = access to maintenance commands via commands shown in Table 40: SAT Command Object Access and Permissions on page 651. 2 of 2
650 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.permission. l wm grants full access for all commands to the object assigned this permission A blank character indicates no-change. w implies r. .
l l
. l The first character specifies access for administration.= a user with this profile can use the commands read. and no others. r = view without change via commands shown in table Table 40: SAT Command Object Access and Permissions on page 651. export.

it is deleted and replaced.0 Issue 4 January 2008
655
.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
duplicate user-profile
X Y
X is the number of an existing SAT profile greater than 17
export user-profile
export user-profile Use export user-profile to export SAT profile files for editing in a program such as Microsoft Excel.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
display user-profile
n
Profile number (20-69)
See add user-profile on page 645 for screen and field descriptions. The screen name is User Profile. If the file already exists.
Communication Manager Release 5. When export user-profile is entered. SAT profiles in Communication Manager numbered 20-69 are written to /var/home/ftp/pub/cmprofiles. Duplicate user-profile x copies the permissions from profile X to a new profile. Also use display user-profile-by-category.
duplicate user-profile
duplicate user-profile x Use duplicate user-profile to duplicate an existing SAT profile.txt.List of SAT Commands
display user-profile
Use display user-profile n to display the permissions of an existing SAT profile.

conf variable cm_profile_export_file) Description The file cannot be created.txt does not exist and the import aborted. it is created.txt write error (the actual file name from the ecs. they remain in Communication Manager unmodified. If profiles exist in Communication Manager that do not exist in the file.0 Issue 4 January 2008
657
. the profile in Communication Manager is overwritten.
Communication Manager Release 5.conf variable cm_profile_export_file) /var/home/ftp/pub/cmprofiles.txt shall be replaced by the actual file name from the ecs.txt create error (the actual file name from the ecs. The file cannot be written. The file does not exist. If a profile in the file already exists in Communication Manager.
import user-profile
import user-profile Use import user-profile to import SAT profiles numbered 20-69 from the /var/home/ftp/pub/cmprofiles. You can edit SAT profile information in Microsoft Excel and import the information back into Communication Manager.txt file to Communication Manager. 1 of 2
/var/home/ftp/pub/cmprofiles.
Import user-profile error messages
import user-profile error messages 1 of 2 Error message Description Result
Note:
Note: In the following text. the file /var/home/ftp/pub/cmprofiles. The import is aborted.
l l
If a profile in the file does not exist in Communication Manager.conf variable cm_profile_export_file.List of SAT Commands
Export user-profile error messages
export user-profile error messages Error message /var/home/ftp/pub/cmprofiles.
l
Use status logins to see SAT profile assignments.

Maintenance SAT Commands
import user-profile error messages 2 of 2 Error message var/home/ftp/pub/cmprofiles.
invalid profile identifier in file var/ home/ftp/pub/cmprofiles. The import is aborted.txt xxx = the file line number where the first error is found. Result The import is aborted.txt
The import is aborted. invalid permissions at line xxx in var/ home/ftp/pub/cmprofiles.txt not readable release mis-match Description The file is not readable. 2 of 2
list user-profiles
list user-profiles Use list user-profiles to see existing SAT profile numbers and profile names in numerical order. The import is aborted. Media Gateways and Servers
.
658 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Use status logins to see SAT profile assignments. The feature permissions characters are not valid.txt invalid feature name at line xxx in var/ home/ftp/pub/cmprofiles. The file contains a profile number lower than 20. Additional checks will prevent corruption and cannot be overridden. The feature names do not exactly match in spelling. The first line of the file does not contain a release number that exactly matches the release number of Communication Manager. order and number the existing profile forms in Communication Manager. The user is prompted as to whether or not to continue.

Also use add user-profile. see add user-profile screen display page 1 on page 646.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
add user-profile-by-category For the page one screen and field descriptions. Media Gateways and Servers
. The screen name is User Profile. where n is the profile number 20-69. and the type of access granted to or denied this profile. Pages 2 . Consider permission entries as read/write for administration and yes/no for maintenance.
add user-profile-by-category
Use add user-profile-by-category to add a new SAT profile and administer permissions.
660 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager.Maintenance SAT Commands
user-profile-by-category
See add user-profile-by-category on page 660 change user-profile-by-category on page 661 display user-profile-by-category on page 662 See also user-profile on page 645 to display SAT forms in alphabetical order regardless of category.X contain a list of SAT forms in order by category and alphabetically within category.

This allows resetting the circuit pack if it is in the insane state. Also use display user-profile. Pages 2 . Reset val performs the same functions as reset board.
val
reset val
reset val Use reset val to perform a software reset of every administered port on the circuit pack.Maintenance SAT Commands
display user-profile-by-category
display user-profile-by-category n Use display user-profile-by-category to display the permissions of an existing SAT profile. The screen name is User Profile.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
display user-profile-by-category
n
Profile number 20-69
See add user-profile on page 645 for screen and field descriptions.
Action/Object Qualifier Qualifier Description
reset val
location
Reset every administered port on the circuit pack.X contain a list of SAT forms in order by category and alphabetically within category. and the type of access granted to or denied this profile.
662 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Media Gateways and Servers
. but overrides querying the board to determine whether an announcement autosave is in process.

use fasttop -? to see a description of all fasttop command options. Linux commands for the server almdisplay ipsiversion loginreport productid serialnumber server statapp statuslicense swversion systat uname
Communication Manager Release 5.Chapter 2: Linux Bash Commands
Introduction
Linux platform commands are executed from the bash shell. Linux bash commands can be found in /opt/ecs/bin and /opt/ecs/sbin.
Server information
Use these commands to see information about the server. For example. These bash commands provide server information and help troubleshoot problems in the switch and other components. The user must be logged into the switch as root to perform certain bash commands.0 Issue 4 January 2008
665
. Use -? to see a description of command options for most Linux bash commands.

Display the command usage." for pause. The default value is 7 minutes (almcall -i). The number can have up to 30 digits (0-9). Set the alarm abbreviation timer between 1 and 24 hours. The number can have up to 30 digits (0-9). The interval can be between 1 and 20 minutes. Set alarm abbreviation on (y) or off (n) for the first telephone number. The value 0 is ignored. Dashes are allowed but are ignored. Dashes are allowed but are ignored.0 Issue 4 January 2008
671
. The default value is 4 (almcall -t) Set the interval between retries in minutes.Linux bash commands
To run almcall directly on the remote maintenance board.
-a y|n -s second-number
-b y|n -t timer -i interval
-?
Communication Manager Release 5. Set the second number to dial out to second-number." for pause. and ". Set alarm abbreviation on (y) or off (n) for the second telephone number. and ". almcall command options
command option description
almcall -f first-number
Display the administered information Set the first number to dial out to first-number. enter sudo /opt/alarming/bin/almcall.

The default value is 5. Display the command usage
-b y|n -e y|n -add -del -mod
-?
676 Maintenance Commands for Avaya Communication Manager. Set the trap community name to use the SNMP traps. and may not contain a space or tab. In order to modify the IP address. The -d flag with a valid/ existing IP address is required. The threshold value must be a value between 1-15 to avoid a problem being generated and resolved repeatedly. The community name is any string of characters and numbers. Display the command usage 2 of 2
-?
almsnmpconf
almsnmpconf [-d IP] [-c community] [-b [y|n]] [-e [y|n]] [-add] [-del] [-mod] [-?]
Use almsnmpconf to administer SNMP alarming to INADS. the trap destination must be deleted. then re-added. Media Gateways and Servers
. almsnmpconf command options
command option description
almsnmpconf -d IP -c community
Display the administered information for SNMP alarming to INADS.Linux Bash Commands
almnotif command options 2 of 2
command option description
-s threshold
Set the suspension threshold to threshold. Enable (y) or disable (n) alarm abbreviation for SNMP Enable (y) or disable (n) trap destination Add this as a new trap destination Delete this trap destination. Modify an existing trap destination. Set IP address to send SNMP traps. The -d flag with a valid/existing IP address is required.

Linux bash commands

almsummary
almsummary [-?]
Use almsummary to see a summary of outstanding Minor and Major alarms against Communication Manger and the server, if any exist. almsummary -? displays the command usage.

Display the current status of current alarm suppression Suppress alarm origination for 30 minutes. The default is y. Unsuppress alarm origination Number of minutes to suppress alarm origination, where minutes is in the range of 30-120. The default is 30 minutes. Display command option descriptions.

-?

authtype
Use authtype to see if a login is authenticated with a password or Access Security Gateway (ASG).

autosat
See sat on page 716.

Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008

677

Linux Bash Commands

cmpasswd
cmuserpasswd username
Use cmuserpasswd to create or change a login password.

The type of login being added. super-user nonsuper-user cm-only remote craft2 Profile for the login being added. Login of cm-only type requires a profile Login of remote type is never assigned a profile The login is asg authenticated. If no key is specified on the command line, one will be generated automatically. Not valid with -p. The login is password authenticated. [pass] is the encrypted password. Not valid with -P. Because this option requires an encrypted password, Avaya recommended you use this option without a password, then use cmpasswd to set the password.

Profile for the login being added. Login of cm-only type requires a profile. Login of remote type is never assigned a profile. The login is asg authenticated. If no key is specified on the command line, one will be generated automatically. Not valid with -p. The login is password authenticated. [pass] is the encrypted password. Not valid with -P. Because this option requires an encrypted password, Avaya recommended you use this option without a password, then use cmpasswd to set the password. Lock the login. Not valid with -U. Unlock the login. Not valid with -L.

-P[key]

-p[pass]

-L -U

Communication Manager Release 5.0 Issue 4 January 2008

679

Linux Bash Commands

cnc
cnc [ on | off | status ]
S8700 series

Use cnc to enable, disable, or status Control Network C on S8700 series servers.

! CAUTION:
CAUTION:

If Control Network C is enabled, executing configure server from the Maintenance Web Interface disables Control Network C. Execute the bash command cnc on to enable Control Network C.

Control Network C (cnc) uses the customer LAN for control signaling to TN2312 IPSI circuit packs on IP-PNCs. Use Control Network C when Control Networks A and B are administered as duplicated control networks to a Direct, CSS, or ATM-connected Port Network configuration. cnc command options
command option description

cnc

on off status

Enables Control Network C on the S8700 series servers. Disables Control Network C on S8700 series servers. Determine whether Control Network C on S8700 series server is enabled or disabled.

corevector
corevector [ -l ] [ -s [-f]] [ -c arg ] [ -? ] corevector is used to request or clear coredump requests. The core dump files are
generated prior to the execution of the restart requested. After the core files are taken, a reload of Communication Manager processes is executed. Specifying single process restart will also create a core file for terminal processes. When the core files are to be taken, the state of health is lowered to force a server interchange. The core files are only taken on the ACTIVE server unless the -f (force) option is specified. corevector -? displays the command option descriptions corevector -l lists the current settings corevector -s sets the core dump vector using the options noted below for option -c corevector -f forces the core dump vector using the options noted below for option -c